Thermo Fisher Scientific AmpFLSTR SEfiler PCR Amplification Kit User Manual

AmpF

lSTR

®

SEfiler

™

PCR Amplification Kit

User’s Manual

DRAFT

March 22, 2012 2:04 pm, SEfiler_TitlePage.fm

© 2012 Life Technologies Corporation. All rights reserved.

Printed in the U.S.A.

TRADEMARKS:

AB (Design), ABI PRISM, AmpF l

STR, Applied Biosystems, COfiler, GeneScan, Genotyper, LIZ, MicroAmp, PET, SGM Plus, and VIC are registered trademarks of Applied Biosystems or its subsidiaries in the U.S. and/or certain other countries.

5-FAM, 6-FAM, Applera, Hi-Di, JOE, NED, POP-4, Profiler Plus, ROX, and SEfiler are trademarks of Applied Biosystems or its subsidiaries in the U.S. and/or certain other countries.

AmpliTaq, AmpliTaq Gold, GeneAmp, QuantiBlot, and TaqMan are registered trademarks of Roche Molecular Systems, Inc.

Mac and Macintosh are registered trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc.

Windows NT is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation.

All other trademarks are the sole property of their respective owners.

Part Number 4335145 Rev. G

03/2012

DRAFT

March 22, 2012 2:04 pm, SEfiler_TitlePage.fm

Contents

Preface

Obtaining Technical Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi

Safety and EMC Compliance Information

General Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiii

Chemical Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiv

About MSDSs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvi

Chapter 1 Introduction

Product Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2

Multicomponent Analysis Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-3

Materials for the Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-7

Chapter 2 PCR Amplification

PCR Work Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2

PCR Equipment and Materials. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3

Preparing the Reagents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5

Preparing the DNA Samples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7

Performing PCR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8

Chapter 3 Setting up the ABI P

RISM

310 Genetic Analyzer

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2

ABI P

RISM

310 Genetic Analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3

Setting up the Genetic Analyzer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4

iii AmpF

lSTR SEfiler PCR Amplification Kit User's Manual

DRAFT

March 22, 2012 2:04 pm, SEfilerTOC.fm

Chapter 4 Running the 310 Genetic Analyzer on

Windows NT OS

Software Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

Equipment and Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

Setting Up the Run for Windows NT OS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

Filter Set G5 Module Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7

Five-Dye Data Collection Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8

Making a Matrix File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11

Running DNA Samples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15

Setting Up Software Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19

GeneScan Software Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24

Shutting Down the Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28

Dedicated Equipment and Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29

Chapter 5 Running the 310 Genetic Analyzer on Mac OS

Software Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2


Setting Up the Run for a Macintosh Computer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

Filter Set G5 Module Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7

Five-Dye Data Collection Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

Making a Matrix File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11

Running DNA Samples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15

Setting Up Software Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19

GeneScan Software Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24

Off-Scale Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28

Shutting Down the Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29

Dedicated Equipment and Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30

Chapter 6 Protocols for ABI P

RISM

377 DNA Sequencer with

Windows NT OS

Analysis Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2


iv AmpF


DRAFT


36-cm Well-to-Read Gel Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3

Setting Up the Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-10

Electrophoresis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-21

Analyzing the Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-25

Dedicated Equipment and Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-29

Chapter 7 ABI P

RISM


Protocols for Processing AmpF lSTR PCR Amplification Kit

PCR Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-2

Process Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-3

3100 Data Collection Software Version 1.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-6

Preparing for a Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-7

Performing a Spectral Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-8

Preparing and Running Your Samples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-17

Examples of DNA Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-24

Materials Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-29

Chapter 8 Experiments and Results

Experiments Using AmpF l STR SEfiler PCR Amplification Kit . . . . . . . . .8-2

Developmental Validation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-3

Accuracy, Precision, and Reproducibility. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-5

Extra Peaks in the Electropherogram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-22

Characterization of Loci . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-32

Species Specificity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-34

Sensitivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-36

Stability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-38

Mixture Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-40

Data Interpretation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-45

Population Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-46

Mutation Rate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-61

Probability of Identity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-62

Probability of Paternity Exclusion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-63

v AmpF


DRAFT


Chapter 9 Genotyping Using Windows NT OS

Using Genotyper Software for Automated Genotyping . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2

Understanding the AmpF lSTR SEfiler Kit Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10

Determining Genotypes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18

Chapter 10 Genotyping Using the Macintosh OS

Using Genotyper Software for Automated Genotyping . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2

Understanding the AmpF lSTR SEfiler Kit Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10

Determining Genotypes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18

Appendix A Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2

Appendix B Laboratory Setup

Lab Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2

Appendix C DNA Extraction Protocols

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-2

Storage of Samples for DNA Extraction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-3

Appendix D DNA Quantification

Importance of Quantification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D-2

Using the QuantiBlot Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D-3

Commonly Asked Questions about the QuantiBlot Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D-5

vi AmpF


DRAFT


Appendix E ABI P

RISM

GeneScan Analysis Software for the

Windows NT OS

Overview of Analysis Parameters and Size Caller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-2

GeneScan Analysis Software Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-3

Analysis Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-4

Analysis Parameters Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-5

Data Processing: Smooth Options Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-6

Peak Detection: Min. Peak Half Width Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-8

Polynomial Degree and Peak Window Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-9

Parameters for Peak Detection of Slope Threshold. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-17

Baseline Window Size Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-20

Size Caller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-30

Appendix F References

Index

AmpF


DRAFT


vii

viii AmpF


DRAFT


Preface

About This

Manual

The AmpFlSTR

®

SEfiler

™

PCR Amplification Kit User’s Manual

can be used as a reference to operate the Applied Biosystems instruments, chemistries, associated software, and procedures detailed in this user’s manual. Refer to the specific chapters for information on related software, chemistries and their use.

Audience

This manual is intended for users of protocols for processing

AmpFlSTR

ABI P

RISM

®

®

PCR Amplification Kit PCR products with

instruments and software. Some examples of instruments and software are listed below:

• ABI P

RISM

Microsoft

®

®

310 Genetic Analyzer for both the Macintosh

®

and

Windows NT

®

operating systems

• ABI P

RISM system

®

377 DNA Sequencer for Windows NT operating

• ABI P

RISM

®

377 DNA Sequencer with XL Upgrade

(ABI P

RISM

377XL) for Windows NT operating system

• ABI P

RISM

®

377 DNA Sequencer with 96-Lane Upgrade (377-96 instrument) for Windows NT operating system

• ABI P

RISM

®

3100 Genetic Analyzer, using ABI P

RISM

Data Collection Software Version 1.1

®

3100

• ABI P

RISM

®

GeneScan

®

Analysis Software for the Windows NT operating system

Related

Documentation

The following related documents are shipped with the system:

• AmpFlSTR

®

SEfiler PCR Amplification Kit User’s Manual

• AmpFlSTR

®

SEfiler Kit Template 8 CD

AmpF


DRAFT

March 22, 2012 2:04 pm, SEfiler_Preface.fm

ix

Preface

Typefaces and

Symbols

The following table describes the typefaces that are used to indicate selections on windows and the meaning of text symbols in this user’s manual.

Typeface Conventions

Typeface or Symbol

Menu item, icon, or

button

Italics

>

Shortcuts

Meaning Example

Menu items, icons, or buttons on the windows that activate other processes are shown in bold when you are instructed to select them.

Click Execute.

Names of manuals or documents are shown in italics.

AmpF

l STR

®

SEfiler

PCR Amplification Kit

User’s Manual

This symbol represents the menu and next item to select on a submenu.

Select File > New to open a new document.

Keyboard shortcuts for window operations are shown in two formats:

1. Commas between commands. When commands are shown in this format, press each key sequentially without holding them down.

2. Plus sign (+) shown between commands. When commands are shown in this format, press and hold the keys together.

Alt, W, T

Press Alt, then press

W, then T to tile the open windows.

Ctrl+N

Press and hold Ctrl and N together to open the New

Document dialog box.

x AmpF


DRAFT


Preface

Obtaining Technical Support

Applied

Biosystems

Web Site

A services and support page is available on the Applied Biosystems

Web site. To access this, go to:

http://www.appliedbiosystems.com

and click the link for services and support.

At the services and support page, you can:

• Search through frequently asked questions (FAQs)

• Submit a question directly to Technical Support

• Order Applied Biosystems user documents, MSDSs, certificates of analysis, and other related documents

• Download PDF documents

• Obtain information about customer training

• Download software updates and patches

In addition, the services and support page provides worldwide telephone and fax numbers to contact Applied Biosystems Technical

Support and Sales facilities.

Send Us Your

Comments

Applied Biosystems welcomes your comments and suggestions for improving its manuals. You can e-mail your comments to:

[email protected]

AmpF


DRAFT


xi

Preface xii AmpF


DRAFT


Safety and EMC Compliance

Information

General Safety

Documentation

User Attention

Words

Five user attention words appear in the text of all Applied Biosystems user documentation. Each word implies a particular level of observation or action as described below.

Note:

Calls attention to useful information.

IMPORTANT!

Indicates information that is necessary for proper instrument operation, accurate chemistry kit use, or safe use of a chemical.

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury. It may also be used to alert against unsafe practices.

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.

Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury. This signal word is to be limited to the most extreme situations.

Site Preparation and Safety Guide

A site preparation and safety guide is a separate document sent to all customers who have purchased an Applied Biosystems instrument.

Refer to the guide written for your instrument for information on site preparation, instrument safety, chemical safety, and waste profiles.

AmpF


DRAFT

March 22, 2012 2:04 pm, Safety_EMC_Comp.fm

xiii

Safety and EMC Compliance Information

Chemical Safety

Chemical Hazard

Warning

CHEMICAL HAZARD. Some of the chemicals used with Applied Biosystems instruments and protocols are potentially hazardous and can cause injury, illness, or death.

• Read and understand the material safety data sheets (MSDSs) provided by the chemical manufacturer before you store, handle, or work with any chemicals or hazardous materials.

• Minimize contact with chemicals. Wear appropriate personal protective equipment when handling chemicals (e.g., safety glasses, gloves, or protective clothing). For additional safety guidelines, consult the MSDS.

• Minimize the inhalation of chemicals. Do not leave chemical containers open. Use only with adequate ventilation (e.g., fume hood). For additional safety guidelines, consult the MSDS.

• Check regularly for chemical leaks or spills. If a leak or spill occurs, follow the manufacturer’s cleanup procedures as recommended on the MSDS.

• Comply with all local, state/provincial, or national laws and regulations related to chemical storage, handling, and disposal.

Chemical Waste

Hazard Warning

CHEMICAL WASTE HAZARD. Wastes produced by Applied Biosystems instruments are potentially hazardous and can cause injury, illness, or death.

• Read and understand the material safety data sheets (MSDSs) provided by the manufacturers of the chemicals in the waste container before you store, handle, or dispose of chemical waste.

• Handle chemical wastes in a fume hood.

• Minimize contact with chemicals. Wear appropriate personal protective equipment when handling chemicals (e.g., safety glasses, gloves, or protective clothing). For additional safety guidelines, consult the MSDS.

• Minimize the inhalation of chemicals. Do not leave chemical containers open. Use only with adequate ventilation (e.g., fume hood). For additional safety guidelines, consult the MSDS.

• After emptying the waste container, seal it with the cap provided.

• Dispose of the contents of the waste tray and waste bottle in accordance with good laboratory practices and local, state/provincial, or national environmental and health regulations.

xiv AmpF


DRAFT



General

Biohazard

BIOHAZARD. Biological samples such as tissues, body fluids, and blood of humans and other animals have the potential to transmit infectious diseases. Read and follow the guidelines published in Biosafety in Microbiological and Biomedical

Laboratories (http://bmbl.od.nih.gov) and in the Occupational Safety and Health Standards, Bloodborne pathogens

(http://www.access.gpo.gov/nara/cfr/ waisidx_01/

29cfr1910a_01.htm). Follow all applicable local, state/provincial, and/or national regulations. Wear appropriate protective eyewear, clothing, and gloves.

Electric Shock

ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD. To reduce the chance of electrical shock, do not remove covers that require tool access. No user serviceable parts are inside. Refer servicing to

Applied Biosystems qualified service personnel.

Laser Exposure

LASER HAZARD. Exposure to direct or reflected laser light can burn the retina and leave permanent blind spots. Never look directly into the laser beam. Remove jewelry and other items that can reflect the beam into your eyes. Protect others from exposure to the beam.

AmpF


DRAFT


xv


About MSDSs

Some of the chemicals used with this instrument may be listed as hazardous by their manufacturer. When hazards exist, warnings are prominently displayed on the labels of all chemicals.

Chemical manufacturers supply a current MSDS before or with shipments of hazardous chemicals to new customers and with the first shipment of a hazardous chemical after an MSDS update.

MSDSs provide you with the safety information you need to store, handle, transport and dispose of the chemicals safely.

We strongly recommend that you replace the appropriate MSDS in your files each time you receive a new MSDS packaged with a hazardous chemical.

CHEMICAL HAZARD. Be sure to familiarize yourself with the MSDSs before using reagents or solvents.

Ordering MSDSs

You can order free additional copies of MSDSs for chemicals manufactured or distributed by Applied Biosystems using the contact information below.

To obtain documents through the Applied Biosystems Web site:

1. Go to

http://docs.appliedbiosystems.com/msdssearch.html

2. In the SEARCH field, type in the chemical name, part number, or other information that will appear in the MSDS and click SEARCH.

Note:

You may also select the language of your choice from the drop-down list.

3. When the Search Results page opens, find the document you want and click on it to open a PDF of the document.

For chemicals not manufactured or distributed by Applied

Biosystems, call the chemical manufacturer.

xvi AmpF


DRAFT


Introduction

1

1

In This Chapter

This chapter describes the contents of the AmpFlSTR

®

SEfiler

™

PCR Amplification Kit, and provides an overview of the kit.

Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2

Multicomponent Analysis Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-3

Materials for the Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-7

About This User’s

Manual

This user’s manual provides users of the AmpFlSTR SEfiler PCR

Amplification Kit with protocols and summaries of experiments performed by Applied Biosystems. Applied Biosystems recommends that users conduct similar experiments in their laboratory to evaluate the DNA typing system consisting of the AmpFlSTR SEfiler PCR

Amplification Kit, reagents, software, and ABI P

RISM

instrument(s).

Applied Biosystems suggests that users apply the standards established by the community for which this test will be used to further evaluate this DNA typing system.

This user’s manual describes:

• Materials and equipment required to use the AmpFlSTR

SEfiler kit

• How to use the kit to amplify DNA samples

• How to perform automated detection

• How to analyze results

AmpF


DRAFT

March 22, 2012 1:12 pm, 1_Introduction.fm

1-1

Chapter 1 Introduction

Product Overview

Purpose

The AmpFlSTR SEfiler PCR Amplification Kit is a short tandem repeat (STR) multiplex assay that amplifies 11 tetranucleotide repeat loci, including the SE33 locus. The kit simultaneously coamplifies the seven ENFSI loci, the highly polymorphic SE33 (ACTBP2) locus, the Amelogenin locus, and the D2S1338 and D19S433 loci.

Five-Dye DNA

Fragment

Analysis

The SEfiler kit uses a five-dye fluorescent system for automated

DNA fragment analysis. Applied Biosystems PET ™ and LIZ ® dyes expand the spectral detection range that can be used on ABI P

RISM

® instruments. Together with 6-FAM ™ , VIC ® , and NED ™ dyes, the spectral emission for this five-dye set extends to 660 nm.

About the

Primers

The AmpFlSTR SEfiler kit employs the same primer sequences as used in all previous AmpFlSTR kits. Also included are primers for the SE33 locus.

1-2 AmpF


DRAFT


Multicomponent Analysis Overview

Multicomponent Analysis Overview

About

Multicomponent

Analysis

Multicomponent analysis is the process that separates the five different fluorescent dye colors into distinct spectral components.

The four dyes used in the AmpFlSTR SEfiler PCR Amplification Kit to label samples are 6-FAM, VIC, NED, and PET dyes. The fifth dye,

LIZ, is used to label the GeneScan ® -500 Size Standard.

How

Multicomponent

Analysis Works

Each of these fluorescent dyes emits its maximum fluorescence at a different wavelength. During data collection on the ABI P

RISM instruments, the fluorescent signals are separated by a diffraction grating according to their wavelengths and projected onto a charge-coupled device (CCD) camera in a predictably spaced pattern.

6-FAM dye emits at the shortest wavelength and is displayed as blue, followed by the VIC dye (green), NED dye (yellow), PET dye (red), and LIZ dye (orange).

Figure 1-1 shows emission spectra of the five dyes used in the

AmpFlSTR SEfiler PCR Amplification Kit.

Although each of these dyes emits its maximum fluorescence at a different wavelength, there is some overlap in the emission spectra between the dyes. The goal of multicomponent analysis is to effectively correct for spectral overlap.

100

80

60

40

20

0

500

6-FAM VIC NED PET LIZ

550 600

Wavelength (nm)

650

Figure 1-1 Emission spectra of the five dyes

700

AmpF


DRAFT


1-3


Allelic Ladder and

Control DNA

Information

Table 1-1 shows the loci amplified and the corresponding dyes used.

The AmpFl STR SEfiler Allelic Ladder is used to genotype the analyzed samples. The alleles contained in the allelic ladder and the genotype of the AmpFlSTR Control DNA 007 are listed in the table.

Table 1-1 AmpF

lSTR SEfiler Kit Loci and Alleles

Locus

Designation

Chromosome

Location

Dye

Label

AmpF

lSTR

Allelic Ladder

Alleles

AmpF

lSTR

Control

DNA 007

Genotype

D2S1338

D3S1358

D8S1179

D16S539

D18S51

D19S433 a

2q35–37.1

3p

8

16q24-qter

18q21.3

19q12–13.1

6-FAM 15, 16, 17, 18,

19, 20, 21, 22,

23, 24, 25, 26,

27, 28

20, 23

6-FAM 12, 13, 14, 15,

16, 17, 18, 19

15, 16

VIC 8, 9, 10, 11,

12, 13, 14, 15,

16, 17, 18, 19

12, 13

6-FAM 5, 8, 9, 10, 11,

12, 13, 14, 15

9, 10

PET

NED

7, 9, 10, 10.2,

11, 12, 13,

13.2, 14, 14.2,

15, 16, 17, 18,

19, 20, 21, 22,

23, 24, 25, 26,

27

12, 15

9, 10, 11, 12,

12.2, 13, 13.2,

14, 14.2, 15,

15.2, 16, 16.2,

17, 17.2

14, 15 a. In some literature references, this locus is designated as D6S502.

1-4 AmpF


DRAFT


Multicomponent Analysis Overview

Table 1-1 AmpF

lSTR SEfiler Kit Loci and Alleles (continued)

Locus

Designation

Chromosome

Location

Dye

Label

AmpF

lSTR

Allelic Ladder

Alleles

AmpF

lSTR

Control

DNA 007

Genotype

D21S11

FGA

SE33

TH01

21q11.2–q21

4q28

6

11p15.5

PET

NED

VIC

NED

24, 24.2, 25,

26, 27, 28,

28.2, 29, 29.2,

30, 30.2, 31,

31.2, 32, 32.2,

33, 33.2, 34,

34.2, 35, 35.2,

36, 37, 38

28, 31

17, 18, 19, 20,

21, 22, 23, 24,

25, 26, 26.2,

27, 28, 29, 30,

30.2, 31.2,

32.2, 33.2,

42.2, 43.2,

44.2, 45.2,

46.2, 47.2,

48.2, 50.2,

51.2

24, 26

4.2, 6.3, 8, 9,

11, 12, 13, 14,

15, 16, 17, 18,

19, 20, 20.2,

21, 21.1, 21.2,

22.2, 23.2,

24.2, 25.2,

26.2, 27.2,

28.2, 29.2,

30.2, 31.2,

32.2, 33.2,

34.2, 35, 35.2,

36, 37

17, 25.2

4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9,

9.3, 10, 11,

13.3

7, 9.3

AmpF


DRAFT


1-5


Table 1-1 AmpF

lSTR SEfiler Kit Loci and Alleles (continued)

Locus

Designation

Chromosome

Location

Dye

Label

AmpF

lSTR

Allelic Ladder

Alleles

AmpF

lSTR

Control

DNA 007

Genotype

vWA

Amelogenin

12p12-pter

X: p22.1–22.3

Y: p11.2

6-FAM 11, 12, 13, 14,

15, 16, 17, 18,

19, 20, 21, 22,

23, 24

14, 16

VIC X, Y X, Y

1-6 AmpF


DRAFT


Materials for the Kit

Materials for the Kit

Kit Contents

The AmpFlSTR SEfiler kit (P/N 4335129) contains sufficient quantities of the following reagents to perform 100 50-

μL amplifications:

Table 1-2 Reagents

Component Description Volume

AmpF lSTR PCR

Reaction Mix

Two tubes containing MgCl

2

, deoxynucleotide triphosphates, and bovine serum albumin in buffer with 0.05% sodium azide

1.1 mL/tube

AmpF lSTR SEfiler

Primer Set

One tube containing fluorescently labeled primers and non-labeled primers

AmpliTaq Gold

®

DNA Polymerase

AmpF lSTR

Control DNA 007

1.1 mL

Two tubes of enzyme with an activity of 5 U/

μL

One tube containing 0.10 ng/

μL human male genomic DNA in

0.05% sodium azide and buffer

(refer to

“Allelic Ladder and Control

DNA Information” on page 1-4

for profile)

50

μL/tube

0.3 mL

50

μL

AmpF lSTR

SEfiler

Allelic Ladder

One tube of AmpF lSTR SEfiler

Allelic Ladder containing amplified alleles. See the table under

“Allelic

Ladder and Control DNA

Information” on pages 1-4

through

1-6 for a list of alleles included in

the allelic ladder.

Mineral Oil One dropper bottle 5 mL

AmpF


DRAFT


1-7


Kit Storage and

Stability

The table below lists the storage temperature for the kit components.

IMPORTANT!

The fluorescent dyes attached to the primers are light-sensitive. Protect the AmpFlSTR SEfiler Primer Set from light when not in use. Amplified DNA, AmpFlSTR SEfiler Allelic Ladder and GeneScan-500 LIZ Size Standard should also be protected from light.

Table 1-3 Storage Temperatures

Storage Temperature

2 to 8 °C

Component

AmpF lSTR PCR Reaction Mix

AmpF lSTR

SEfiler Primer Set

AmpF lSTR Control DNA 9947A

AmpF lSTR

SEfiler Allelic Ladder

AmpliTaq Gold DNA Polymerase –15 to –25 °C

1-8 AmpF


DRAFT


PCR Amplification

2

2

In This Chapter

This chapter describes how to prepare the master mix for amplifying sample DNA using the AmpFlSTR

®

SEfiler

™

PCR Amplification

Kit, how to prepare samples and controls, and how to perform PCR.

PCR Work Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2

PCR Equipment and Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3

Preparing the Reagents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5

Preparing the DNA Samples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7

Performing PCR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8

AmpF


2-1

DRAFT

March 22, 2012 1:12 pm, 2_DNAAmplification.fm

Chapter 2 PCR Amplification

PCR Work Areas

Setup Work Area

IMPORTANT!

These items should never leave the PCR Setup Work

Area. For more information on implementing PCR technology, refer

to Appendix B, “Laboratory Setup.”

• Calculator

• Gloves, disposable

• Marker pen, permanent

• Microcentrifuge

• Microcentrifuge tubes, 1.5-mL, or 2.0-mL, or other appropriate clean tube (for Master Mix preparation)

• Microcentrifuge tube rack

• Pipet tips, sterile, disposable hydrophobic filter-plugged

• Pipettors

• Tube decapper, autoclavable

• Vortex

Amplified DNA

Work Area

IMPORTANT!

The GeneAmp ® PCR Systems should be placed in the

Amplified DNA Work Area.

• GeneAmp PCR System 9700, or

GeneAmp PCR System 9600

• GeneAmp PCR System 2400

• DNA Thermal Cycler 480

2-2 AmpF


DRAFT


PCR Equipment and Materials

PCR Equipment and Materials

Equipment and

Materials

Required but not

Supplied

The tables below list the equipment and materials required in addition to the reagents supplied with the AmpFlSTR SEfiler kit for

PCR amplification. Refer to

GeneAmp PCR Instrument Systems and

Accessories on page 2-4

.

Required Equipment:

Equipment

GeneAmp PCR System 9700, or

GeneAmp PCR System 9600

Microcentrifuge

Pipettors

Vortex

Source

Applied Biosystems

(P/N N805-0001)

Major laboratory supplier

(MLS)

MLS

MLS

Required Materials:

Materials

MicroAmp ® 96-Well Trays for Tubes with

Caps

MicroAmp

®

Reaction Tubes with Caps,

0.2-mL

MicroAmp ® Reaction Tubes (8 tubes/strip)

MicroAmp

MicroAmp

MicroAmp

®

®

®

Caps (8 caps/strip)

96-Well Tray/Retainer Set

96-Well Base

MicroAmp ® Optical 96-Well Reaction Plate

Microcentrifuge tubes, 1.5-mL


Source

Applied Biosystems

(P/N N801-0541)

Applied Biosystems

(P/N N801-0540)

Applied Biosystems

(P/N N801-0580)

Applied Biosystems

(P/N N801-0535)

Applied Biosystems

(P/N 403081)

Applied Biosystems

(P/N N801-0531)

Applied Biosystems

(P/N N801-0560)

MLS

MLS

AmpF


2-3

DRAFT



Required Materials: (continued)

Materials

Pipet tips, sterile, disposable hydrophobic filter-plugged

Tape, labeling

Tube, 50-mL Falcon

Tube decapper, autoclavable

Deionized water, PCR grade

Tris-HCL, pH 8.0

0.5-M EDTA

MLS

MLS

MLS

MLS

MLS

MLS

MLS

Source

GeneAmp PCR Instrument Systems and Accessories

IMPORTANT!

The GeneAmp PCR Instrument Systems should be placed in the Amplified DNA Work Area.

• DNA Thermal Cycler 480 (P/N N801-0100, N801-0101,

N801-0102)

• DNA Thermal Cycler 480 Accessories:

– GeneAmp Autoclaved Thin-Walled Reaction Tubes

(P/N N801-0611)

– GeneAmp Thin-Walled Reaction Tubes (P/N N801-0537)

– Temperature Verification System (P/N N801-0434)

• GeneAmp PCR System 2400 (P/N N803-0001, N803-0002,

N803-0003)

• GeneAmp PCR System 2400 Accessories:

– MicroAmp ® Autoclaved Reaction Tube with Caps

(P/N N801-0612)

– Bulkpack MicroAmp Reaction Tube with Caps

(P/N N801-1540)

– MicroAmp 24-Well Bases (P/N N801-5531)

– MicroAmp 24-Well Tray (P/N N801-5532)

– Temperature Verification System (P/N N801-0435)

2-4 AmpF


DRAFT


Preparing the Reagents

Preparing the Reagents

TE Buffer

The final concentration of TE buffer is 10 mM Tris-HCl, 0.1 mM

EDTA, pH 8.0.

To prepare TE buffer:

1. Mix together:

• 10 mL of 1 M Tris-HCl, pH 8.0

• 0.2 mL of 0.5 M EDTA

• 990 mL glass-distilled or deionized water

CHEMICAL HAZARD. EDTA may cause eye, skin, and respiratory tract irritation. Please read the MSDS, and follow the handling instructions. Wear appropriate protective eye wear, clothing, and gloves.

Note:

Adjust the volumes accordingly for specific needs.

2. Aliquot and autoclave the solutions.

3. Store at room temperature.

Master Mix

Prepare the master mix by combining AmpFlSTR ® PCR Reaction

Mix, AmpliTaq Gold ® DNA Polymerase, and AmpFlSTR SEfiler

Primer Set reagents.

IMPORTANT!

The fluorescent dyes attached to the primers are light-sensitive. Protect the AmpFlSTR SEfiler Primer Set from light when not in use. Also protect the AmpFlSTR SEfiler Allelic Ladder,

GeneScan

®

-500 LIZ

®

Size Standard and amplified, fluorescently-labeled PCR products from light.

AmpF


2-5

DRAFT



To prepare the master mix:

1. Determine the total number of samples, including controls.

2.

IMPORTANT!

Vortex the following reagents at medium speed for 5 seconds:

• AmpFlSTR PCR Reaction Mix

• AmpliTaq Gold DNA Polymerase

• AmpFlSTR SEfiler Primer Set

CHEMICAL HAZARD.

AmpliTaq Gold DNA Polymerase may cause eye and skin irritation. It may cause discomfort if swallowed or inhaled. Please read the MSDS, and follow the handling instructions. Wear appropriate protective eye wear, clothing, and gloves.

3. Spin the tubes briefly in a microcentrifuge to remove any liquid from the caps.

4. Select a clean, unused tube for the master mix.

If you are preparing...

≤ 84 samples and controls

85–110 samples and controls

> 110 samples and controls

Then use a...

1.5-mL microcentrifuge tube

2.0-mL microcentrifuge tube tube that is appropriate

5. Calculate the required amount of components as shown:

Note:

The formulation in the list below provides a slight overfill to allow for volume lost in pipetting.

• Number of samples x 21

μL of

AmpFl

STR PCR Reaction

Mix

• Number of samples x 1.0

μL of AmpliTaq Gold DNA

Polymerase

• Number of samples x 11

μL of

AmpFl

STR SEfiler Primer

Set

2-6 AmpF


DRAFT


Preparing the DNA Samples

To prepare the master mix: (continued)

6. Vortex the master mix at medium speed for 5 sec.

7. Spin briefly in a microcentrifuge to remove any residue from the caps.

8. Dispense 30

μL of master mix per PCR tube.

Preparing the DNA Samples

DNA Sample

Input

DNA amplification with the AmpFlSTR

®

SEfiler

™

kit requires

20

μL of DNA at a recommended concentration of 1.0–2.5 ng/μL.

Preparing the

Samples

Note:

The final volume in each PCR tube is 50

μL.

If you are preparing the...

Then...

add 20

μL of sample to the PCR tube.

DNA test sample tube and the sample DNA concentration is

≤ 0.125 ng/μL

DNA test sample tube and the sample DNA concentration is

> 0.125 ng/

μL

Positive Control Tube

Negative Control Tube dilute a portion of the sample with

TE buffer (see Appendix , “TE

Buffer,”page 2-5 for preparation) so

that only 1.0–2.5 ng of total DNA is in a volume of 20

μL (final sample concentration is 0.05–0.125 ng/

μL).

1. Vortex the AmpF lSTR ® Control

DNA 007 tube (0.10 ng/

μL).

2. Spin the tube briefly in a microcentrifuge to remove any liquid from the cap.

3. Add 20

μL (2 ng) of AmpFlSTR

Control DNA 007 to the Positive

Control Tube.

add 20

μL of TE buffer to the labeled

Negative Control Tube.

AmpF


2-7

DRAFT



Performing PCR

Thermal Cyclers

Use any of the following thermal cyclers to amplify loci using the

AmpFlSTR SEfiler kit:

• GeneAmp

®

PCR System 9700

• GeneAmp ® PCR System 9600

• GeneAmp

®

PCR System 2400

• DNA Thermal Cycler 480

Amplifying the

DNA

To amplify the DNA:

1. Program the thermal cycling conditions. The thermal cycling parameters for GeneAmp thermal cyclers and DNA Thermal

Cycler 480 are the same.

IMPORTANT!

If using the GeneAmp PCR System 9700, select the 9600 Emulation Mode.

IMPORTANT!

If using DNA Thermal Cycler 480, add one drop of mineral oil to the GeneAmp tubes.

Initial

Incubation

Step

Denature Anneal Extend

Final

Extension

HOLD

95 °C

11 min

CYCLE (28 cycles)

94 °C

1 min

59 °C

1 min

72 °C

1 min

HOLD

60 °C

45 min

Final

Step

HOLD

4–25 °C

(forever)

Note:

If leaving the amplified products in the thermal cycler for more than 18 hr., set the final step to HOLD at 4–25 °C forever. The final step can be held anywhere in this range. Each laboratory should determine the final time and temperature to store PCR products in the thermal cycler.

2-8 AmpF


DRAFT


Performing PCR

To amplify the DNA: (continued)

2. Place the tray in the thermal cycler.

PHYSICAL INJURY HAZARD.

During instrument operation, the temperature of the heated cover can be as high as 108 °C, and the temperature of the sample block can be as high as 100 °C. Keep hands away from the heated cover and sample block.

3. Close the heated cover.

PHYSICAL INJURY HAZARD.

During instrument operation, the temperature of the heated cover can be as high as 108 °C, and the temperature of the sample block can be as high as 100 °C. Before performing the procedure, keep hands away until the heated cover and sample block reach room temperature.

4. Start the thermal cycler.

5. Remove the tubes from the instrument block after the PCR is completed.

6. Store the amplified DNA.

If you are storing the DNA...

Then place at...

<2 weeks

>2 weeks

2 to 6 °C.

–15 to –25 °C.

IMPORTANT!

Protect the amplified products from light.

AmpF


2-9

DRAFT



Amplification

Using

Bloodstained

FTA Cards

FTA ™ -treated DNA collection cards can be useful for the collection, storage, and processing of biological samples. A small punch of the bloodstained card can be placed directly into an amplification tube, purified, and amplified without transferring the evidence. Our studies have indicated that a 1.2-mm bloodstained punch contains approximately 5–20 ng DNA. Accordingly, an appropriate cycle number for this high quantity of DNA is 25 cycles. It is recommended that each laboratory determine the cycle number based on individual validation studies.

In the example shown in Figure 2-1

, a 1.2-mm punch of a bloodstained FTA card was purified using one wash with FTA

Purification Reagent and two washes with 1X TE buffer. After drying at room temperature overnight, the punch was amplified directly in the MicroAmp

®

tube for 25 cycles.

Figure 2-1 AmpF

l STR SEfiler kit results from a 1.2-mm FTA

bloodstain punch (25 cycle amplification), analyzed on the

ABI P

RISM

310 Genetic Analyzer.

2-10 AmpF


DRAFT


Setting up the ABI P

RISM

310

Genetic Analyzer

3

3

In This Chapter

This chapter is a general overview of the ABI P

RISM

®

310 Genetic

Analyzer. Procedures for setting up the system for both the

Macintosh

®

and Microsoft

®

Windows NT

®

operating systems are described in this chapter.

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2

ABI P

RISM

310 Genetic Analyzer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3

Setting up the Genetic Analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4

AmpF


3-1

DRAFT

March 22, 2012 1:12 pm, 3_Maintaining_310.fm

Chapter 3 Setting up the ABI P

RISM

310 Genetic Analyzer

Overview

This chapter provides the steps necessary to install a new electrode on the ABI P

RISM

310 Genetic Analyzer including:

• Installing a new electrode

• Cleaning and reloading the syringe

• Removing and priming the pump

• Installing the capillary

• Filling the buffer reservoirs

3-2 AmpF


DRAFT


ABI P

RISM


ABI P

RISM

310 Genetic Analyzer

Figure 3-1 shows the ABI P

RISM

310 Genetic Analyzer. The parts mentioned in this section are labeled. Refer to the ABI P

RISM

® 310

Genetic Analyzer User Guide (P/N 4317588) and GeneScan

®

Analysis Software Version 3.1 User’s Manual (P/N 4306157) for more detailed information on the instrument and software used with this protocol.

Capillary

Heat plate

Syringe drive

Syringe

Anode buffer reservoir

ABI PRISM

Pump block

Autosampler

Figure 3-1 ABI P

RISM


Electrode

AmpF


3-3

DRAFT



RISM


Setting up the Genetic Analyzer

Installing a New

Electrode

Installing and trimming a new electrode is usually necessary only when the instrument is first set up or if the electrode was or has been bent severely.

IMPORTANT!

A new electrode must be trimmed to the correct

length. Refer to Figure 3-2

for information on trimming the electrode.

Note:

Not all electrodes need to be trimmed. Trim only as needed.

To install a new electrode:

1. Install the new electrode on the instrument as described in the ABI P

RISM

®

310 Genetic Analyzer User Guide.

2. Select Manual Control > Home Z-Axis.

3. Follow these guidelines when using the wire cutter: a. Use the flush-cutting wire cutter (P/N T-6157) provided in the instrument packing kit.

b. Hold the cutters with the flat cutting face toward the top of the instrument.

3-4 AmpF


DRAFT


Setting up the Genetic Analyzer

To install a new electrode: (continued)

4. Cut a small amount off the end of the electrode until it is flush with the lower surface of the stripper plate.

Be careful not to flex the stripper plate upwards while cutting. Do not cut off more than 1mm beyond the lower

surface of the stripper plate ( Figure 3-2 ).

Figure 3-2 Trimming the electrode

Cleaning the

Electrode

To clean the electrode:

1. Wipe the electrode with a lint-free tissue that has been dampened with distilled, deionized water.

2. Dry the electrode with a fresh lint-free tissue.

Note:

The autosampler should be recalibrated after cleaning the electrode, as described in “Calibrating the Autosampler” of the ABI P

RISM

®


AmpF


3-5

DRAFT



RISM


Removing the

Syringe

To remove the syringe:

1. Launch the ABI P

RISM

310 Data Collection Software.

2. a. Select Window > Manual Control.

b. Select Function > Syringe Home.

c. Click Execute.

Note:

For all commands in the Manual Control window, the

Execute button must be selected to complete the task.

3. Open the instrument doors and move the syringe drive toggle to the left.

4. Unscrew the syringe from the pump block.

Checking the

Syringe

Verify that the 1.0-mL glass syringe (P/N 4304471) has a small

O-ring (P/N 221102) inside the syringe, and that another O-ring is placed around the ferrule-shaped seal. The ferrule should be firmly seated in the end of the 1.0-mL syringe. If the syringe is dirty, clean it before using.

3-6 AmpF


DRAFT



Cleaning the

Syringe

To clean the syringe:

1. Remove the plunger by slowly drawing it from the glass barrel (count to 5, this should take approximately 5 sec.) while keeping the entire syringe submerged in water.

IMPORTANT!

Moving the dry plunger quickly can damage it, resulting in premature failure or leakage around the plunger.

2. Remove the ferrule from the syringe.

a. Soak the ferrule in warm (not boiling) water for as long as it takes to remove crystals (if any) in the ferrule.

b. Rinse the ferrule with deionized water.

3. Clean the glass barrel with warm water. Dissolve any crystals.

4. Rinse the glass barrel with distilled, deionized water.

IMPORTANT!

Remove all residual water from the syringe by blowing compressed air through it.

5. Inspect the O-ring in the stainless steel hub of the syringe for damage, and replace it if necessary.

IMPORTANT!

Make sure the O-ring does not block the hole in the stainless steel hub.

6. Inspect the O-ring on the ferrule and replace it if necessary.

7. Place the ferrule back onto the syringe.

IMPORTANT!

The Teflon ® tip of the plunger must be damp when you insert it into the barrel (place a drop of distilled deionized water on the Teflon tip), or the Teflon tip could be damaged.

Note:

For syringe storage, the plunger should remain in the syringe barrel.

AmpF


3-7

DRAFT



RISM


Loading the

Syringe

To load the syringe:

1. Prime the syringe with approximately 0.1 mL of

ABI P

RISM

® POP-4 ™ polymer.

CHEMICAL HAZARD. POP-4

polymer causes eye, skin, and respiratory tract irritation.

Read the MSDS, and follow the handling instructions. Wear appropriate protective eyewear, clothing, and gloves.

2. Fill the 1.0-mL syringe manually with a maximum of 0.8 mL of POP-4 polymer.

Note:

The polymer should not stay in the syringe longer than 3 days. Do not return unused polymer to the bottle.

Note:

Before use, the POP-4 polymer should be allowed to equilibrate to room temperature. If precipitate is present in the bottle when removed from cold storage, it should go back into solution at room temperature. Gently mix the polymer thoroughly by inversion before using.

3. Wipe the outside of the syringe with a lint-free tissue to dry it.

4. Remove any air bubbles by inverting the syringe and pushing a small amount of polymer out of the tip.

3-8 AmpF


DRAFT



Removing and

Cleaning the

Pump Block

Before setting up the instrument for a run, make sure that the pump block is clean of all polymer, especially if the polymer in the syringe has been sitting at room temperature for more than three days. Urea decomposition during this interval causes transient current increases

(spikes) during electrophoresis.

To remove and clean the pump block, see “Cleaning and Maintaining the Instrument” in the ABI P

RISM

®

310 Genetic Analyzer User

Guide. Follow the instructions in the sections titled “Removing the

Pump Block,” “Rinsing the Pump Block,” and “Replacing the Pump

Block.” We do not recommend following the section titled “Rinsing the Pump Block on the Instrument” for this application.

IMPORTANT!

Remove all residual water from the pump block and fittings by blowing canned compressed air through the channels.

Make sure the can is held upright or the propellant in the can may be shot into the gel block, resulting in poor resolution or high baseline.

Reinstall the pump block on the instrument after cleaning.

Installing the

Syringe on the

Pump Block

To install the syringe on the pump block:

1. Move the syringe drive toggle on the instrument to the left to attach the syringe to the pump block.

2. Place the 1.0-mL syringe through the right-hand port of the plastic syringe guide plate and screw the syringe into the pump block.

The syringe should be finger-tight in the block.

3. Hand-tighten the valves on the pump block to the left of and below the syringe.

Note:

Overtightening can cause microscopic fractures in the pump block. Undertightening may result in a “syringe leak detected” message.

AmpF


3-9

DRAFT



RISM


Installing the

Capillary

To install the capillary:

1. Clean the capillary window with 95% ethanol on a lint-free tissue.

Note:

Do not touch the capillary window after cleaning.

2. Install the 47-cm, 50-

μm i.d. capillary (P/N 402839, green mark) as described in the ABI P

RISM

® 310 Genetic Analyzer

User Guide. Follow the instructions in the section titled

“Installing the Capillary.”

If a new capillary has been installed, select Instrument >

Change Capillary.

3. Select OK in the Reset window to set the injection counter to zero.

4. Secure the capillary into place by pressing a piece of thermal tape over it onto the heat plate just above the electrode.

PHYSICAL INJURY HAZARD. Hot

Surface. Use care when working around this area to avoid being burned by hot components.

Note:

The capillary should be approximately flush with, or less than 1 mm below, the end of the electrode.

5. Calibrate the autosampler.

Make sure it is calibrated in the X, Y, and Z directions. The capillary should almost touch the metal calibration points.

Refer to “Calibrating the Autosampler” in the

ABI P

RISM

®


IMPORTANT!

The sample tray must be removed before calibrating the autosampler. If the sample tray is not removed, the electrode may bend.

3-10 AmpF


DRAFT



Filling the Buffer

Reservoirs

To fill the buffer reservoirs:

1. Dilute 5 mL of 10X Genetic Analyzer Buffer with EDTA

(P/N 402824) to 1X concentration (50 mL) with distilled, deionized water. Change to fresh buffer every 48 hours or 96 injections, whichever comes first.

CHEMICAL HAZARD. 10X Genetic

Analyzer Buffer with EDTA. May cause eye, skin and respiratory tract irritation. Please read the MSDS, and follow handling instructions. Wear appropriate protective eye wear, clothing, and gloves.

2. Fill the anode buffer reservoir to the red line with 1X

Genetic Analyzer Buffer, then secure the reservoir on the pump block.

3. a. Fill a 4-mL glass buffer vial (P/N 401955) to the fill line with 1X Genetic Analyzer Buffer.

b. Insert the plastic vial lid with attached septum (P/N

402059) into the glass vial.

c. Place the buffer vial into position 1 on the autosampler.

This will serve as the cathode buffer.

Note:

Overfilling and underfilling one or both buffer reservoir and vial can cause siphoning. Pay close attention to the red fill line.

4. Fill and position a second buffer: a. Fill a second 4-mL glass buffer vial to the fill line with distilled water.

b. Insert the plastic vial lid with attached septum into the glass vial.

c. Place the vial into position 2 on the autosampler.

5. Fill and position a 1.5-mL Eppendorf tube: a. Fill the tube with distilled water until it is full.

b. Place it into position 3 on the autosampler.

Note:

Do not use a screw-cap tube. The lids on screw-cap tubes are too high to clear the electrode and capillary. Use a

1.5-mL Eppendorf tube with the lid clipped off.

AmpF


3-11

DRAFT



RISM


Priming the Pump

Block

To prime the pump block:

1. Close the buffer valve: a. Select Window > Manual Control.

b. Select Buffer Valve Close from the pop-up menu.


2. Partly unscrew the capillary filling ferrule.

3. Manually press down on the 1.0-mL syringe plunger until the ferrule space is filled with polymer.

Note:

This will remove the air bubbles at the ferrule site.

4. Tighten the ferrule to close.

5. Partly unscrew the waste valve on the pump block (below the syringe).

6. Manually press down on the 1.0-mL syringe plunger until the valve space is filled with polymer.

Note:

This procedure removes the air bubbles at this valve site. It should use about 0.1 mL of polymer.

7. Tighten the waste valve to close.

8. To open the pin valve at the anode buffer reservoir on the pump block, a. Select Manual Control > Buffer Valve Open.

b. Click Execute.

9. Manually press down on the 1.0-mL syringe plunger to push enough gel through the block so that all of the air bubbles are removed from the polymer channel in the block. (This process should use about 0.2 mL of polymer.)

IMPORTANT!

block channels.

There should be no air bubbles in the pump

3-12 AmpF


DRAFT



To prime the pump block: (continued)

10. In the Manual Control window: a. Close the pin valve by selecting Buffer Valve Close from the pop-up menu. b. Click Execute.

11. Move the syringe drive toggle to the right so that it is positioned over the syringe plunger.

12. Lower the syringe plunger: a. In the Manual Control window select Syringe Down.

b. Select 50-step intervals. Execute until the toggle almost makes contact with the syringe plunger.


d. Select smaller step intervals until the toggle makes contact with the syringe plunger.

AmpF


3-13

DRAFT



RISM


3-14 AmpF


DRAFT


Running the 310 Genetic

Analyzer on Windows NT OS

4

4

In This Chapter

AmpFlSTR

®

SEfiler

™

PCR Amplification Kit products are electrophoretically separated using a capillary filled with

ABI P

RISM

®

POP-4

™

polymer and detected on the ABI P

RISM

®

310

Genetic Analyzer. Protocols for analyzing samples on the

ABI P

RISM

310 Genetic Analyzer using Microsoft

®

Windows NT

® operating system are described in this chapter.

Software Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-2

Equipment and Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-2

Setting Up the Run for Windows NT OS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3

Filter Set G5 Module Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-7

Five-Dye Data Collection Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-8

Making a Matrix File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-11

Running DNA Samples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-15

Setting Up Software Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-19

GeneScan Software Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-24

Shutting Down the Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-28

Dedicated Equipment and Supplies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-29

AmpF


4-1

DRAFT

March 22, 2012 1:12 pm, 4_RunAnalyzer_NT_310.fm

Chapter 4 Running the 310 Genetic Analyzer on Windows NT OS

Software Requirements

Data Collection

Software for

Windows NT

Operating

System

Before using the instrument, you must install the appropriate software and use the products shown in the table below:

Table 4-1 Products Needed

Product Needed to

ABI P

RISM

®

310 Data Collection

Software v3.0 (P/N 4326986)

6-FAM ™ , VIC ® , NED ™ , PET ™ , and

LIZ ® matrix standard set DS-33 run using the GS STR POP 4

(1 mL) G5 module

ABI P

RISM

®

GeneScan

®

Analysis

Software for the Windows NT operating system

ABI P

RISM

® Genotyper ® Software v3.7 or higher run AmpF lSTR SEfiler PCR

Amplification Kit products and collect five-dye data create a required matrix file

— analyze SEfiler kit data

Analysis Software

This chapter is written for ABI P

RISM

®

GeneScan

®

Analysis

Software version 3.7.1 or higher.

Refer to the documents listed below for more detailed information on the instrument and software used with these protocols:

• ABI P

RISM

®

310 Genetic Analyzer User Guide (P/N 4317588)

• ABI P

RISM

® GeneScan ® Analysis Software Version 3.7 User Guide

(P/N 4308923)

•

Appendix E, “ABI P

RISM


Windows NT OS”

Equipment and Supplies

Supplies

The equipment and supplies necessary or recommended for running

AmpFlSTR SEfiler kit data on the ABI P

RISM


are listed in the tables under “Dedicated Equipment and Supplies” on page 4-29 .

4-2 AmpF


DRAFT


Setting Up the Run for Windows NT OS

Setting Up the Run for Windows NT OS

Setting the Run

Temperature

Setting the run temperature prior to starting a run is optional; however, this step saves time. This heating step occurs automatically at the beginning of the GS STR POP4 (1 mL) G5 run module.

To set the run temperature:

1. Close the instrument doors.

2. Return to the ABI P

RISM


3. Set the temperature: a. Select Window > Manual Control.

b. Select Temperature Set from the pop-up menu.

c. Set the temperature to 60 °C. d. Click Execute.

Note:

It takes up to 30 min for the instrument to reach the

60 °C run temperature. You can prepare samples while the instrument is heating.

AmpF


4-3

DRAFT



Setting the

Parameters

To select a five-dye sample sheet:

1.

Note:

This is an optional step.

Set the standard color: a. Launch the 310 Data Collection Software v3.0.

b. Select Window > Preferences, then select

GeneScan Sample Sheet Defaults. c. Set the size standard color to orange (O) as shown in the figure below.

Figure 4-1 Preferences window

4-4 AmpF


DRAFT


Setting Up the Run for Windows NT OS

To select a five-dye sample sheet: (continued)

2. Select Windows > Preferences, then select GeneScan

Injection List Defaults from the drop-down menu. The following window opens.

Figure 4-2 Preferences window showing defaults

3. Make the following selections in the Preferences window: a. Select GS STR POP4 (1 mL) G5 for the five-dye module.

b. Select an appropriate matrix file.

c. Make sure the AnalyzeGSSample.bat file is selected if you wish to autoanalyze. If you do not wish to autoanalyze your data, select Autoanalyze with > none.

Note:

When you create a new sample sheet, a portion of the form is automatically filled in for you. You can modify the automatic defaults in the Preferences file.

4. Once you have finished making changes to the Preferences pages, click OK to save your changes.

AmpF


4-5

DRAFT



Running Matrix

Samples

The precise spectral overlap between the five dyes is measured by analyzing DNA fragments labeled with each of the dyes (6-FAM,

VIC, NED, PET or LIZ dye) in separate injections on a capillary.

These dye-labeled DNA fragments are called matrix standard samples. See Chapter 1 for a general description of multicomponent analysis.

The ABI P

RISM

GeneScan Analysis Software v3.7.1 or higher analyzes the data from each of these five samples and creates a matrix file. The matrix file contains a table of numbers with five columns and five rows. These numbers are normalized fluorescence intensities that represent a mathematical description of the spectral overlap that is observed between the five dyes (

Figure 4-3 on page

4-6

).

The rows in the matrix file table represent the virtual filters and the columns represent the dye-labeled DNA fragments, indicated as

“Reactions” in

Figure 4-3 below. The matrix file table contains the

values obtained on a particular ABI P

RISM

310 System. The values obtained are unique for each instrument. The top left-hand value,

1.0000, represents the normalized fluorescence of blue

(6-FAM-labeled) DNA fragments in the blue filter. It follows that all matrix tables should have values of 1.0000 on the diagonal from top

left to bottom right, as shown in Figure 4-3

.

Figure 4-3 Matrix file table from an ABI P

RISM

310 system

All the other values in

Figure 4-3 should be less than 1.0000. These

values represent the amount of spectral overlap observed for each dye in each virtual filter. For example, the values in the first column reflect quantitatively the amount of blue dye detected in each virtual filter. These matrix file values will vary between different instruments, virtual filter sets, and run conditions on a single instrument. A matrix file must be made for each instrument and for a particular set of run conditions.

4-6 AmpF


DRAFT


Filter Set G5 Module Files

You can apply the appropriate matrix file to data on subsequent runs on the same instrument, as long as the running conditions are constant from run to run. This is because the spectral overlap between the five dyes is reproducible under constant run conditions. However, it is recommended that you make a new matrix once a month to use with the AmpFlSTR products or when changing polymer, capillaries, and buffer.

Multicomponent analysis is accomplished automatically by the

GeneScan Analysis software, which applies a mathematical matrix calculation (using the values in the matrix file) to all sample data.

Filter Set G5 Module Files

Data Collection

Software

Modules

The ABI P

RISM

310 Data Collection Software v3.0 collects light intensities from five specific areas on the CCD camera, each area corresponding to the emission wavelength of a particular fluorescent dye. Each of these areas on the CCD camera is referred to as a

“virtual” filter since no physical filtering hardware (e.g., band pass glass filter) is used.

The information that specifies the appropriate virtual filter settings for a particular set of fluorescent dyes is contained in each appropriate ABI P

RISM

Data Collection Software module file.

The GS STR POP4 (1 mL) G5 module file must be installed and used for dye set DS-33 (6-FAM, VIC, NED, PET, LIZ dyes) on the

ABI P

RISM

310 Genetic Analyzer. The configuration is POP-4 polymer with 1-mL syringe.

IMPORTANT!

Filter Set G5 module files must be installed on the instrument’s computer before making a matrix file using the 6-FAM,

VIC, NED, PET, and LIZ matrix standards. Filter Set G5 module files must also be used on all subsequent runs. Samples that are run on a capillary using Filter Set G5 must be analyzed using a matrix file that was created using Filter Set G5.

AmpF


4-7

DRAFT



Five-Dye Data Collection Software

The ABI P

RISM

310 Data Collection Software v3.0 enables collection of five-dye data for DNA fragment analysis applications.

This section provides detailed information on sample sheet and injection lists.

Creating a

Five-Dye Sample

Sheet and

Injection List

To create a five-dye sample sheet:

1. Select File > New to open the Create new window.

Figure 4-4 Create new window

2. Click the icon corresponding to an appropriate GeneScan

Sample Sheet configuration. A Sample Sheet window opens.

Figure 4-5 Example of a Sample Sheet window

3. Select the 5 Dyes option from the drop-down menu in the upper-right corner of the window.

4-8 AmpF


DRAFT


Five-Dye Data Collection Software

To create a five-dye sample sheet: (continued)

4. In the five-dye Sample Sheet: a. Enter the sample name, sample information and comments. b. Designate color for the appropriate size standard. c. Save the sample sheet.

Be sure to select the orange dye as the designated size standard for all five-dye samples. Under Preferences, this feature can be preset. See

Figure 4-2 on page 4-5

. Figure 4-6

shows a completed five-dye sample sheet.

Figure 4-6 Five-dye Sample Sheet

Note:

Setting up five-dye samples requires the use of a five-dye sample sheet. You may not set up both four-dye and five-dye samples in a five-dye sample sheet. All four-dye samples must be set up separately in a four-dye specific sample sheet.

AmpF


4-9

DRAFT




5. To create a new injection list, select File > New, then select a new injection list in the Create new window.


6. Click the GeneScan Injection List icon.

7. From the Sample Sheet drop-down menu (in the GeneScan

Injection List), import the appropriate sample sheet.

Note:

To access five-dye modules, you must first import a five-dye sample sheet into the injection list.

Figure 4-8 Injection List window

8. After setting the appropriate injection parameters, save the injection list.

9. To start the sequence of injections, click the Run option in the Injection List window.

4-10 AmpF


DRAFT


Making a Matrix File

Making a Matrix File

Matrix Standards

The matrix standards are supplied in the Matrix Standard Set DS-33

(6-FAM, VIC, NED, PET and LIZ) for use with the 310/377 system

(P/N 4318159).

Making a Matrix

File on the

ABI P

RISM

310

If you need information on required supplies for the procedures

below, refer to Dedicated Equipment and Supplies on page 4-29 .

.

To make the matrix file:

1. • Combine 1

μL of each matrix standard with 25 μL of

Hi-Di

™

Formamide (P/N 4311320).

• Prepare one tube for each matrix standard sample.

CHEMICAL HAZARD. Formamide is harmful if absorbed through the skin and may cause irritation to the eyes, skin, and respiratory tract. It may cause damage to the central nervous system and the male and female reproductive systems, and is a possible birth defect hazard. Please read the MSDS, and follow the handling instructions. Wear appropriate protective eye wear, clothing, and gloves.

IMPORTANT!

Do not include the GeneScan 500 LIZ Size

Standard in the preparation of the matrix standards.

2. a. Denature the samples at 95 °C for 3 min.

b. Quick-chill on ice for 3 min. c. Place tubes in the appropriate sample tray.

Note:

Be careful not to carry-over any water on the outside of the tubes. Water on the autosampler tray may promote arcing.

3. Launch the ABI P

RISM

310 Collection application.

AmpF


4-11

DRAFT



To make the matrix file: (continued)

4. Select File > New and click the GeneScan Smpl Sheet 48

Tube or GeneScan Smpl Sheet 96 Tube icon, as appropriate.

5. Complete the sample sheet as described in the

ABI P

RISM

®

310 Genetic Analyzer User Guide.

a. Enter the sample names/numbers for each row in the

Sample Name column to identify which sample is in which tube of the sample tray.

b. Close and save the sample sheet.

6. Select File > New and click the GeneScan Injection List icon.

7. a. In the Injection List, select the appropriate sample sheet from the Sample Sheet pop-up menu.

b. Select Module > GS STR POP4 (1 mL) G5 for every injection.

c. Select None in the Matrix File column for each matrix standard sample.

Note:

Review data of each matrix standard. Re-inject if necessary.

8. Click Run.

4-12 AmpF


DRAFT




9. When the injections are done, create the matrix using

GeneScan Analysis Software: a. Select File > New.

b. Click the Matrix icon and select five dyes from the number of dyes pop-up window. c. In the window that opens, indicate the sample files that correspond to each matrix standard dye color.

d. Select starting scan numbers for each sample to exclude the primer peak. e. Select the number of points so that at least these five peaks are contained in the scanned region (approximately

2500 scan data points). Avoid spikes or artifacts, if possible, when selecting the range.

f. Click OK to create the matrix and open the matrix file table.

10. Save the matrix file in the ABI folder:

D:\AppliedBio\Shared\Analysis\SizeCaller\Matrix

To verify the accuracy of the matrix file:

1. Apply the new matrix file to the Matrix Standard Sample

Files as follows: a. In the Analysis Control window, highlight the Sample

File column by clicking in the Sample File title row.

b. Select Sample > Install New Matrix.

c. Select the new matrix file (located in the ABI folder in the

System folder), and click Open.

2. Analyze the matrix standard samples as follows: a. Select Settings > Analysis Parameters, and verify that the settings are correct.

b. In the Analysis Control window, select all five colors in each sample row for all of the matrix standard samples.

c. Click the Analyze button.

AmpF


4-13

DRAFT



To verify the accuracy of the matrix file: (continued)

3. In the Results Control window, examine the results for all five colors for each of the matrix standard samples.

For example, the 6-FAM matrix standard results should have peaks for blue. Evaluate the baseline. A pattern of pronounced peaks or dips in any of the other four colors indicates that the color separation may not be optimal.

4. If this verification test fails, then the capillary may not have been aligned properly in the instrument during the run. To correct this problem: a. Repeat the experiment, making sure that the capillary is placed carefully in the laser detection window.

b. Tape the capillary to the heat plate so that the capillary is immobilized during the run.

Once a satisfactory matrix file has been made, this matrix file can be applied to subsequent runs. It is not necessary to run matrix standard samples for each new capillary.

4-14 AmpF


DRAFT


Running DNA Samples

Running DNA Samples

Preparing

Samples and

AmpF

l STR

SEfiler Allelic

Ladder

To prepare the samples:

1. Combine the necessary amount of Hi-Di Formamide and

GeneScan-500 LIZ Size Standard (P/N 4322682) in a single microcentrifuge tube as shown:

• (Number of samples + 2)

× 24.5 μL Hi-Di Formamide


× 0.5 μL GeneScan-500 LIZ

Size Standard

If you are using a multi-channel pipettor or processing many samples, you may want to prepare additional master mix.

CHEMICAL HAZARD. Formamide is harmful if absorbed through the skin and may cause irritation to the eyes, skin, and respiratory tract. It may cause damage to the central nervous system and the male and female reproductive systems, and is a possible birth defect hazard. Read the MSDS, and follow the handling instructions. Wear appropriate protective eye wear, clothing, and gloves.

Be sure to include at least one injection of

AmpFl

STR

SEfiler

Allelic Ladder per run in the calculations.

2. a. Vortex the tube to mix.

b. Spin the tube briefly in a microcentrifuge.

3. a. Label tubes appropriately.

b. Aliquot 25

μL of Hi-Di Formamide/GeneScan-500 LIZ solution into 0.2-mL or 0.5-mL Genetic Analyzer sample tubes.

Note:

To pipet the Hi-Di Formamide/size standard solution, we recommend using a repeating pipettor.

4. Add 1.5

μL of PCR product or AmpFlSTR SEfiler Allelic

Ladder per tube, and mix by pipetting up and down.

5. Seal each tube with a septum.

AmpF


4-15

DRAFT



To prepare the samples: (continued)

6. Vortex the sample tray and spin briefly in a microcentrifuge.

Note:

Ensure that there are no bubbles.

7. Denature each sample for 3 minutes at 95 °C.

8. Chill tubes for at least 3 minutes on ice.

Note:


Loading Samples

To load samples:

1. Open the instrument door and press the Tray button to present the autosampler.

2. Place a 48-well or 96-well sample tray on the autosampler.

For a 48-well autosampler tray, tube #1 will go into sample tray position A1, tube #2 into sample tray position A3, and so on. For a 96-well autosampler tray, tube #1 will go into sample tray position A1, tube #2 into sample tray position

A2, and so on.

3. Press the Tray button on the instrument to retract the autosampler.

4. Close the instrument door.

4-16 AmpF


DRAFT



Running Sample

Electrophoresis

To run the samples:

1. If not already open, launch the ABI P

RISM

310 Data

Collection Software v3.0.

2. Select File > New and click the appropriate GeneScan

Sample Sheet icon.

Note:

The 310 Data Collection Software v3.0 must be installed for use with the AmpFlSTR SEfiler PCR

Amplification Kit.

3. Complete the sample sheet. The sample sheet can be prepared at any time before the preparation of samples and saved in the Sample Sheet folder.

a. Select 5-dyes from the drop-down menu.

b. Enter sample names/numbers for each injection in the

Sample Name column. This column will indicate which sample is in which tube of the sample tray.

c. Enter the sample description for each row in the Sample

Info column (for Blue, Green, Yellow, and Red for each appropriate sample). This entry is necessary for the

AmpFl

STR

® SEfiler

™ Template 1 File to build tables containing the genotypes for each sample.

d. Type the word ladder for the Blue, Green, Yellow, and

Red rows for the

AmpFl

STR SEfiler Allelic Ladder injection.

Note:

Software requires the word “ladder.”

Alternatively: a. Select 5-dyes from the drop-down menu.

b. Enter the sample names and numbers for each injection in the Sample Name column.

c. Select Edit > Copy, and copy all sample names at one time by highlighting the Sample Name header and paste by highlighting the Sample Info header. The sample name will appear in the blue, green, yellow, red, and orange

Sample Info column for each sample.


AmpF


4-17

DRAFT



To run the samples: (continued)

5. Select the appropriate sample sheet from the Sample Sheet pop-up menu (at the top left of the Injection List window).

6. Select Module > Module GS STR POP4 (1 mL) G5 for every injection.

a. Click the arrow in the Module column for the first sample/injection to view the pop-up menu and select the

GS STR POP4 (1 mL) G5 module file.

b. Select the entire Module column by clicking the Module column heading, then select Edit > Fill Down.

Note:

You do not need to perform this step if the preferences were set as described in

“Setting the Parameters” on page 4-4

.

7. Select matrix files for the injections: a. From the Matrix file pop-up menu, select the appropriate matrix file for every injection.

b. Click the arrow in the Matrix column for the first sample/injection to view the pop-up menu and select the appropriate matrix file. Select the entire Matrix column by clicking the Matrix column heading, then select Edit >

Fill Down.

IMPORTANT!

The matrix file must be one that was made using the 6-FAM, VIC, NED, PET, and LIZ matrix standards and Filter Set G5 module. If you wish to autoanalyze, you must place a copy of the matrix file in the ABI folder located in the System Folder.

Note:

You will not need to perform this step if the preferences were set as described in

“Setting the Parameters” on page 4-4 .

8. Click the Run button.

Note:

If you have not preheated the heat plate, the module has an initial step in which the plate is heated to 60 °C before running the first sample. This step takes up to 30 min. Once the plate reaches 60 °C, the run will begin.

4-18 AmpF


DRAFT


Setting Up Software Parameters

Setting Up Software Parameters

Setting the

Analysis

Parameters

Perform the following steps in ABI P

RISM

GeneScan Analysis

Software v3.7.1 or higher.

To set analysis parameters:

1. Launch the GeneScan Software v3.7.1.

2. Select Settings > Analysis Parameters.

Note:

A more detailed discussion for each of the six

Analysis Parameters is in

Appendix E , “ABI P

RISM

GeneScan Analysis Software for the Windows NT OS,”

and the ABI P

RISM

®

GeneScan

® Analysis Software Version 3.7

User Guide.

3. Enter parameters in the dialog box:

Parameter Entry

Analysis Range 1. Click the This Range (Data Points) radio button.

2. Enter Start and Stop data point numbers in the entry fields. Select the Start data point just before the first peak of interest, the 75 bp size standard peak. At a minimum, select the Stop data point just after the last peak of interest, the

450 bp size standard peak.

3. Look at the raw data and enter the values that are appropriate for all sample files in the project. These data points affect data in the results display.

Smooth Options The default parameter for Smooth Options is light.

Refer to


RISM

GeneScan

Analysis Software for the Windows NT OS,”

or the ABI P

RISM

®

GeneScan Analysis

Software Version 3.7.1 User Bulletin (P/N

4335617) for more information on how to set the appropriate value for smooth options.

AmpF


4-19

DRAFT



To set analysis parameters: (continued)

3. (continued)

Parameter

Peak Detection

Polynomial

Degree

Min. Peak Half

Width

Peak Window

Size

Entry

1. Select a Peak Amplitude Threshold

(PAT) for each dye color.

2. Use the active scroll bar to enter the

PATs for each of the five colors.

3. After analysis, the GeneScan table contains data for all peaks with a height above that specified by the PAT.

Note:

We suggest that you determine the

PATs appropriate for your analysis.

Sensitivity experiments should be conducted in your laboratory with each instrument to evaluate the PATs used for analysis.

The default parameter for polynomial degree is 3.

Refer to


RISM

GeneScan

Analysis Software for the Windows NT

OS,”

or the ABI P

RISM

®

GeneScan Analysis

Software Version 3.7.1 User Bulletin for more information on how to set the appropriate value for the polynomial degree.

The Min Peak Half Width for use with the

AmpF l STR products is 2 Pts.

Refer to


RISM

GeneScan


OS,”

or the ABI P

RISM

®

GeneScan Analysis

Software Version 3.7.1 User Bulletin for more information on how to set the appropriate value for Min. Peak Half Width.

The default parameter for peak window size is 15.

Refer to


RISM

GeneScan


OS,”

or the ABI P

RISM

®

GeneScan Analysis

Software Version 3.7.1 User Bulletin for more information on how to set the appropriate value for Peak Window Size.

4-20 AmpF


DRAFT




3. (continued)

Parameter

Size Call Range

Size Calling

Method

Baselining

Slope Threshold

Auto Analysis

Only

Entry

Click the This Range (Base Pairs) radio button and enter the values of 75 for Min and 450 for Max.

Click the Local Southern Method radio button for sizing of the AmpF lSTR products. This method determines the sizes of fragments by using the reciprocal relationship between fragment length and mobility.

The default setting for the baseline window size is 51 pts.

Refer to

Appendix E

,

“ABI P

RISM


Windows NT OS,”

or the ABI P

RISM

®

GeneScan Analysis Software Version

3.7.1 User Bulletin (P/N 4335617) for more information on how to set the appropriate value for the baseline window size.

The default parameter for slope threshold for peak start and peak end should be

0.0.

Refer to

Appendix E

,

“ABI P

RISM


Windows NT OS,”

or the ABI P

RISM

®


3.7.1 User Bulletin (P/N 4335617) for more information on how to set the appropriate value for slope threshold.

Refer to the user bulletin (P/N 4335617) for more information.

4. Click OK when done.

AmpF


4-21

DRAFT




5. Assign a size standard: a. Click the arrow in the Size Standard column for a sample file to view the pop-up menu and select New.

– For more information on defining a size standard, refer to


RISM

GeneScan Analysis

Software for the Windows NT OS,”

or the ABI P

RISM

®

GeneScan ®

Analysis Version 3.7 User Guide.

– Do not assign a size for the 250-bp peak for data generated on the ABI P

RISM

®


(i.e., skip a row or assign a size of zero). This peak can be used as an indicator of precision within a run.

Twelve size standard peaks should be viewed at this step, as shown below.

Figure 4-9 Size standard peaks

– Save the size standard for this sample in:

D:\AppliedBio\Shared\Analysis\SizeCaller

\SizeStandards in the ABI P

RISM

GeneScan Version 3.7.1 Software folder.

b. To apply this standard to all injections, select the appropriate standard in the Size Standard column header

(above sample 1) in the Analysis Control window.

4-22 AmpF


DRAFT




6. Analyze sample files: a. Highlight the blue, green, yellow, red, and orange columns.

Note:

Confirm that the orange box is the standard (a diamond symbol should appear in all orange boxes where a size standard is included with the sample files). If the diamond symbol is not in the orange boxes, Ctrl-click to place a diamond in the box.

b. Click the Analyze button.

7. After the analysis is complete, confirm that the sizes for the peaks in the GeneScan-500 LIZ Size Standard have been correctly assigned.

a. Select Window > Results Control and examine the orange GeneScan-500 LIZ Size Standard peaks in overlapping groups of 16 samples (Quick Tile Off). Be sure to select View > Align By Size.

b. While the samples are tiled, check the 250-bp peaks

(sized as approximately 246 bp) in the enlarged view window. Remember that this peak was not defined in the size standard. The tiled 250-bp peaks should size consistently, i.e., should all overlap. In a typical run, the

250-bp peaks all fall within a size window of approximately 1 bp. Temperature fluctuations in the laboratory may cause variations >1 bp.

Note:

Laboratory temperature variations can cause size shifts. If the temperature of the laboratory varies, try injecting the AmpFlSTR SEfiler Allelic Ladder approximately every 10 injections, or 5 hours.

c. Scroll through the tables to verify correct GeneScan-500

LIZ peak assignments.

d. Check the GeneScan-500 LIZ Size Standard peaks in the remaining samples, taking note of which samples (if any) have incorrect peak assignments.

8. View AmpFlSTR SEfiler kit results (using the Results

Control window).

Refer to the ABI P

RISM

®

GeneScan

® Analysis Version 3.7

User Guide for printing options.

AmpF


4-23

DRAFT



GeneScan Software Results

GeneScan


After the sample files have been analyzed, use the Results Control window to display the results from each lane of a gel or each injection into a capillary. The Results Control window displays the newly analyzed sample files and allows the user to specify the format of the results. Selecting both the Electropherogram and Tabular Data icons is recommended for reviewing the results. For more information on displaying the results, refer to the ABI P

RISM

®

GeneScan ® Analysis Software Version 3.7 User Guide.

Information

Provided in the

Electropherogram and Table

Both the electropherogram and the tabular data can be displayed. See

Figure 4-10 on page 4-25 .

The electropherogram is a chromatographic display with fluorescence intensity indicated as relative fluorescence units (RFU) on the y-axis. After the internal lane size standard has been defined and applied, the electropherogram can be displayed with the base pair size on the x-axis.

Peaks of all heights within the Analysis Range specified in the

Analysis Parameters are displayed on the electropherogram, but those peaks below the Peak Amplitude Threshold (minimum peak height) that are defined in the Analysis Parameters are not listed in the tabular data.

The columns in the table list the following:

• Column 1 lists the Dye/Sample and Peak (e.g., “4B, 1” indicates the first blue peak in project sample 4).

• Column 2 lists the time it took the dye-labeled fragment to reach the detector.

• Column 3 lists the base pair size of the peak, as calculated using the GeneScan-500 LIZ Size Standard curve.

• Column 4 lists the height in RFU of the peak.

• Column 5 lists the relative peak area, which is the integral of the

RFU times the data point (scan number). This value depends on the velocity of the dye labeled fragment as it passes the detector.

4-24 AmpF


DRAFT


GeneScan Software Results

Column 6 lists the data point (scan number) of the dye labeled fragment at its maximum peak height; the data point correlates with the number of laser scans (or data points collected) from the beginning of the run until the time that the peak maximum is

detected. Figure 4-10 is a GeneScan electropherogram of AmpFlSTR

SEfiler alleles in AmpFlSTR Control DNA 007 analyzed on the

ABI P

RISM

310 Genetic Analyzer.

Figure 4-10 GeneScan electropherogram of AmpF

l STR

SEfiler alleles in AmpF

lSTR Control DNA 007 analyzed on the

ABI P

RISM


Results Display Options

The GeneScan Software v3.7.1 or higher offers two main options in the Results Control window for electropherogram viewing formats:

Quick Tile Off and Quick Tile On.

• The Quick Tile Off format provides the option of displaying results either for multiple colors within a single lane or injection, or from multiple lanes or injections in the same panel (i.e., the results are overlaid), as shown in panel 1 of

Figure 4-11 .

• The Quick Tile On format displays each color of each lane or

injection separately, as shown in panels 2–5 of Figure 4-11

.

AmpF


4-25

DRAFT



The Quick Tile Off and On feature offers the user versatility in customizing the display of results. Up to eight panels can be tiled at a single time and up to 16 electropherograms may be overlaid in one panel at the same time.

Figure 4-11 Quick Tile Off and Quick Tile On options

Panel A is an example of one sample displayed with Quick Tile Off.

Panels B–F are examples of the same sample file with Quick Tile On using the AmpFlSTR Control DNA 007 analyzed on the ABI P

RISM


Note:

For a more detailed description refer to the ABI P

RISM

®

GeneScan ®

Analysis Software Version 3.7 User Guide.

4-26 AmpF


DRAFT



Standards for

Samples

For the SEfiler kit, the panel of standards needed for PCR amplification, PCR product base pair sizing, and genotyping are as follows:

• The AmpFlSTR Control DNA 007 provides a positive control for the efficiency of the amplification step and STR genotyping using the AmpFlSTR SEfiler Allelic Ladder.

• The AmpFlSTR SEfiler Allelic Ladder was developed by

Applied Biosystems for accurate characterization of the alleles amplified by the AmpFlSTR SEfiler kit. The AmpFlSTR SEfiler

Allelic Ladder contains the majority of alleles reported for the 15

loci. Refer to Table 1-1, “AmpFlSTR SEfiler Kit Loci and

Alleles,” on page 1-4 for a list of the alleles included in the

AmpFlSTR SEfiler kit.

• GeneScan-500 LIZ Size Standard is used for obtaining base pair sizing results. The GeneScan-500 LIZ Size Standard is designed for sizing DNA fragments in the 35–500 bp range, and it contains

16 single-stranded fragments of 35, 50, 75, 100, 139, 150, 160,

200, 250 (not assigned when used on the ABI P

RISM

310 Genetic

Analyzer), 300, 340, 350, 400, 450, 490, and 500 bases. This standard has been evaluated as an internal lane size standard and it yields extremely precise sizing results of AmpFlSTR SEfiler kit

PCR products. Order the GeneScan-500 LIZ Size Standard

(P/N 4322682) separately.

AmpF


4-27

DRAFT



Shutting Down the Instrument

Ending the Run

If the instrument is not going to be in use for 3 or more consecutive days, it is recommended that the instrument be cleaned and shut down.

To shut down the instrument:

1. Remove and clean the syringe and block as previously described.

2. Discard unused polymer in the proper waste container.

CHEMICAL HAZARD. POP

polymers may cause eye, skin, and respiratory tract irritation. Read the MSDS for the polymer you are using, and follow the handling instructions. Wear appropriate protective eyewear, clothing, and gloves. Use for research and development purposes only.

IMPORTANT!

Do not put unused polymer back into the bottle. Polymer in the syringe decomposes over time at room temperature.

CHEMICAL WASTE HAZARD.

Dispose of it in accordance with good laboratory practices and local, state/provincial, or national environmental and health regulations.

3. In the Manual Control window, select Autosampler Home

X, Y Axis and click Execute.

4. Select Autosampler Home Z Axis and click Execute.

5. Turn off the instrument.

4-28 AmpF


DRAFT


Dedicated Equipment and Supplies

Dedicated Equipment and Supplies

Required

Equipment



RISM

310 Genetic Analyzer are listed in the tables below.

Note:

Amplified DNA, equipment, and supplies used to handle amplified DNA should not be taken out of the amplified DNA work area. Samples that have not yet been amplified should never come into contact with these supplies and equipment.

Table 4-2 Equipment

ABI P

RISM


ABI P

RISM

310 Genetic Analyzer Accessories:

• ABI P

RISM

310 Genetic Analyzer Capillary, L t

= 47 cm, L d

= 36 cm, i.d.

= 50

μm (P/N 402839), labeled with a green mark

• ABI P

RISM

310 Genetic Analyzer Vials, 4.0 mL (P/N 401955)

• ABI P

RISM

310 Genetic Analyzer 0.5-mL Sample Tubes (P/N 401957)

• ABI P

RISM

310 Genetic Analyzer Septa for 0.5-mL Sample Tubes (P/N

401956)

• Syringe, Kloehn 1.0-mL (P/N 4304471)

Benchkote absorbent protector sheets

Flush-cutting wire cutter (P/N T-6157)

Freezer, –15 to –25 °C, non-frost-free

Gloves, disposable, powder-free

Glassware

Ice bucket

Lint-free tissues

Lab coat


Microtube racks

Nalgene filter apparatus, 150–mL, 0.2-

μm CN filter

AmpF


4-29

DRAFT



Table 4-2 Equipment (continued)

Permanent ink pen

Pipet bulb

Pipets, serological


Pipettors, adjustable, 1–10

μL, 2–20 μL, 20–200 μL, and 200–1000 μL

Refrigerator

Repeat pipettor and Combitips that dispense 25–125

μL (optional)

Sink

Syringe, 35 cc (optional)

Tape

Thermal cycler

Tube, 50 mL Falcon


Required

Reagents

Table 4-3 Reagents

ABI P

RISM

310 10X Genetic Analyzer Buffer with EDTA (P/N 402824)


Hi-Di

™

Formamide (P/N 4311320)

GeneScan-500 LIZ Size Standard (P/N 4322682)

Matrix Standard Set DS-33 [6-FAM, VIC, NED, PET, LIZ dyes] for use with the 310/377 system (P/N 4318159)

POP-4 polymer (P/N 402838)

4-30 AmpF


DRAFT



Software and

User

Documentation

Required

Table 4-4 Software and User Documentation

ABI P

RISM

310 Collection Software, Version 3.0 or higher

ABI P

RISM

®


ABI P

RISM

310 Module GS STR POP4 (1 mL) G5

GeneScan Software v3.7.1 or higher

ABI P

RISM

®

GeneScan

®

Analysis Software Version 3.7.1 User Bulletin

(P/N 4335617)

AmpF


4-31

DRAFT



4-32 AmpF


DRAFT


Running the 310 Genetic

Analyzer on Mac OS

5

5

In This Chapter

Protocols for analyzing samples on the ABI P

RISM

®

310 Genetic

Analyzer on a Macintosh

®

OS are described in this chapter.

Software Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2


Setting Up the Run for a Macintosh Computer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-3

Filter Set G5 Module Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-7

Five-Dye Data Collection Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-8

Making a Matrix File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-11

Running DNA Samples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15

Setting Up Software Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19

GeneScan Software Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24

Off-Scale Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28

Shutting Down the Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29


AmpF


5-1

DRAFT

March 22, 2012 1:12 pm, 5_RunAnalzer_Mac_310.fm

Chapter 5 Running the 310 Genetic Analyzer on Mac OS

Software Requirements

Data Collection

Software for

Macintosh

®

Before using the instrument, you must install the appropriate software and use the products shown in the table below:

Table 5-1 Products Needed

Product

ABI P

RISM

®

Data Collection

Software v2.1 (P/N 4324229)

Needed to

run AmpF lSTR ®

SEfiler

™

PCR

Amplification Kit products and collect five-dye data create a required matrix file 6-FAM ™ , VIC ® , NED ™ , PET ™ , and

LIZ ® matrix standard set DS-33 run using the GS STR POP 4

(1 mL) G5 module

ABI P

RISM

®

Genotyper

®

Software v2.5.2 or higher analyze SEfiler kit data


This chapter is written for ABI P

RISM

® GeneScan ® Analysis

Software version 3.1.2 or higher.

Refer to the documents listed below for more detailed information on the instrument and software used with these protocols:

• ABI P

RISM

®


• ABI P

RISM

®

GeneScan

®

Analysis Software Version 3.7 User Guide

(P/N 4308923)


Supplies



RISM


are listed in the tables under “Dedicated Equipment and Supplies” on page 5-30 .

5-2 AmpF


DRAFT


Setting Up the Run for a Macintosh Computer

Setting Up the Run for a Macintosh Computer

Setting the Run

Temperature

Setting the run temperature prior to starting a run is optional; however, this step saves time. This heating step occurs automatically at the beginning of the GS STR POP4 (1 mL) G5 run module.

To set the run temperature:

1. Close the instrument doors.

2. Return to the ABI P

RISM


3. Set the temperature: a. Select Window > Manual Control.

b. Select Temperature Set from the pop-up menu.

c. Set the temperature to 60 °C. d. Click Execute.

Note:

It takes up to 30 min for the instrument to reach the

60 °C run temperature. You can prepare samples while the instrument is heating.

AmpF


5-3

DRAFT



Setting the

Parameters

To select a five-dye sample sheet:

1.

Note:

This is an optional step.

Set the standard color: a. Launch the 310 Data Collection Software v2.1.

b. Select Window > Preferences, then select the

GeneScan Sample Sheet Defaults. c. Set the size standard color to orange (O) as shown in the figure below.

Figure 5-1 Preferences window

5-4 AmpF


DRAFT


Setting Up the Run for a Macintosh Computer

To select a five-dye sample sheet: (continued)

2. Select Page > GeneScan Injection List Defaults to open the Preferences window.

Figure 5-2 Preferences window with defaults

Note:

When you create a new sample sheet, a portion of the form is automatically filled in for you. You can modify the automatic defaults in the Preferences file.

3. Make the following selections in the Preferences window: a. Select GS STR POP4 (1 mL) G5 for the five-dye module.

b. Select a default matrix file.

c. Make sure the Genescan Analysis application is selected if you wish to autoanalyze. If you do not wish to autoanalyze your data, deselect the box next to the

Autoanalyze with option.

4. Once you have finished making changes to the Preferences pages, click OK to save your changes.

Running Matrix

Samples

The precise spectral overlap between the five dyes is measured by analyzing DNA fragments labeled with each of the dyes (6-FAM,

VIC, NED, PET or LIZ dye) in separate injections on a capillary.

These dye-labeled DNA fragments are called matrix standard samples. See

“Multicomponent Analysis Overview” on page 1-3

for a general description of multicomponent analysis.

AmpF


5-5

DRAFT



The ABI P

RISM

GeneScan Analysis Software v3.1 or higher analyzes the data from each of these five samples and creates a matrix file. The matrix file contains a table of numbers with five columns and five rows. These numbers are normalized fluorescence intensities representing a mathematical description of the spectral overlap that is observed between the five dyes (

Figure 5-3 on page 5-6 ).

The rows in the matrix file table represent the virtual filters and the columns represent the dye-labeled DNA fragments, indicated as

“Reactions” in

Figure 5-3 below. The top left-hand value, 1.0000,

represents the normalized fluorescence of blue (6-FAM-labeled)

DNA fragments in the blue filter. It follows that all matrix tables should have values of 1.0000 on the diagonal from top left to bottom right.

The matrix file table shown in Figure 5-3

contains the values obtained on a particular ABI P

RISM

310 System. These values are unique for each instrument.

Figure 5-3 Matrix file table

All the other values in

Figure 5-3 should be less than 1.0000. These

values represent the amount of spectral overlap observed for each dye in each virtual filter. For example, the values in the first column reflect quantitatively the amount of blue dye detected in each virtual filter. These matrix file values vary between different instruments, virtual filter sets, and run conditions on a single instrument. A matrix file must be made for each instrument and for a particular set of run conditions.

5-6 AmpF


DRAFT


Filter Set G5 Module Files

You can apply the appropriate matrix file to data on subsequent runs on the same instrument, as long as the running conditions are constant from run to run. This is because the spectral overlap between the five dyes is reproducible under constant run conditions. However, it is recommended that a new matrix be made once a month for use with the AmpFlSTR products or when changing polymer, capillaries, and buffer.

Multicomponent analysis is accomplished automatically by the

GeneScan Analysis software, which applies a mathematical matrix calculation (using the values in the matrix file) to all sample data.

Filter Set G5 Module Files

The ABI P

RISM

310 Data Collection Software v2.1 collects light intensities from five specific areas on the CCD camera, each area corresponding to the emission wavelength of a particular fluorescent dye. Each of these areas on the CCD camera is referred to as a

“virtual” filter since no physical filtering hardware (e.g., band pass glass filter) is used.

The information that specifies the appropriate virtual filter settings for a particular set of fluorescent dyes is contained in each appropriate ABI P

RISM

Data Collection Software module file.

The GS STR POP4 (1 mL) G5 module file must be installed and used for dye set DS-33 (6-FAM, VIC, NED, PET, LIZ dyes) on the

ABI P

RISM

310 Genetic Analyzer. The configuration is POP-4

™ polymer with 1-mL syringe.

IMPORTANT!

Filter Set G5 module files must be installed on the instrument’s computer before making a matrix file using the 6-FAM,

VIC, NED, PET, and LIZ matrix standards. Filter Set G5 module files must also be used on all subsequent runs. Samples that are run on a capillary using Filter Set G5 must be analyzed using a matrix file that was created using Filter Set G5.

AmpF


5-7

DRAFT



Five-Dye Data Collection Software

The ABI P

RISM

310 Data Collection Software v2.1 enables collection of five-dye data for DNA fragment analysis applications.

Before you can access the five-dye module, you must import a five-dye sample sheet into the injection list. This section provides detailed information on creating a sample sheet and importing it into injection lists. You may not set up both four-dye and five-dye samples in a five-dye sample sheet. All four-dye samples must be set up separately in a four-dye specific sample sheet.

Creating a

Five-Dye Sample

Sheet and

Injection List

Setting up five-dye samples requires using a five-dye sample sheet.

To create a five-dye sample sheet:

1. Select File > New to open the Create new window.


2. Click the icon corresponding to an appropriate GeneScan

Sample Sheet configuration to open the Sample Sheet

window as shown in Figure 5-5

.

Figure 5-5 Sample Sheet window

5-8 AmpF


DRAFT


Five-Dye Data Collection Software


3. Select the 5 Dyes option from the drop-down menu in the upper-right corner of the window.

4. Complete the five-dye Sample Sheet: a. Enter the sample name, sample information and comments. b. Designate color for the appropriate size standard. c. Save the sample sheet.

Be sure to select the orange dye as the designated size standard for all five-dye samples. You can preset this feature in the Preferences window as instructed on page

5-4 .

Figure

5-6

shows a sample sheet with the orange dye selected.

Figure 5-6 Five-dye Sample Sheet with orange dye selected

5. To create a new injection list, select File > New. Figure 5-7

is a Create new window to create a new injection list.


6. Click the GeneScan Injection List icon.

AmpF


5-9

DRAFT




7. From the Sample Sheet menu in the GeneScan Injection

List, import the appropriate sample sheet.

Note:

To access five-dye modules, you must first import a five-dye sample sheet into the injection list.

Figure 5-8 Sample Injection List

8. After setting the appropriate injection parameters, save the injection list.

9. To start the sequence of injections, click the Run option in the Injection List window.

5-10 AmpF


DRAFT



Making a Matrix File

Matrix Standards

The matrix standards are supplied in the Matrix Standard Set DS-33

(6-FAM, VIC, NED, PET and LIZ dyes) for use with the 310/377 system (P/N 4318159).

Making a Matrix

File on the

ABI P

RISM

310

.

To make the matrix file:

1. Prepare the matrix standards:

• Combine 1

μL of each matrix standard with 25 μL of

Hi-Di™ Formamide (P/N 4311320).

• Prepare one tube for each matrix standard sample.


IMPORTANT!

Do not include the GeneScan ® 500 LIZ ® Size

Standard in the preparation of the matrix standards.

2. Prepare the samples: a. Denature the samples at 95 °C for 3 min.

b. Quick-chill on ice for 3 min. c. Place tubes in the appropriate sample tray.

Note:

Be careful not to carry over any water on the outside of the tubes. Water on the autosampler tray may promote arcing.

3. Launch the ABI P

RISM


4. Select File > New and click the GeneScan Smpl Sheet 48

Tube or GeneScan Smpl Sheet 96 Tube icon, as appropriate.

AmpF


5-11

DRAFT




5. Complete the sample sheet as described in the

ABI P

RISM

®

310 Genetic Analyzer User Guide.

a. Enter the sample names/numbers for each row in the

Sample Name column to identify which sample is in which tube of the sample tray.

b. Close and save the sample sheet.


7. Select the sample sheet: a. In the Injection List, select the appropriate sample sheet from the Sample Sheet pop-up menu.

b. Select Module > GS STR POP4 (1 mL) G5 for every injection.

c. Select None in the Matrix File column for each matrix standard sample.

Note:

Review data of each matrix standard. Re-inject if necessary.

8. Click Run. Figure 5-9

exhibits the raw data of each matrix standard, analyzed on the ABI P

RISM


Figure 5-9 Raw data of each matrix standard

5-12 AmpF


DRAFT




9. When the injections are done, create a matrix using

GeneScan Analysis Software: a. Select File > New.

b. Click the Matrix icon. Select five dyes from the number of dyes pop-up window. In the window that opens, indicate the sample files that correspond to each matrix standard dye color.

c. Select starting scan numbers for each sample to exclude

the primer peak, as shown in Figure 5-9

. d. Select the number of points so that at least these five peaks are contained in the scanned region (this is approximately 2500 scan data points). Avoid spikes or artifacts, if possible, when selecting the range.

e. Click OK. The software makes the matrix and the matrix file table opens.

10. Save the matrix file in the ABI folder in the System folder.

Verifying the

Matrix File

To verify the accuracy of the matrix file:

1. Apply the new matrix file to the Matrix Standard Sample

Files as follows: a. In the Analysis Control window, highlight the Sample

File column by clicking the Sample File title row.

b. Select Sample > Install New Matrix.

c. Select the new matrix file (located in the ABI folder in the

System folder), and click Open.

2. Analyze the matrix standard samples as follows: a. Select Settings > Analysis Parameters, and verify that the settings are correct.

b. In the Analysis Control window, select all five colors in each sample row for all of the matrix standard samples.

c. Click the Analyze button.

AmpF


5-13

DRAFT



To verify the accuracy of the matrix file: (continued)

Figure 5-10 contains the data of each matrix standard,

analyzed on the ABI P

RISM


Figure 5-10 Analyzed data of each matrix standard

3. In the Results Control window, examine the results for all five colors for each of the matrix standard samples.

For example, the 6-FAM matrix standard results should have peaks for blue. Evaluate the baseline. A pattern of pronounced peaks or dips in any of the other four colors indicates that the color separation may not be optimal.

4. If this verification test fails, then the capillary may not have been aligned properly in the instrument during the run. To correct this problem: a. Repeat the experiment, making sure that the capillary is placed carefully in the laser detection window.

b. Tape the capillary to the heat plate so that the capillary is immobilized during the run.

Once a satisfactory matrix file has been made, this matrix file can be applied to subsequent runs. It is not necessary to run matrix standard samples for each new capillary.

5-14 AmpF


DRAFT



Running DNA Samples

Preparing

Samples and

AmpF

l STR

SEfiler Allelic

Ladder

To prepare the samples:

1. Combine the necessary amount of Hi-Di Formamide and

GeneScan-500 LIZ Size Standard (P/N 4322682) in a single microcentrifuge tube as shown:


× 24.5 μL Hi-Di Formamide


× 0.5 μL GeneScan-500 LIZ

Size Standard

If you are using a multi-channel pipettor or processing many samples, you may want to prepare additional master mix.


Be sure to include at least one injection of

AmpFl

STR

®

SEfiler

™ Allelic Ladder per run in the calculations.

2. a. Vortex the tube to mix.

b. Spin the tube briefly in a microcentrifuge.

3. a. Label tubes appropriately.

b. Aliquot 25

μL of Hi-Di Formamide/GeneScan-500 LIZ solution into 0.2-mL or 0.5-mL Genetic Analyzer sample tubes.

Note:

To pipet the Hi-Di Formamide/size standard solution, we recommend using a repeating pipettor.

4. Add 1.5

μL of PCR product or AmpFlSTR SEfiler Allelic

Ladder per tube, and mix by pipetting up and down.

5. Seal each tube with a septum.

AmpF


5-15

DRAFT



To prepare the samples: (continued)

6. Vortex the sample tray and spin briefly in a microcentrifuge.

Note:

Ensure that there are no bubbles.

7. Denature each sample for 3 min at 95 °C.

8. Chill tubes for at least 3 min on ice.

Note:


Loading Samples


1. Open the instrument door and press the Tray button to present the autosampler.

2. Place a 48-well or 96-well sample tray on the autosampler.

For a 48-well autosampler tray, tube #1 goes into sample tray position A1, tube #2 into sample tray position A3, and so on.

For a 96-well autosampler tray, tube #1 goes into sample tray position A1, tube #2 into sample tray position A2, and so on.

3. Press the Tray button on the instrument to retract the autosampler.


Sample

Electrophoresis

To run the samples:

1. If not already open, launch the ABI P

RISM

310 Data

Collection Software v2.1.

2. Select File > New and click the appropriate GeneScan Smpl

Sheet icon.

Note:

The 310 Data Collection Software v2.1 must be installed for use with the AmpFlSTR SEfiler PCR

Amplification Kit.

5-16 AmpF


DRAFT




3. Complete the sample sheet. The sample sheet can be prepared at any time before the preparation of samples and saved in the Sample Sheet folder.

a. Select 5-dyes from the drop-down menu.

b. Enter sample names/numbers for each injection in the

Sample Name column. This column will indicate which sample is in which tube of the sample tray.

c. Enter the sample description for each row in the Sample

Info column (for blue, green, yellow, and red for each sample). This entry is necessary for the

AmpFl

STR

SEfiler

Template File to build tables containing the genotypes for each sample.

Type the word ladder for the Blue, Green, Yellow, and

Red rows for the

AmpFl

STR SEfiler Allelic Ladder injection.

Note:

Software requires the word “ladder.” See

“Troubleshooting Automated Genotyping” on page 10-10

.

Alternatively: a. Select 5-dyes from the drop-down menu.

b. Enter the sample names and numbers for each injection in the Sample Name column.

c. Using the copy feature under the Edit menu, copy all sample names at one time by highlighting the Sample

Name header and paste by highlighting the Sample Info header. The sample name will appear in the blue, green, yellow, red, and orange Sample Info column for each sample.


5. Select the appropriate sample sheet from the Sample Sheet pop-up menu (at the top left of the Injection List window).

AmpF


5-17

DRAFT




6. Select Module > Module GS STR POP4 (1 mL) G5 for every injection.

a. Click the arrow in the Module column for the first sample/injection to view the pop-up menu and select the

GS STR POP4 (1 mL) G5 module file.

b. Select the entire Module column by clicking the Module column heading and select Edit > Fill Down.

Note:

You do not need to perform this step if you set the

preferences as described in “Setting the Parameters” on page 5-4

.

7. Select the appropriate matrix file: a. From the Matrix file pop-up menu, select the appropriate matrix file for every injection.

b. Click the arrow in the Matrix column for the first sample/injection to view the pop-up menu and select the appropriate matrix file. Select the entire Matrix column by clicking the Matrix column heading, then Edit > Fill

Down.

IMPORTANT!

The matrix file must be one that was made using the 6-FAM, VIC, NED, PET, and LIZ matrix standards and Filter Set G5 module. If you wish to autoanalyze, you must place a copy of the matrix file in the ABI folder located in the System Folder.

8. Click the Run button.

Note:

If you have not preheated the heat plate, the module has an initial step in which the plate is heated to 60 °C before running the first sample. This step takes up to 30 min. Once the plate reaches 60 °C, the run will begin.

5-18 AmpF


DRAFT



Setting Up Software Parameters

Setting the

Analysis

Parameters

Perform the following steps in ABI P

RISM

GeneScan Analysis

Software v3.1 or higher.

To set the analysis parameters:

1. Launch the GeneScan Analysis Software.


Note:


Analysis Parameters is in the ABI P

RISM

®

GeneScan

®

Analysis Software Version 3.1 User’s Manual.

3. Fill in the dialog box for the analysis parameters:

• Analysis Range:

– Click This Range (Data Points) radio button.

– Enter start and stop data point numbers in the entry fields. Select the Start data point just before the first peak of interest, the 75 bp size standard peak. At a minimum, select the Stop data point just after the last peak of interest, the 450 bp size standard peak.

– Look at the raw data and enter the values that are appropriate for all sample files in the project. These data points affect data displayed in the results display.

• Data Processing:

– Select the Baseline and the MultiComponent check boxes.

– Select a Smooth Option. Smooth Options can affect peak height and peak definition. The “Light smoothing option” is recommended for use with the AmpFlSTR products on the Macintosh computer.

• Peak Detection:

– Select a Peak Amplitude Threshold (PAT) for each dye color.

– Use the active scroll bar to enter the PATs for each of the five colors.

– After analysis, the GeneScan table contains data for all peaks with a height above that specified by the PAT.

AmpF


5-19

DRAFT



To set the analysis parameters: (continued)

3. (continued)

Note:

We suggest that you determine the PATs appropriate for your analysis. Sensitivity experiments should be conducted in your laboratory with each instrument to evaluate the PATs used for analysis.

– The Min Peak Half Width for use with the AmpFlSTR products is 3 Pts.

• Size Call Range:

Click the This Range (Base Pairs) radio button and enter the values of 75 for Min and 450 for Max.

• Size Calling Method:

Click the Local Southern Method radio button for sizing of the AmpFlSTR products. This method determines the sizes of fragments by using the reciprocal relationship between fragment length and mobility.

• Split Peak Correction:

Click the None radio button; no correction is needed for use with the AmpFlSTR products.


5-20 AmpF


DRAFT




5. Assign a size standard: a. Click the arrow in the Size Standard column for a sample file to view the pop-up menu and select Define New.

– For more information on defining a size standard, refer to the ABI P

RISM

®

GeneScan

® Analysis Software

Version 3.1 User’s Manual.

– Do not assign a size for the 250-bp peak for data generated on the ABI P

RISM

®


(i.e., assign a size of zero). This peak can be used as an indicator of precision within a run. Twelve size standard peaks should be viewed at this step, as shown below.

Figure 5-11 Standard size peaks

– Save the size standard for this sample in the GS

Standards Folder in the ABI P

RISM

GeneScan Version

3.1 Software folder.

b. To apply this standard to all injections, select the appropriate standard in the Size Standard column header

(above sample 1) in the Analysis Control window.

6. Analyze sample files: a. Highlight the blue, green, yellow, red, and orange columns.

Note:

Verity that the orange box is indicated as the standard

(a diamond symbol should appear in all orange boxes where a size standard is included with the sample files). If the diamond symbol is not in the orange boxes, -click places a diamond in the box.


AmpF


5-21

DRAFT





a. Select Window > Results Control and examine the orange GeneScan-500 LIZ Size Standard peaks in overlapping groups of 16 samples (Quick Tile Off). Be sure to use View > Align By Size option.

b. While the samples are tiled, check the 250-bp peaks

(sized as approximately 246 bp) in the enlarged view window. Remember that this peak was not defined in the size standard. The tiled 250-bp peaks should size consistently, i.e., should all overlap. In a typical run, the

250-bp peaks all fall within a size window of approximately 1 bp. Temperature fluctuations in the laboratory may cause variations > 1 bp.

Note:

Laboratory temperature variations can cause size shifts. If the temperature of the laboratory varies, try injecting the AmpFlSTR SEfiler Allelic Ladder approximately every 10 injections, or 5 hours.

c. Scroll through the tables to verify correct GeneScan-500

LIZ peak assignments.

d. Check the GeneScan-500 LIZ Size Standard peaks in the remaining samples, taking note of which samples (if any) have incorrect peak assignments.

8. If the size standard peak assignments are incorrect for one injection, define a new size standard for that sample using the peaks in that injection.

To do so, select Size Standard > Define New for that sample.

9. Re-analyze any incorrectly sized samples (select the blue, green, yellow, red, and orange boxes) using the newly defined GeneScan-500 LIZ Size Standard file.

Re-analyzing creates a new standard file for each of these samples, replacing the previous analysis results for those samples only.

5-22 AmpF


DRAFT




10. Confirm that the GeneScan-500 LIZ Size Standard peaks are now correctly assigned in the re-analyzed samples.

11. View AmpFlSTR SEfiler kit results (using the Results

Control window).


RISM

®

GeneScan

® Analysis Software

Version 3.1 User’s Manual for printing options.

AmpF


5-23

DRAFT



GeneScan Software Results

GeneScan


After the sample files have been analyzed, use the Results Control window to display the results from each lane of a gel or each injection into a capillary. The Results Control window displays the newly analyzed sample files and allows the user to specify the format of the results. Selecting both the Electropherogram and Tabular Data icons is recommended for reviewing the results. For more information on displaying the results, refer to the ABI P

RISM

®

GeneScan ® Analysis Software Version 3.1 User’s Manual

(P/N 4306157).

Information

Provided in the

Electropherogram and Table

Both the electropherogram and the tabular data can be displayed. See


The electropherogram is a chromatographic display with fluorescence intensity indicated as relative fluorescence units (RFU) on the y-axis. After the internal lane size standard has been defined and applied, the electropherogram can be displayed with the base pair size on the x-axis.

Peaks of all heights within the Analysis Range specified in the

Analysis Parameters are displayed on the electropherogram, but those peaks below the Peak Amplitude Threshold (minimum peak height) that are defined in the Analysis Parameters are not listed in the tabular data.

The columns in the table list the following:

• Column 1 lists the Dye/Sample and Peak (e.g., “4B, 1” indicates the first blue peak in project sample 4).

• Column 2 lists the time it took the dye-labeled fragment to reach the detector.

• Column 3 lists the base pair size of the peak, as calculated using the GeneScan-500 LIZ Size Standard curve.

• Column 4 lists the height in RFU of the peak.

• Column 5 lists the relative peak area, which is the integral of the

RFU times the data point (scan number). This value depends on the velocity of the dye labeled fragment as it passes the detector.

5-24 AmpF


DRAFT



• Column 6 lists the data point (scan number) of the dye labeled fragment at its maximum peak height; the data point correlates with the number of laser scans (or data points collected) from the beginning of the run until the time that the peak maximum is detected.

Figure 5-12

is a GeneScan electropherogram of AmpFlSTR SEfiler alleles in AmpFlSTR Control DNA 007 analyzed on the ABI P

RISM


Figure 5-12 Electropherogram and tabular data of AmpF

lSTR

SEfiler alleles

AmpF


5-25

DRAFT



Results Display Options

The GeneScan Software v3.1 or higher offers two main options in the

Results Control window for electropherogram viewing formats:

Quick Tile Off and Quick Tile On.

• The Quick Tile Off format provides the option of displaying results either for multiple colors within a single lane or injection or from multiple lanes or injections in the same panel, (i.e., the

results are overlaid), as shown in panel 1 of Figure 5-13 .

• The Quick Tile On format displays each color of each lane or injection separately, as shown in panels 2–5 of

Figure 5-13

.

The Quick Tile Off and On feature offers the user versatility in customizing the display of results. Up to eight panels can be tiled at a single time and up to 16 electropherograms may be overlaid in one panel at the same time.

A

B

C

D

E

Figure 5-13 Quick Tile Off and Quick Tile On options

Panel A in

Figure 5-13

is an example of one sample displayed with

Quick Tile Off. Panels B–F are examples of the same sample file with Quick Tile On using the AmpFlSTR Control DNA 007 analyzed on the ABI P

RISM


Note:

For a more detailed description see the ABI P

RISM

®

GeneScan ®

Software Version 3.1 User’s Manual.

5-26 AmpF


DRAFT



Standards for

Samples

For the SEfiler kit, the panel of standards needed for PCR amplification, PCR product base pair sizing, and genotyping are as follows:

• The AmpFlSTR Control DNA 007 provides a positive control for the efficiency of the amplification step and STR genotyping using the AmpFlSTR SEfiler Allelic Ladder.

• GeneScan-500 LIZ Size Standard is used for obtaining base pair sizing results. The GeneScan-500 LIZ Size Standard is designed for sizing DNA fragments in the 35–500 bp range, and it contains

16 single-stranded fragments of 35, 50, 75, 100, 139, 150, 160,

200, 250 (not assigned when used on the ABI P

RISM

310 Genetic

Analyzer), 300, 340, 350, 400, 450, 490, and 500 bases. This standard has been evaluated as an internal lane size standard and it yields extremely precise sizing results of AmpFlSTR SEfiler kit

PCR products.

• The AmpFlSTR SEfiler Allelic Ladder was developed by

Applied Biosystems for accurate characterization of the alleles amplified by the AmpFlSTR SEfiler kit. The AmpFlSTR SEfiler

Allelic Ladder contains the majority of alleles reported for the 12 loci.

AmpF


5-27

DRAFT



Off-Scale Data

Overview

If too much sample DNA is added to the PCR reaction mixtures, the fluorescence intensity from the PCR products may exceed the linear dynamic range for detection by the instrument, resulting in

“off-scale” data. Multicomponent analysis cannot be performed accurately on data that is off-scale. Samples with off-scale peaks will exhibit raised baselines and/or excessive “pull-up” of one or more colors under the off-scale peaks.

Analyzed data from off-scale peaks should not be used for quantitative comparisons. For example, the stutter peak that corresponds to an off-scale main peak is likely to be overestimated.

Off-Scale Data on the

ABI P

RISM

310

To determine if data is off-scale on the ABI P

RISM

® 310 Genetic

Analyzer:

1. In the GeneScan Analysis Software, highlight the sample file row for the questionable sample in the Analysis Control window.

Alternatively, select View > Show Offscale Regions to highlight off-scale data with a red bar. The width of the red bar corresponds to the amount of data that is off-scale.

2. Select Sample > Raw Data.

3. Examine the fluorescence intensity for the raw data peaks.

Any peaks that are greater than 8191 relative fluorescence units (RFU) are off-scale.

4. Re-amplify the sample, if necessary.

Note:

DNA samples with off-scale data should be diluted and re-amplified.

5-28 AmpF


DRAFT


Shutting Down the Instrument

Shutting Down the Instrument

Ending the Run

If the instrument is not going to be in use for three or more consecutive days, it is recommended that the instrument be cleaned and shut down.

To shut down the instrument:

1. Remove and clean the syringe and block as previously described.

2. Discard unused polymer in the proper waste container.

CHEMICAL HAZARD. POP

polymers may cause eye, skin, and respiratory tract irritation. Read the MSDS for the polymer you are using, and follow the handling instructions. Wear appropriate protective eyewear, clothing, and gloves. Use for research and development purposes only.

IMPORTANT!

Do not put unused polymer back into the bottle. Polymer in the syringe decomposes over time at room temperature.

3. In the Manual Control window, select Autosampler Home

X, Y Axis and click Execute.

4. Select Autosampler Home Z Axis and click Execute.

5. Turn off the instrument.

AmpF


5-29

DRAFT




Required

Equipment



RISM

310 Genetic Analyzer are listed in the tables below.

Note:

Amplified DNA, equipment, and supplies used to handle amplified DNA should not be taken out of the amplified DNA work area. Samples that have not yet been amplified should never come into contact with these supplies and equipment.

Table 5-2 Equipment Required

ABI P

RISM


ABI P

RISM

310 Genetic Analyzer Accessories:

• ABI P

RISM

310 Genetic Analyzer Capillary, L t

= 47 cm, L i.d. = 50

μm (P/N 402839), labeled with a green mark d

= 36 cm,

• ABI P

RISM

310 Genetic Analyzer Vials, 4.0 mL (P/N 401955)

• ABI P

RISM

310 Genetic Analyzer 0.5-mL Sample Tubes (P/N 401957)

• ABI P

RISM

310 Genetic Analyzer Septa for 0.5-mL Sample Tubes

(P/N 401956)

• Syringe, Kloehn 1.0-mL (P/N 4304471)


Flush-cutting wire cutter (P/N T-6157)



Glassware

Ice bucket

Lint-free tissues

Lab coat


Microtube racks

Nalgene filter apparatus, 150-mL, 0.2-

μm CN filter

5-30 AmpF


DRAFT



Table 5-2 Equipment Required (continued)

Permanent ink pen

Pipet bulb

Pipets, serological


Pipettors, adjustable, 1–10

μL, 2–20 μL, 20–200 μL, and 200–1000 μL

Refrigerator

Repeat pipettor and Combitips that dispense 25–125

μL (optional)

Sink

Syringe, 35 cc (optional)

Tape

Thermal cycler

Tube, 50 mL Falcon


Required

Reagents

Table 5-3 Reagents Required

ABI P

RISM

310 10X Genetic Analyzer Buffer with EDTA (P/N 402824)

AG501 X8 ion exchange resin (Bio-Rad)


Hi-Di™ Formamide (P/N 4311320)


Matrix Standard Set DS-33 [6-FAM, VIC, NED, PET, LIZ] for use with the

310/377 system (P/N 4318159)

POP-4 polymer (P/N 402838)

AmpF


5-31

DRAFT



Software and

User

Documentation

Required


ABI P

RISM

310 Data Collection Software, Version 2.1 or higher

ABI P

RISM

®

310 Genetic Analyzer User’s Manual (P/N 903565)

ABI P

RISM

310 Module GS STR POP4 (1 mL) G5

GeneScan Software v3.1 or higher

Genotyper Software Version 2.5.2 or higher

5-32 AmpF


DRAFT


Protocols for ABI P

RISM

377 DNA

Sequencer with Windows NT OS

6

6

In This Chapter

AmpFlSTR

®

SEfiler ™ PCR Amplification Kit products are run on

36-cm well-to-read plates on the ABI P

RISM

®

377 DNA Sequencer, the ABI P

RISM

377 DNA Sequencer with XL Upgrade

(ABI P

RISM

377XL), or the ABI P

RISM


96-Lane Upgrade (377-96 instrument). Protocols for analyzing samples on these configurations with the Microsoft

®

Windows NT

® operating system are included in this chapter.

Analysis Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-2


36-cm Well-to-Read Gel Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3

Setting Up the Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-10

Electrophoresis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-21

Analyzing the Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-25


AmpF


DRAFT

March 22, 2012 1:12 pm, 6_377_Protocols

6-1

Chapter 6 Protocols for ABI P

RISM

377 DNA Sequencer with Windows NT OS


Software Version

This chapter was written for use with ABI P

RISM

® GeneScan ®

Analysis Software Version 3.7.1 or higher. Refer to the ABI P

RISM

®

377 DNA Sequencer User Guide (P/N 4325703) and ABI P

RISM

®

GeneScan ® Analysis Software Version 3.7 for the Windows NT ® User

Guide (P/N 4308923), or the ABI P

RISM

® GeneScan Analysis

Software Version 3.7.1 User Bulletin (P/N 4335617) for more detailed information on the instrument and software used with these protocols.

You must use Filter Set G5 for data collection of AmpFlSTR SEfiler kit PCR products. Install Filter Set G5 module files in the Modules folder within the ABI P

RISM

377 or ABI P

RISM

377XL folder on the instrument’s Microsoft Windows NT computer before following the protocols in this chapter.

IMPORTANT!

Before running AmpFlSTR SEfiler kit PCR products on the instrument, you must make a matrix file using the 6-FAM ™ ,

VIC ® , NED ™ , PET ™ , and LIZ ® matrix standards and Filter Set G5.


Supplies

For a list of required equipment, supplies, chemicals, reagents, software, and documentation to use with the ABI P

RISM

377 DNA

Sequencer, refer to “Dedicated Equipment and Supplies” on page 6-29 .

6-2 AmpF


DRAFT


36-cm Well-to-Read Gel Assembly

36-cm Well-to-Read Gel Assembly

Preparing Plates for the

ABI P

RISM

377

DNA Sequencer

To prepare 36-cm well-to-read plates for the ABI P

RISM

377 DNA

Sequencer:

1. Clean 36-cm well-to-read gel plates with Alconox

® detergent using a dedicated wash cloth or lint-free tissues.

Rinse with deionized water and air dry.

To obtain the MSDS for Alconox, go to:

http://www.jtbaker.com/msds/a2052.htm

2. Place the larger, unnotched plate with the center etch facing down on a covered benchtop. The narrow width is the bottom portion of the plate.

3. Place 0.2-mm spacers on either side of the plate, with the notched end of the spacer at the top of the plate and the notch facing the center of the plate.

4. Place the notched (“rabbit eared”) plate over spacers, making sure that the side that had been previously in contact with the silicone rubber gasket (of the upper buffer chamber) is external. This is the side with the etched writing on it.

5. Clamp the plates together using four medium binder clips per side. Place the clamps directly over the spacers.

6. Elevate the top of the plates approximately 1.0 cm. A pipet tip box top is ideal for this purpose.

AmpF


DRAFT


6-3


RISM



ABI P

RISM

377 with XL Upgrade

When using the 50-lane comb for the ABI P

RISM

377 DNA

Sequencer with XL Upgrade, treat the well-forming region of the notched (rabbit-eared) glass plate with Bind-Silane to immobilize the wells and facilitate subsequent loading of the gel. To obtain the

MSDS for Bind-Silane, go to:

http://www.promega.com/msds/us/q421.htm

IMPORTANT!

Apply a fresh coating of Bind-Silane for each gel.


RISM

377 DNA

Sequencer XL:

1. Clean 36-cm well-to-read gel plates with Alconox detergent using a dedicated wash cloth or lint-free tissues. Rinse with deionized water and air dry.

2. Place the cleaned, notched (rabbit-eared) glass plate face up on a covered benchtop.

3. Dip the end of a cotton swab into a bottle of Bind-Silane to wet the tip.

4. Allow the Bind-Silane to dry on the plate for 1 minute.

5. Dry the treated region with a lint-free tissue by wiping three times using moderate pressure.

6. Assemble the plates as described in “Preparing Plates for the

ABI P

RISM

377 DNA Sequencer” on page 6-3

, beginning

with step 2

.

7. After running the gel, clean the plates using Alconox detergent. It may be necessary to scrape the gel off the notched plate where it has stuck to the Bind-Silane-treated region.

6-4 AmpF


DRAFT




ABI P

RISM

377

DNA Sequencer with 96-Lane

Upgrade


RISM

377 DNA

Sequencer with 96-Lane Upgrade:

1. Clean 36-cm well-to-read gel plates with Alconox detergent using a dedicated wash cloth or lint-free tissues. Rinse with deionized water and air dry.

2. Place the larger, unnotched plate with the center etch facing down on a covered benchtop. The narrow width is the bottom portion of the plate.

3. Place 0.2-mm spacers on either side of the plate, with the notched end of the spacer at the top of the plate and the notch facing the center of the plate.

4. Place the notched (rabbit eared) plate over spacers, making sure that the side that had been previously in contact with the silicone rubber gasket (of the upper buffer chamber) is external. This is the side with the etched writing on it.

5. Clamp the plates together using four medium binder clips per side. Place the clamps directly over the spacers.

6. Elevate the top of the plates approximately 1.0 cm. A pipet tip box top is ideal for this purpose.

AmpF


DRAFT


6-5


RISM


Preparing 36-cm

Well-to-Read

Gels

We recommend using Long Ranger ® gel solutions instead of 4% acrylamide for the 36-cm well-to-read plates. Long Ranger gels form better wells around the comb, facilitating loading and potentially enhancing results. This procedure to prepare 50 mL of 5% Long

Ranger/6.0 M urea gel mixture makes enough gel mixture for two

36-cm well-to-read gels.

To prepare the gel mixture:

1. Combine the following:

• Urea

• Deionized water

• 5X TBE (Maniatis formulation) a

• 50% Long Ranger stock solution

18.0 g

21.5 mL

10.0 mL

5.0 mL

CHEMICAL HAZARD. Urea is a possible mutagen. Do not breathe the dust. Urea can be harmful by inhalation, skin contact, and ingestion. Refer to the MSDS for proper protective equipment.

CHEMICAL HAZARD. TBE 5X buffer causes eye, skin, and respiratory tract irritation.

Exposure may cause central nervous system depression and kidney damage. Read the MSDS, and follow the handling instructions. Wear appropriate protective eyewear, clothing, and gloves.

CHEMICAL HAZARD. Long Ranger

gel solution contains acrylamide. Acrylamide is a neurotoxin. Avoid skin contact with Long Ranger gel solution because acrylamide can be absorbed through the skin. Always work in a fume hood. Obtain a copy of the

MSDS from the manufacturer. Wear appropriate protective eyewear, clothing, and gloves.

6-6 AmpF


DRAFT



To prepare the gel mixture: (continued)

2. Warm the mixture in a 37 °C water bath, stirring occasionally, to dissolve the urea. Once the urea is dissolved, allow the gel mixture to equilibrate to room temperature.

This gel mixture should be used within 12 hours. Keep the gel mixture covered during this step to prevent evaporative loss.

3. Filter the gel mixture using a 150-mL Nalgene filter apparatus with a 0.2-micron CN filter. Attach to a vacuum source (approximately 20 inches Hg) to pull liquid through filter. This step removes any particulates that may fluoresce or scatter light.

4. Let stand for 5 minutes, swirling occasionally, with the vacuum on to degas the mixture.

5. Turn off the vacuum, remove the top of the filter apparatus, and discard.

Note:

The filter apparatus can be rinsed thoroughly with deionized water and air-dried to be reused up to five times.

6. Add 250 µL of freshly prepared 10% APS and 35 µL

TEMED to the gel mixture. Swirl gently to mix.

CHEMICAL HAZARD. Ammonium

persulfate is an oxidizer, and contact with other materials may cause a fire. Exposure causes burns to the eyes, skin, and respiratory tract. Read the MSDS, and follow the handling instructions. Wear appropriate protective eyewear, clothing, and gloves.

CHEMICAL HAZARD. TEMED is extremely flammable, and can be very destructive to the skin, eyes, nose, and respiratory system. Keep TEMED in a tightly closed container. Avoid inhalation and contact with the skin, eyes, and clothing. Always work in a fume hood. Obtain a copy of the MSDS from the manufacturer. Wear appropriate protective eyewear, clothing, and gloves.

IMPORTANT!

Proceed to the next procedure immediately.

a.See

“Preparation of Required Reagents” on page 6-33

.

AmpF


DRAFT


6-7


RISM


To pour gels:

1. Draw the gel mixture up into a 35-cc syringe. Slowly inject gel mixture into the top center area between the plates.

Note:

Tap the gel plates firmly with your palm while pouring to prevent bubbles and move gel mixture down to the bottom of the plates.

2. Stop injecting when the gel mixture is near the bottom of the plates. Immediately lay plates flat on a level surface. Each gel requires approximately 20–25 mL of Long Ranger gel mixture.

3. Follow the procedure in the table below for the instrument you are using:

If using the...

ABI P

RISM

377 DNA

Sequencer

ABI P

RISM

377 with XL

Upgrade DNA Sequencer

ABI P

RISM

377 with

96-Lane Upgrade DNA

Sequencer

Then...

Insert a 34-well 0.2-mm square-tooth comb and clamp into place with three large binder clamps over the comb.

Note:

A 24-well square-tooth comb can also be used.

Insert a 50-well 0.2-mm square-tooth comb and clamp into place with three large binder clamps over the comb.

Insert a 96-lane Mylar 0.4 mm shark’s tooth comb into gel, with the flat side of the comb contacting the gel.

6-8 AmpF


DRAFT



To pour gels: (continued)

4. Allow gel to polymerize for at least 2.0 hours.

Note:

The polymerized gel can be stored for up to 24 hours.

After polymerization, place a lint-free tissue wetted with deionized water over the top and bottom edges of the gel plates. Do not remove the gel comb. Wrap the top and bottom edges tightly with clear plastic wrap and store at room temperature.

5. Prepare 1.5 L of 1X TBE (Maniatis formulation) running buffer (89 mM Tris, 89 mM borate, 2 mM EDTA).

CHEMICAL HAZARD. TBE 1X buffer causes eye, skin, and respiratory tract irritation. Read the MSDS, and follow the handling instructions. Wear appropriate protective eyewear, clothing, and gloves.

AmpF


DRAFT


6-9


RISM


Setting Up the Instrument

Setting up the Gel

Preferences and

Analysis

Parameters

To set up the gel preferences:

1. Launch the Gel Processor 1.0 Software by selecting Start >

Applied Biosystems.

2. Select Edit > Gel Preferences.

3. Fill in the dialog box with the settings shown in

Figure 6-1 .

Note:

Choose the appropriate comb type.

Figure 6-1 Gel Preferences dialog box

Note:

You should extract lanes from the full scan range of gel. Primer peaks can be excluded using GeneScan software not the gel processor.


6-10 AmpF


DRAFT


Setting Up the Instrument

Setting up

Analysis

Parameters

To set up the analysis parameters:

1. Launch the GeneScan Analysis Software v3.7.1 by selecting

Start.


Note:


Analysis Parameters is in


RISM

GeneScan Analysis Software for the Windows NT OS,”

and the ABI P

RISM

®

GeneScan

® Analysis Software Version 3.7

User Guide.

3. Enter parameters in the dialog box:

Parameter Entry

Analysis Range 1. Click the This Range (Data Points) radio button.

2. Enter Start and Stop data point numbers in the entry fields. Select the

Start data point just before the first peak of interest, the 75 bp size standard peak. At a minimum, select the Stop data point just after the last peak of interest, the 450 bp size standard peak.

3. Look at the raw data and enter the values that are appropriate for all sample files in the project. These data points affect data in the results display.

Smooth Options The default parameter for Smooth Options is light.

Refer to

Appendix E

,

“ABI P

RISM


Windows NT OS,”

or the ABI Prism ®

GeneScan Analysis Software Version 3.7.1

User Bulletin (P/N 4335617) for more information on how to set the appropriate value for smooth options.

AmpF


DRAFT


6-11


RISM


To set up the analysis parameters: (continued)

3. (continued)

Parameter Entry

Peak Detection 1. Select a Peak Amplitude Threshold

(PAT) for each dye color.

2. Use the active scroll bar to enter the

PATs for each of the five colors.

3. After analysis, the GeneScan table contains data for all peaks with a height above that specified by the PAT.

Note:

We suggest that you determine the PATs appropriate for your analysis.

Sensitivity experiments should be conducted in your laboratory with each instrument to evaluate the PATs used for analysis.

Polynomial Degree The default parameter for polynomial degree is 3.

Refer to Appendix E , “ABI P

RISM


Windows NT OS,” or the ABI P

RISM

®


3.7.1 User Bulletin for more information on how to set the appropriate value for the polynomial degree.

Min. Peak Half

Width

The Min Peak Half Width for use with the

AmpF lSTR products is 2 Pts.


RISM



RISM

®


3.7.1 User Bulletin for more information on how to set the appropriate value for

Min. Peak Half Width.

6-12 AmpF


DRAFT




3. (continued)

Parameter Entry

Peak Window Size The default parameter for peak window size is 15.


RISM



RISM

®


3.7.1 User Bulletin for more information on how to set the appropriate value for

Peak Window Size.

Size Call Range Click the This Range (Base Pairs) radio button and enter the values of 75 for Min and 450 for Max.

Size Calling

Method

Baselining

Click the Local Southern Method radio button for sizing of the AmpF lSTR products. This method determines the sizes of fragments by using the reciprocal relationship between fragment length and mobility.

The default setting for the baseline window size is 51 pts.


RISM



RISM

®


3.7.1 User Bulletin (P/N 4335617) for more information on how to set the appropriate value for the baseline window size.

AmpF


DRAFT


6-13


RISM



3. (continued)

Parameter

Slope Threshold

Auto Analysis

Only

Entry

The default parameter for slope threshold for peak start and peak end should be 0.0.


RISM



RISM

®

GeneScan Analysis Software Version 3.7.1

User Bulletin (P/N 4335617) for more information on how to set the appropriate value for slope threshold.

Refer to the user bulletin (P/N 4335617) for more information.


6-14 AmpF


DRAFT



Setting up the

Sample Sheet/

Electrophoresis

Parameters

To prepare a sample sheet:

1. Launch the Data Collection Software by selecting Start, then select the data collection appropriate for your 377 instrument:

• 377XL

• 377 96-well

2. If a sample sheet needs to be created, select File > New >

GeneScan Sample. Otherwise skip to

step 1 of the next procedure, on page 6-16 .

3. Select 5 dyes from the sample sheet template window in the upper right corner.

4. Enter sample names/numbers for each lane in the Sample

Name column.

5. a. Enter the sample description for each row in the Sample

Info column (for Blue, Green, Yellow, and Red for each sample). This is necessary for the AmpFlSTR SEfiler Kit

Template File to build tables containing the genotypes for each sample.

b. Type the word ladder for the Blue, Green, and Yellow rows for the AmpFlSTR SEfiler Allelic Ladder lane.

6. Be sure that the diamond symbol in the “std” column indicates the orange sample as the standard in each lane.

7. Save the sample sheet in the Sample Sheets folder.

8. Close the sample sheet.

Note:

For more information on how to create and edit a sample sheet, refer to the ABI P

RISM

®

377 DNA Sequencer

User Guide.

AmpF


DRAFT


6-15


RISM


To create a run file:

1. Select File > New and click GeneScan Run.

2. Select a sample sheet that has been prepared previously. The run module cannot be started without a sample sheet.

3. a. Select Plate Check Module > Plate Check G5.md5 as shown in the figure below.

b. Select PreRun Module > GS PR 36G5-2400.md5.

c. Select Run Module > GS Run G5-2400.md5.

d. Click the document icon to the right of the Run Module to verify the electrophoresis settings for the particular run.

Make sure the settings are the same as shown in

Figure 6-2

.

Figure 6-2 Settings for GS Run 36G5-2400.md5 Run

Module

4. Click Save.

Note:

To save these settings as the default, click Save As

Default.

5. Make selections from the Lanes pop-up menu:

If using the...

ABI P

RISM

377 DNA Sequencer

ABI P

RISM

377 DNA Sequencer with XL

Upgrade

ABI P

RISM


96-Lane Upgrade

Select...

34-Well Comb

50-Well Comb

96-Well Comb

6-16 AmpF


DRAFT



To create a run file: (continued)

6. Select the appropriate matrix file from the gel’s Matrix File pop-up menu. The matrix file must be previously prepared and saved in the matrix folder located in the D drive so the matrix file can be applied automatically to the gel image:

D:\AppliedBio\Shared\Analysis\SizeCaller\Matrix

IMPORTANT!

The matrix file must be one that was created using the 6-FAM, VIC, NED, PET, and LIZ ® matrix standards and Filter Set G5 module files.

7. In addition, select the appropriate matrix file for each sample in the Sample Sheet area of the run window. This is necessary to have the matrix applied automatically to the sample files. To do so: a. Click the arrow in the Matrix File column for the first sample/lane to view the pop-up menu and select the appropriate matrix file. b. After selecting a matrix file for the first sample/lane, select the entire matrix column by clicking the column heading and selecting Edit > Fill Down.

8. a. Verify that the collection time is 2.5 hours.

b. Set the well-to-read distance to 36 cm for the

GS Run G5-2400 module.

9. Make selections from the Run Mode pop-up menu:

If using the...

ABI P

RISM

377 DNA Sequencer with comb size of 34 lanes

ABI P

RISM

377 with XL Upgrade DNA

Sequencer and comb size of 50 lanes

ABI P

RISM

377 with 96-Lane Upgrade DNA

Sequencer and comb size of 96 lanes

Select...

34-Lane Scan

XL Scan

96-Lane Scan

10. Select File > Save to save all collection settings.

AmpF


DRAFT


6-17


RISM


Running the Plate

Check and Prerun

Modules

To place the gel plates into the instrument:

1. Remove the comb.

IMPORTANT!

Remove it slowly while lubricating with 1X

TBE for the best results.

CHEMICAL HAZARD. TBE 1X buffer causes eye, skin, and respiratory tract irritation. Read the MSDS, and follow the handling instructions. Wear appropriate protective eyewear, clothing, and gloves.

2. Remove any gel that remains around the top of the wells.

3. Clean the outside of the gel plates with deionized water and wipe dry.

IMPORTANT!

Do not touch the plates in the laser scanning region from this point forward.

4. Place the gel plates into the ABI P

RISM

377 DNA Sequencer cassette. Place the cassette into the instrument, making sure that the lower buffer chamber is already in place.

5. Make sure the gel plate spacers are pressing against the two positioning pins on the instrument.


6-18 AmpF


DRAFT



To run the plate check:

1. Click the Plate Check button. Five colored, horizontal lines should appear in the scan window after approximately 30 seconds.

If the lines in the scan window...

are relatively flat and level across the screen show peaks are flat but not level across the screen

Then...

The plates are clean.

Click the Cancel button to cancel plate check.

The plates are not clean.

1. Pause the plate check, remove the cassette, and clean the plates again.

2. Resume plate check.

The cassette is not positioned properly in the instrument (i.e., the plates are not flush against the back cooling plate and/or the two positioning pins that set the plates the correct distance from the optics).

1. Pause the plate check and reposition the cassette.

2. Resume the plate check.

2. After determining that the plates are clean and positioned correctly, clamp the upper buffer chamber onto the gel plates.

3. Add 1X TBE buffer to the upper buffer chamber and check for leaks.

CHEMICAL HAZARD. TBE 1X buffer causes eye, skin, and respiratory tract irritation. Read the MSDS, and follow the handling instructions. Wear appropriate protective eyewear, clothing, and gloves.

4. Clamp on and connect the cooling plate.

AmpF


DRAFT


6-19


RISM


To run the plate check: (continued)

5. Add 1X TBE buffer to the lower buffer chamber.

Optional: To facilitate the subsequent loading of the gel, drop 15 µL of blue dextran loading buffer (contained in the

GeneScan

®

-500 [LIZ] Size Standard Kit) over the wells in a sweeping motion using a P10 or P20 pipet tip. The dye outlines the walls and bottom of the wells.

6. Plug in the electrodes and close the instrument door.

Note:

Prepare samples while you prerun the gel.

To perform the prerun:

1. Click the PreRun button in the Run window. Prerun the gel for approximately 15 minutes.

2. Click Pause in the Run window to pause the prerun. Pausing stops the electrophoresis, but continues to heat the gel to

51 °C and then maintains that temperature.

Note:

Samples can be loaded onto the gel during this pause.

See

page 6-23

for sample loading information.

3. Prior to loading the gel, unplug the cathode and check the

Status window to verify that the electrophoresis power has been turned off.

6-20 AmpF


DRAFT


Electrophoresis

Electrophoresis

Preparing

Samples and

AmpF

l STR

SEfiler Allelic

Ladder

To prepare samples and allelic ladder:

1. Prepare formamide loading solution (FLS) by combining:

• Blue dextran “Loading Buffer” (contained in

GeneScan-500 LIZ Size Standard Kit), 100 µL

• Deionized formamide, 500 µL

CHEMICAL HAZARD. Formamide is a teratogen and is harmful by inhalation, skin contact, and ingestion. Use in a well-ventilated area. Use chemical-resistant gloves and safety glasses when handling.

2. Vortex to mix. FLS can be stored at 2–6 °C for up to

2 weeks.

3. Combine the necessary amount of FLS and GeneScan-500

LIZ Size Standard in a single microcentrifuge tube as shown:

• (Number of samples)

× 5.0 µL FLS denaturant

• (Number of samples)

× 0.55 µL GeneScan-500 LIZ Size

Standard

Note:

The above formulation provides a slight overfill to allow for volume lost in pipetting. Be sure to include two lanes of AmpFlSTR SEfiler Allelic Ladder per gel in the calculations.

4. Vortex the tube to mix, and spin briefly in a microcentrifuge.

5. Aliquot 5.0 µL of FLS/GeneScan-500 LIZ mixture into

0.5-mL GeneAmp ® Thin-walled Reaction Tubes with caps

(for use in the DNA Thermal Cycler 480) or 0.2-mL

MicroAmp ® tubes with caps (for use in the GeneAmp PCR

Instrument System 2400, 9600, or 9700). Label one tube per sample.

AmpF


DRAFT


6-21


RISM


To prepare samples and allelic ladder: (continued)

6. Add 4.0 µL PCR product or AmpFlSTR SEfiler Allelic

Ladder per tube and close the caps.

Note:

You may need to increase the amount of allelic ladder to achieve greater signal intensity.

7. Heat samples in a thermal cycler for 2 minutes at 95 °C to denature them.

8. Chill for at least 3 minutes in an ice-water bath. Keep on ice until ready to load.

6-22 AmpF


DRAFT


Electrophoresis

Loading Samples


1. Rinse the urea out of each sample well with buffer, using a

0.17-mm flat pipet tip attached to a 35-cc syringe.

CHEMICAL HAZARD. Urea may cause eye, skin and respiratory tract irritation. Read the

MSDS, and follow the handling instructions. Wear appropriate protective eyewear, clothing, and gloves.

CHEMICAL WASTE HAZARD.

Dispose of it in accordance with good laboratory practices and local, state/provincial, or national environmental and health regulations.

Note:

It may be necessary to cut off the top end of the pipet tip with a razor blade for it to fit on the end of the Luer lock syringe without leaking.

2. Load the sample for the appropriate instrument as shown in the table below:

If using the...

Then...

ABI P

RISM

Sequencer

377 DNA Load 1.5 µL of denatured sample or allelic ladder per well.

The AmpF lSTR SEfiler Allelic

Ladder can be loaded into at least two wells on the gel.

ABI P

RISM

377 with XL


Load 1.0 µL of denatured sample or allelic ladder per well.



ABI P

RISM

377 with 96-Lane


Load 1.0 µL of denatured sample or allelic ladder per well.



3. Attach the upper buffer chamber lid, plug in the cathode, and close the instrument door.

AmpF


DRAFT


6-23


RISM


Sample

Electrophoresis

To run samples:

1. Select Cancel to stop the prerun.

IMPORTANT!

Wait 30 seconds before proceeding.

2. Select Run to start gel electrophoresis. Name the Gel file and click Save.

3. Select Window > Status to check that the run settings are correct and to monitor the run.

Note:

The data collection can be viewed at any time during the run by selecting either Scan or Gel Image from the

Window menu.

IMPORTANT!

The Gel Image window should not be left open for long periods of time during the run, as it occupies a large block of memory.

After electrophoresis is completed, the computer automatically launches the Gel Processor 1.0 to generate a gel image on the screen, if it is selected as a preference in the 377 Data Collection Software.

The gel preferences last saved in this application are used to generate the gel image.

6-24 AmpF


DRAFT


Analyzing the Data

Analyzing the Data

Using the Gel

Processor

Software

Note:

For more information on data analysis, refer to the

ABI P

RISM

®

377 Gel Processor Software User Guide (P/N 4317592).

To analyze data:

1. Examine the orange GeneScan-500 LIZ Size Standard bands on the gel picture and check that the 75-bp and 450-bp bands are present.

2. Verify the automatic lane tracking. It may be necessary to adjust the gel contrast for blue, green, and yellow to see all of the bands clearly. Zoom in on the gel image by selecting

View > Zoom In.

a. Move the lane tracking line over each sample lane, using the arrow keys on the computer keyboard or the mouse.

Change the channel and introduce nodes as necessary.

When modifications are made to a lane, the associated diamond lane marker turns from blue to white.

b. Mark all used lanes for extraction from the Gel menu

(white diamond lane marker) before proceeding to step c. c. Save the changes that have been made by selecting File >

Save.

AmpF


DRAFT


6-25


RISM


To analyze data: (continued)

3. Select Control > Extract Lanes, to create the sample files.

Make selections in the dialog box as shown below:

Figure 6-3 Extract Lanes dialog box


5. Open the GeneScan 3.7.1 software.

6. Create a new project and import the sample files.

6-26 AmpF


DRAFT


Analyzing the Data


7. Assign a size standard: a. Ctrl-click the orange box column in the Analysis Control window to indicate Orange as the standard (a diamond symbol should appear in the orange boxes).

b. Click the arrow in the Size Standard box for the first sample to view the pop-up menu and select Define New, or select a correct standard already stored.

For more information on defining a size standard, refer to


RISM

GeneScan Analysis Software for the Windows NT OS,” or the ABI P

RISM

®

GeneScan

®

Analysis Software Version 3.7 User Guide. Refer to the figure below for the sizes of the peaks in the GeneScan-500

LIZ Size Standard. Figure 6-4

shows the markers from

75–450 bp. Tabular data is shown below the electropherogram.

Click here to select the Size column

Figure 6-4 GeneScan-500 LIZ Size Standard

c. To apply one size standard to all lanes, select the Size

Standard column. Refer to Figure 6-4

. d. Copy the size standard to other rows by using Ctrl+C then Ctrl+V.

AmpF


DRAFT


6-27


RISM



8. Analyze the sample files: a. Highlight the blue, green, yellow, and red columns.


This action calculates the base pair size of each fragment and fills the sample files with the analyzed data from each lane.


a. Select Window > Results Control and examine the orange GeneScan-500 peaks in overlapping groups

(Quick Tile Off). Use Ctrl+ to enlarge the view window for more careful examination; use Ctrl– to reduce it to full range. Be sure to select View > Align By Size.

b. Scroll through the tables to verify correct peak

assignments (see Figure 6-4 on page 6-27 ). Check the

remaining lanes, taking note of which lanes (if any) have incorrect peak assignments.

c. If the size standard peak assignments are incorrect in one lane, define a new size standard for that sample using the peaks in that lane. To do so, select the Define New option

in the Size Standard row for that sample (see step 7b ).

d. Re-analyze any incorrectly sized lanes (select the blue, green, yellow, and red boxes) using the newly defined

GeneScan-500 LIZ Size Standard file for that lane.

Re-analyzing creates a new standard file for each of these lanes, replacing the previous analysis results for those lanes only.

e. Confirm that the GeneScan-500 LIZ Size Standard peaks are now correctly assigned in the re-analyzed lanes.

10. View the AmpFlSTR SEfiler kit results (using the Results

Control window) and print. Refer to the ABI P

RISM

®

GeneScan ®

Analysis Software Version 3.7 User Guide for printing options.

6-28 AmpF


DRAFT




Equipment

Required



RISM

377 DNA Sequencer are listed in the tables below. You can order the part numbers listed below from Applied Biosystems. If no part number is listed, you can order from any major laboratory supplier.

Note:

Amplified DNA, equipment, and supplies used to handle amplified DNA should not be taken out of the Amplified DNA Work

Area. Samples that have not yet been amplified should never come into contact with these supplies and equipment.

Table 6-1 Equipment

ABI P

RISM

377 DNA Sequencer, ABI P

RISM

377 DNA Sequencer with XL

Upgrade, or ABI P

RISM

377 DNA Sequencer with 96-Lane Upgrade

ABI P

RISM

377 DNA Sequencer Accessories:

• 36-cm well-to-read plates:

– 36-cm rear glass plate (P/N 401839)

– 36-cm front glass plate (P/N 401840)

– 36-cm step plate for 96 wells (P/N 4305384)

– 36-cm gel spacers, 0.2 mm thick (P/N 401836)

• 34-well square tooth comb, 0.2 mm thick (P/N 401907)

• 50-well square tooth comb, 0.2 mm thick (P/N 402053)

• 96-lane Mylar shark’s tooth comb, 0.4 mm (P/N 4305385)

• optional: 24-well square tooth comb, 0.2 mm thick (P/N 401904)

• XL Upgrade for the ABI P

RISM

377 DNA Sequencer


Binder clips, medium and large



Glassware

Ice bucket

Lint-free tissues

AmpF


DRAFT


6-29


RISM


Table 6-1 Equipment (continued)

Lab coat

Lamp, 27-inch gooseneck with magnetic base (Sunnex, P/N 701-27, or office supply store)

Microtube racks

Nalgene filter apparatus, 150-mL, 0.2-µm CN filter

Permanent ink pen

Pipet bulb

Pipets, serological


Pipet tips for gel loading, 0.2 mm flat tips (Rainin, P/N GT1514)

Pipettors, adjustable, 0.5–10 µL, 2–20 µL, 20–200 µL, and 200–1000 µL

Refrigerator

Repeat pipettor and Combitips that dispense 1–5 µL (optional)

Sink

Syringe, 20- or 35-cc (optional)

Thermal cycler


6-30 AmpF


DRAFT



Required

Chemicals and

Reagents

Table 6-2 Chemicals and Reagents

Alconox detergent

AG501 X8 ion exchange resin (Bio-Rad)

Ammonium persulfate (APS)

Blue dextran loading buffer (LIZ) (P/N 402055)

Hi-Di

™

Formamide, 24 mL (P/N 4311320)

Long Ranger, 50% stock solution (BioWhittaker Molecular Applications

(P/N 50611)

Matrix Standards Set DS-33 (P/N 4318159)


TBE, 5X (see “Preparation of Required Reagents” on page 6-33

)

N,N,N´,N´-Tetramethylethylenediamine (TEMED)

Urea

Tris base (MLS)

Sodium hydroxide pellets (NaOH)

Water, glass distilled, deionized

Disodium ethylenediaminetetraacetate, dihydrate (Na

2

EDTA•2H

2

0) (MLS)

AmpF


DRAFT


6-31


RISM


Software and

User

Documentation

Required


ABI P

RISM

®

377 DNA Sequencer User Guide For Data Collection

Software on the Windows NT

®

Platform (P/N 4325703)

ABI P

RISM

®

377 DNA Sequencer with 96-Lane Upgrade User Bulletin

(P/N 4313688)

ABI P

RISM

®

377 DNA Sequencer 96-Lane Upgrade User’s Manual (P/N

4305423)

ABI P

RISM

GeneScan Analysis Software Version 3.7

ABI P

RISM

®

GeneScan

®

Analysis Software Version 3.7 for the Windows

NT

®

Platform User Guide (P/N 4308923)

Filter Set G5 module files (located in the Modules folder within the

ABI P

RISM

377, ABI P

RISM

377XL, or 377-96 folder):

• Plate Check G5

• GS PR 36G5-2400

• GS Run 36G5-2400

6-32 AmpF


DRAFT



Preparation of

Required

Reagents

To prepare 0.5 M EDTA, pH 8.0:

1. Slowly add 186.1 g disodium ethylenediaminetetraacetate dihydrate (Na

2

EDTA•2H

2

O) to 800 mL glass-distilled or deionized water.

CHEMICAL HAZARD. EDTA may cause eye, skin, and respiratory tract irritation. Read the


2. Stir vigorously on a magnetic stirrer.

3. Adjust to pH 8.0 ± 0.2 by adding NaOH pellets

(approximately 20 g).

CHEMICAL HAZARD. Sodium

hydroxide (NaOH) causes severe eye, skin, and respiratory tract burns. Read the MSDS, and follow the handling instructions. Wear appropriate protective eyewear, clothing, and gloves.

Note:

EDTA will not go into solution without pH adjustment.

4. Adjust the final volume to 1 L with glass-distilled or deionized water.

5. Autoclave the solution or filter it through a 0.2 µm Nalgene filter. Store at room temperature.

AmpF


DRAFT


6-33


RISM


5X TBE (Maniatis formulation) (445 mM Tris, 445 mM borate,

10 mM EDTA)

CHEMICAL HAZARD. TBE 5X buffer causes eye, skin, and respiratory tract irritation. Exposure may cause central nervous system depression and kidney damage. Read the MSDS, and follow the handling instructions. Wear appropriate protective eyewear, clothing, and gloves.

To prepare 5X TBE:

1. Add approximately 900 mL of deionized water to 20 mL of

0.5 M EDTA, pH 8.0.

2. Add 54 g Tris base and 27.5 g boric acid to the diluted EDTA solution. Stir vigorously on a magnetic stir plate.

CHEMICAL HAZARD. Boric acid is a hazardous chemical that is harmful if ingested, inhaled, or absorbed through the skin and can be irritating to the eyes, respiratory system, and skin. Handling boric acid while pregnant brings possible risk to the unborn child. Prolonged or repeated exposure can potentially impair fertility. Read the MSDS, and follow the handling instructions. Wear appropriate protective eyewear, clothing, and gloves.

3. Adjust the volume to 1 L with deionized water and mix thoroughly.

4. Filter the mixture using a 0.2 µm or 0.45 µm Nalgene filter unit to remove particulate matter and prevent formation of a precipitate.

5. Store in a glass container to facilitate visual inspection for precipitates. If a precipitate forms, discard the 5X TBE buffer and remake it.

CHEMICAL HAZARD. TBE 5X buffer causes eye, skin, and respiratory tract irritation.

Exposure may cause central nervous system depression and kidney damage. Read the MSDS, and follow the handling instructions. Wear appropriate protective eyewear, clothing, and gloves.

6-34 AmpF


DRAFT



To prepare Deionized Formamide:

1. Mix 50 mL of formamide and 5 g of AG501 X8 ion-exchange resin.

CHEMICAL HAZARD. Formamide is a teratogen and is harmful by inhalation, skin contact, and ingestion. Use in a well-ventilated area. Use chemical-resistant gloves and safety glasses when handling.

Refer to the supplier’s MSDS for more details on handling and storage.

2. Using a magnetic stirrer and stirbar, stir for 1–3 hours at room temperature.

3. Filter the Formamide through a 150 mL Nalgene filter apparatus with a 0.2 µM nylon filter.

Alternatively, if a filter apparatus is not available, allow the beads to settle to the bottom of the beaker. Remove the supernatant (formamide), taking care not to disturb the beads.

Note:

The conductivity of the solution should be approximately 30 µ siemens or less.

4. Dispense the deionized formamide into aliquots of 500 µL and store for up to 3 months at –15 to –25 °C.

5. Use one aliquot per set of samples. Discard any unused deionized formamide.

AmpF


DRAFT


6-35


RISM


6-36 AmpF


DRAFT


ABI P

RISM

3100 Genetic

Analyzer

7

7

In This Chapter

This chapter describes protocols for processing AmpFlSTR

Amplification Kit PCR products on the ABI P

RISM

®

Analyzer, using ABI P

RISM

®

Version 1.1 and GeneScan

®

®

PCR

3100 Genetic

3100 Data Collection Software

Analysis Software Version 3.7.1.

Protocols for Processing AmpF l

STR PCR Amplification Kit

PCR Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-2

Process Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-3

3100 Data Collection Software Version 1.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-6

Preparing for a Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-7

Performing a Spectral Calibration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-8

Preparing and Running Your Samples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-17

Examples of DNA Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-24

Materials Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-29

AmpF


DRAFT

March 22, 2012 1:12 pm, 7_3100_Analyzer.fm

7-1

Chapter 7 ABI P

RISM


Protocols for Processing AmpF

lSTR PCR

Amplification Kit PCR Products

Applicable

AmpF

lSTR Kits

PCR products generated from any of the AmpFlSTR PCR

Amplification Kits may be used with the 3100 protocols described in this chapter.

Examples of results obtained using three of the AmpFlSTR PCR

Amplification Kits are in this chapter. See the table below for a list of these kits.

Examples in This Chapter

Examples of results obtained using the AmpFlSTR PCR

Amplification Kits listed below are provided in this chapter. (The

examples are shown on pages 7-24

to 7-28 .)

Kit Dyes

AmpF lSTR

®

Identifiler

Amplification Kit

®

PCR

AmpF lSTR

®

Profiler Plus

™

PCR

Amplification Kit

AmpF lSTR

®

SGM Plus

®

PCR

Amplification Kit

• 6-FAM

™

• VIC

®

• NED

™

• PET

™

• LIZ

®

• 5-FAM

™

• JOE

™

• NED

™

• ROX

™

Matrix Standard Set

DS-33

DS-32

7-2

DRAFT

AmpF



Process Overview

Process Overview

Flowchart

This flowchart illustrates the procedures required to run the

AmpFlSTR PCR Amplification Kit PCR products on the 3100

Genetic Analyzer.

IMPORTANT!

Refer to the reagent warnings on page 7-4 before

performing these procedures.

• Turn on computer. OrbixWeb

™ automatically launches.

daemon and software

• Turn on 3100 Genetic Analyzer. Wait until the green light appears.

• Launch the ABI P

RISM


• Preset Autosampler and place fresh deionized water and 1X running buffer in positions 1 to 4.

• Place lower polymer block and anode buffer jar on the instrument.

• Clean the capillary array detection window with methanol, if necessary.

• Use the Capillary Array Wizard to either install, remove and store, or discard an array. The wizard takes you through the following steps:

– Installing or removing the capillary array

– Filling a 5-mL reserve syringe and a 250-

μL array syringe with 3100 POP-4

™

polymer

– Removing bubbles in the polymer block’s tubing

• Perform spatial calibration.

Pass

Fail

• Prepare spectral standards and perform spectral calibration.

Pass

• Rerun spectral calibration, verify settings and, if necessary, prepare new standards.

• If spectral calibration continues to fail, refer to the Troubleshooting chapter in the ABI P

RISM

®

3100 Genetic Analyzer and ABI P

RISM

®

3100-Avant Genetic

Analyzer User Reference

Guide (P/N 4335393).

• Combine PCR product with Hi-Di

™

Formamide + internal size standard.

• Transfer to 96-well reaction plates.

• Heat denature for 3 min at 95 °C and immediately chill on ice for 3 min.

• Assemble plate septa, tray cover, and plate base; place on the Autosampler.

• Complete the plate record and link to the plate assignment.

• Press the green arrow to start the run.

Fail

• Review the extracted sample files in the appropriate software.

Pass

• Repeat spatial calibration without filling the capillary.

Fail

Pass

• Refill capillary with fresh polymer and rerun spatial calibration.

Fail

Pass

• Remove capillary array and clean window.

• Inspect window for damage

(e.g., scratches or cracks).

Fail

• If the spatial calibration continues to fail, refer to the troubleshooting chapter in the instrument user’s manual.

AmpF


DRAFT


7-3

Chapter 7 ABI P

RISM


Before You Begin

Before you begin, note the following:

• This protocol has been written for the 96-well reaction plate format only.

• When running the AmpFlSTR PCR Amplification Kits on the

3100 Genetic Analyzer, we recommend and support the use of:

– 3100 POP-4 polymer

– 36-cm capillary array

– Hi-Di Formamide

• To successfully run the AmpFlSTR PCR Amplification Kit PCR products on the 3100 Genetic Analyzer, you should perform all of the procedures listed in the flowchart on

page 7-3 . Read the

reagent warnings below before performing these procedures.

CHEMICAL HAZARD. 10X Genetic Analyzer

Buffer with EDTA may cause eye, skin, and respiratory tract irritation. Read the MSDS, and follow the handling instructions.

Wear appropriate protective eyewear, clothing, and gloves.

CHEMICAL HAZARD. Methanol is a flammable liquid and vapor. Exposure causes eye and skin irritation, and may cause central nervous system depression and nerve damage.

Read the MSDS, and follow the handling instructions. Wear appropriate protective eyewear, clothing, and gloves.

CHEMICAL HAZARD. Formamide.

Exposure causes eye, skin, and respiratory tract irritation. It is a possible developmental and birth defect hazard. Read the MSDS, and follow the handling instructions. Wear appropriate protective eyewear, clothing, and gloves.

CHEMICAL HAZARD. POP-4 polymer causes eye, skin, and respiratory tract irritation. Read the MSDS, and follow the handling instructions. Wear appropriate protective eyewear, clothing, and gloves.

7-4

DRAFT

AmpF



Process Overview

For More

Information

The procedures in this chapter provide a broad overview of the steps required to perform a fragment analysis run and to perform data analysis.

If you need more detailed procedures, refer to the following documents:

• ABI P

RISM

®


• ABI P

RISM

®


RISM

®

3100-Avant

Genetic Analyzer User Reference Guide (P/N 4335393)

• ABI P

RISM

®

3100 Genetic Analyzer Data Collection Software

Version 1.1 Upgrade User Bulletin (P/N 4333533), which describes the new features in the ABI P

RISM

3100 Data Collection

Software Version 1.1

• Overview of the Analysis Parameters and Size Caller User

Bulletin (P/N 4335617)

• ABI P

RISM

®

GeneScan

Windows NT

®

®

Analysis Software Version 3.7 for the

Platform User Guide (P/N 4308923)

• ABI P

RISM

®

Genotyper

®

3.7 NT Software User’s Manual

(P/N 4309947)

References

• Shadravan, F. 2001. Sizing Precision and Reproducibility Studies of AmpFlSTR

®

Kits with ABI P

RISM

®


Proc. Am. Acad. Forensic Sci. 7:26.

• Shadravan, F., Roby, R.K., Reeder, D.J. 2002. Characterization of

AmpFlSTR

ABI P

RISM

Sci. 8:27.

®

®

Identifiler

™

PCR Amplification Kit for use with

3100 Genetic Analyzer. Proc. Am. Acad. Forensic

AmpF


DRAFT


7-5

Chapter 7 ABI P

RISM


3100 Data Collection Software Version 1.1

The 3100 Data Collection Software Version 1.1 provides several new features/enhancements. Those that pertain to the protocols in this

chapter are described in “Selected Features” below.

Note:

For a detailed description of all of the new features provided in the 3100 Data Collection Software Version 1.1, refer to the

ABI P

RISM

®

3100 Genetic Analyzer Data Collection Software

Version 1.1 Upgrade User Bulletin (P/N 4333533).

Selected

Features

The 3100 Data Collection Software Version 1.1:

• Allows you to select the active spectral calibration for a dye set from any previous spectral calibration run.

• Incorporates a new spectral calibration algorithm. This algorithm improves the quality of the matrix generated, thereby improving the overall quality of the sample data.

• Provides new options in setting preferences for sample file folders and data extraction folders. You can:

– Specify a run folder naming format.

– Specify the data extraction folder name and location.

– Group extracted files by run or by plate. Grouping sample files by plate puts all the sample files from one plate into a folder.

Grouping sample files by run puts all the sample files from one run into a folder.

– Distinguish between the naming preferences for Sequence

Collector and sample files.

• Provides modules that support specific fragment analysis applications using the G5 chemistry:

– GeneScan36vb_POP4DefaultModule

– Spect36vb_POP4DefaultModule

7-6

DRAFT

AmpF



Preparing for a Run

Preparing for a Run

Setting Up the

Instrument


RISM

®

3100 Genetic Analyzer User Guide

(P/N 4334785) for general instrument setup procedures, including:

• Starting the computer, instrument, and software

• Checking the reagents, and replenishing them, if necessary

Changing a

Capillary Array

When to Change a Capillary Array

A capillary array should last approximately 100 runs. The following indications may suggest that a new capillary array is required:

• Poor sizing precision or allele calling

• Poor resolution and/or decreased signal intensity

Changing a Capillary Array

For information on changing a capillary array, refer to the

ABI P

RISM

®


Replacing the

Syringes

To maintain optimal performance, we recommend that syringes be replaced approximately every three months.

Performing a

Spatial

Calibration

When to Perform a Spatial Calibration

You should perform a spatial calibration after each time you:

• Install or replace a capillary array

• Temporarily remove the capillary array from the detection block

Performing a Spatial Calibration

For information on performing a spatial calibration, refer to the

ABI P

RISM

®


AmpF


DRAFT


7-7

Chapter 7 ABI P

RISM


Performing a Spectral Calibration

A spectral calibration creates a matrix to correct for the overlapping of fluorescence emission spectra of the dyes. Application of this matrix to the raw data is called multicomponenting.

Multicomponenting occurs as the data are collected; therefore, it is important to generate and use good quality matrices for the individual capillaries.

Performing a spectral calibration can be divided into the following tasks:

Choosing the Dye Set and Matrix Standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9

Setting Up the Spectral (Matrix) Calibration Standards. . . . . . . . 7-10

Loading the Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13

Preparing the Plate Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13

Performing a Spectral Calibration Run and Reviewing Data. . . . 7-14

When to Perform a Spectral

Calibration

You should perform a spectral calibration:

• When you use a new dye set on the instrument

• After the laser or CCD camera has been realigned by a service engineer

• If you begin to see a decrease in spectral separation (“pull-up” and/or “pull-down” peaks)

7-8

DRAFT

AmpF



Performing a Spectral Calibration

Choosing the Dye

Set and Matrix

Standard

Choose the appropriate dye set and matrix standard for the

AmpFlSTR PCR Amplification Kit you are using as shown in the table below.

For kits that use a...

four-dye system, including the following dyes:

• 5-FAM

™

• JOE

™

• NED

™

• ROX

™ five-dye system, including the following dyes:

• 6-FAM

™

• VIC

®

• NED

™

• PET

™

• LIZ

®

Use...

Dye Set F

And use...

Matrix Standard

Set DS-32

Dye Set G5 Matrix Standard

Set DS-33

Kit Examples

• AmpF lSTR

®

COfiler

®

PCR

Amplification Kit

• AmpF lSTR

®

Profiler

™

PCR

Amplification Kit

• AmpF lSTR

®

Profiler Plus

™

PCR

Amplification Kit

• AmpF lSTR

®

Profiler Plus

™

ID

PCR Amplification Kit

• AmpF lSTR

®

SGM Plus

®

PCR

Amplification Kit

• AmpF lSTR

®

Identifiler

®

PCR

Amplification Kit

• AmpF lSTR

®

SEfiler

®

PCR

Amplification Kit

AmpF


DRAFT


7-9

Chapter 7 ABI P

RISM


Setting Up the

Spectral (Matrix)

Calibration

Standards

Note:

If you need more information on setting up the spectral

(matrix) calibration standards, refer to the ABI P

RISM

®

3100 Genetic

Analyzer User Guide (P/N 4334785) or the ABI P

Bulletin (P/N 4333533).

RISM

®

3100 Genetic

Analyzer Data Collection Software Version 1.1 Upgrade User

Matrix Standards for Dye Set F Spectral Calibration

Follow the procedure below if you are setting up spectral (matrix) calibration standards for kits using a four-dye system, including the

5-FAM, JOE, NED, and ROX dyes (e.g., COfiler Kit, Profiler Kit,

Profiler Plus Kit, Profiler Plus ID Kit, and SGM Plus Kit).

To set up the matrix standards for Dye Set F:

1. Thoroughly vortex the four Matrix Standard Set DS-32 tubes for Dye Set F.

2. Spin the tubes briefly in a microcentrifuge.

7-10

DRAFT

AmpF




To set up the matrix standards for Dye Set F: (continued)

3. Prepare Matrix Standard Set DS-32 for Dye Set F by combining the following in a labeled 1.5-mL microcentrifuge tube:

Reagent

5-FAM

JOE

NED

ROX

Hi-Di Formamide

Final Volume

Volume (µL)

2.5

2.5

2.5

2.5

190

200


Exposure causes eye, skin, and respiratory tract irritation. It is a possible developmental and birth defect hazard. Read the


Note:

For optimal performance of the new spectral calibration algorithm, Applied Biosystems recommends that you formulate the Matrix Standard Set DS-32 standards as indicated in this chapter. If necessary, add additional matrix standards at increments of 2.5

μL to pass spectral calibration. This chapter recommends a higher concentration of the spectral standards than is suggested in the Matrix

Standard Set DS-32 product insert.

4. Vortex thoroughly.

5. Spin the mixture briefly in a microcentrifuge.

6. Heat the tube at 95 °C for 3 min to denature the DNA.

7. Immediately place the tube on ice for 3 min.

AmpF


DRAFT


7-11

Chapter 7 ABI P

RISM


Matrix Standards for Dye Set G5 Spectral Calibration

Follow the procedure below if you are setting up spectral (matrix) calibration standards for kits using a five-dye system, including the

6-FAM, VIC, NED, PET, and LIZ dyes

SEfiler Kit).

(e.g., Identifiler Kit,

To set up the matrix standards for Dye Set G5:

1. Thoroughly vortex the Matrix Standard Set DS-33 tube for

Dye Set G5.

2. Spin the tube briefly in a microcentrifuge.

3. Prepare Matrix Standard Set DS-33 for Dye Set G5 by combining the following in a labeled 1.5-mL microcentrifuge tube:

Reagent

Matrix Standard Set DS-33

Hi-Di Formamide

Final Volume

Volume (µL)

5

195

200




4. Vortex thoroughly.

5. Spin the mixture briefly in a microcentrifuge.

6. Heat the tube at 95 °C for 3 min to denature the DNA.

7. Immediately place the tube on ice for 3 min.

7-12

DRAFT

AmpF




Loading the

Standards

To load the standards:

1. Dispense 10 μ L of the denatured matrix standard into a

96-well reaction plate, wells A1–H2.

2. Centrifuge the plate so that each standard is collected at the bottom of its well.

Preparing the

Plate Assembly

To prepare the plate assembly:

1. Insert the 96-well reaction plate into the plate base provided with the instrument.

2. Prepare the plate assembly.

Note:

For information on preparing the plate assembly, refer to the ABI P

RISM

(P/N 4334785).

®


3. Place the plate assembly on the Autosampler.

AmpF


DRAFT


7-13

Chapter 7 ABI P

RISM


Performing a

Spectral

Calibration Run and Reviewing

Data

To perform a spectral calibration run and review data:

1. In the Plate View page of the 3100 Data Collection Software, click New to access the Plate Editor dialog box as shown below.

Figure 7-1 Plate Editor dialog box

2. In the Plate Editor dialog box: a. Type a name for the plate.

b. Select Spectral Calibration.

c. Select 96-Well as the plate type. d. Click Finish.

The Plate Editor spreadsheet opens.

7-14

DRAFT

AmpF




To perform a spectral calibration run and review data: (continued)

3. Complete the Plate Editor spreadsheet for the wells you have loaded: a. In the Sample Name column, type a name for the matrix sample.

b. In the Dye Set column, select F or G5, depending on the

AmpFlSTR PCR Amplification Kit used (see

page 7-10 ).

c. In the Spectral Run Module column, select:

Spect36_POP4DefaultModule for Dye Set F, or

Spect36vb_POP4DefaultModule for Dye Set G5 d. In the Spectral Parameters column, select:

MtxStd{GeneScan-SetF}.par for Dye Set F, or

MtxStd{GeneScan-SetG5}.par for Dye Set G5 e. For each of the columns in

steps a through d

above, click the column header to select the entire column, then select

Edit > Fill Down to apply the information to all of the selected samples.

f. Click OK.

Completing the Plate Editor spreadsheet creates a plate record for the calibration run in the database. After a few seconds, the entry for the plate record appears in the Pending

Plate Records table of the Plate Setup page.

4. Link your reaction plate and start the run.

Note:

For more information on linking a reaction plate and starting a run, refer to the ABI P

RISM

Analyzer User Guide (P/N 4334785).

®

3100 Genetic

5. At the end of the run, while the data are being analyzed, the

Spectral Calibration Result dialog box opens to indicate how many capillaries have passed.

Click OK to acknowledge completion of the run.

6. If necessary, repeat the spectral calibration run until 14 or more capillaries have passed.

AmpF


DRAFT


7-15

Chapter 7 ABI P

RISM


To perform a spectral calibration run and review data: (continued)

7. Select Tools > Display Spectral Calibration. Review and evaluate the spectral calibration profile for each capillary, even if the Spectral Calibration Results box indicated that all capillaries passed.

The figure below is a representative spectral display for G5 chemistry in the 3100 Data Collection Software Version 1.1.

Figure 7-2 Representative spectral display for G5 chemistry

Note:

For more information on reviewing and evaluating a spectral calibration profile, refer to the ABI P

RISM

Genetic Analyzer User Guide (P/N 4334785).

®

3100

7-16

DRAFT

AmpF



Preparing and Running Your Samples

Preparing and Running Your Samples

Preparing samples for a run can be divided into the following tasks:

Performing PCR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-17

Preparing the Formamide:Size Standard Mixture. . . . . . . . . . . . .7-18

Loading the Samples and Allelic Ladder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-19

Preparing the Plate Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-19

Performing a Fragment Analysis Run and Analyzing Data . . . . .7-20

Editing Default Module Parameters in Dye Set F and

Dye Set G5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-22

Note:

A run corresponds to a defined set of 16 wells on a 96-well reaction plate.

Performing PCR

To prepare your DNA samples and perform PCR, follow the instructions in the appropriate AmpFlSTR PCR Amplification Kit user’s manual.

AmpF


DRAFT


7-17

Chapter 7 ABI P

RISM


Preparing the

Formamide:Size

Standard Mixture

To prepare the formamide:size standard mixture:

1. You can prepare the formamide:size standard mixture for either each sample or each run.

For each sample, combine the following in a single microcentrifuge tube:

Volume (µL)

Reagent

Dye Set F

Dye Set

G5

GeneScan

™

-500 ROX

™

Size

Standard

GeneScan

®

-500 LIZ

®

Size Standard

0.5

—

— 0.3

Hi-Di Formamide 8 5 8 7

Alternatively, for each run, combine the following in a single microcentrifuge tube:

Reagent

GeneScan-500 ROX Size Standard

GeneScan-500 LIZ Size Standard

Hi-Di Formamide

Volume (µL)

Dye Set F Dye Set G5

8.3

—

141.7

—

5

145

Note:

Prepare the appropriate size standard formulation for your dye set.

IMPORTANT!

The amount of size standard listed here is a suggested value only. You should determine the appropriate amount of size standard based on your own results/instruments.




2. Vortex the tube to mix, then spin briefly in a microcentrifuge.

7-18

DRAFT

AmpF




Loading the

Samples and

Allelic Ladder

To load the samples and allelic ladder:

1. Dispense 9 µL of the formamide:size standard mixture into each well.

Note:

run.

Add 10 µL of the formamide to each blank well per




2. Load 1 µL of the sample or allelic ladder into the wells.

3. Cover the reaction plate with an appropriate septa. Use:

• Reservoir septa, or

• 96-well plate septa if you prepare samples for more than one run

4. Briefly spin the reaction plate in a centrifuge to ensure that the contents of each well are mixed and collected at the bottom.

5. To denature, heat the reaction plate in a thermal cycler at

95 °C for 3 min.

6. Place the reaction plate immediately on ice for 3 min.

Preparing the

Plate Assembly

To prepare the plate assembly:

1. Insert the 96-well reaction plate into the plate base provided with the instrument.

2. Prepare the plate assembly.

Note:

For information on preparing the plate assembly, refer to the ABI P

RISM

(P/N 4334785).

®


3. Place the plate assembly on the Autosampler.

AmpF


DRAFT


7-19

Chapter 7 ABI P

RISM


Performing a

Fragment

Analysis Run and

Analyzing Data

To perform a fragment analysis run and analyze data:

1. In the Plate View page of the 3100 Data Collection Software, click New to access the Plate Editor dialog box.

2. Complete the Plate Editor spreadsheet: a. Type a name for the plate.

b. Select GeneScan.

c. Select 96-Well as the plate type. d. Click Finish.

Figure 7-3 Plate Editor spreadsheet

Note:

You can reuse plate records by importing data from an existing plate into the current plate. For details, refer to the

ABI P

RISM

®

3100 Genetic Analyzer Data Collection

Software Version 1.1 Upgrade User Bulletin (P/N 4333533).

7-20

DRAFT

AmpF




To perform a fragment analysis run and analyze data: (continued)

3. Complete the Plate Editor spreadsheet for the wells you have loaded, then click OK.

For each of the columns, enter information, click the column header to select the entire column, then select Edit > Fill

Down to apply the information to all of the selected samples.

a. In the Sample Name column, type a name for the samples.

b. In the Dyes column, select:

R for Dye Set F, or

O for Dye Set G5 c. In the Color Info column, type the word ladder again for each ladder in the Sample Name column.

Note:

Alternatively, you can use the Copy and Paste function.

d. In the Project Name column, select 3100_Project1 or a project of your choice.

Note:

For information on creating a project name, refer to the ABI P

RISM

(P/N 4334785).

®

3100 Genetic Analyzer User Guide e. In the Dye Set column, select F or G5, depending on the

AmpFlSTR PCR Amplification Kit used (see

page 9 ).

f. In the Run Module 1 column, select:

GeneScan36_POP4DyeSetFModule for Dye Set F, or

GeneScan36vb_POP4DyeSetG5Module for Dye Set G5

Note:

If this is your first run, edit the Default Module parameters for Dye Set F

(GeneScan36_POP4DefaultModule), and Dye Set G5

(GeneScan36vb_POP4DefaultModule), changing injection voltage (kV) from 1 to 3, and changing injection time (seconds) from 22 to 10. See

“Editing

Default Module Parameters in Dye Set F and Dye

Set G5” on page 7-22 .

g. In the Analysis Module 1 column, select a module for your size standard (e.g., GS500Analysis.gsp).

After a few seconds, the entry for the plate record appears in the Pending Plate Records table of the Plate Setup page.

7-21 AmpF


DRAFT


Chapter 7 ABI P

RISM


To perform a fragment analysis run and analyze data: (continued)

4. Link your reaction plate and start the run.

Note:

For more information on linking a reaction plate and starting a run, refer to the ABI P

RISM


®

3100 Genetic

5. When the run has completed, view the data. You can view the data:

• As color data in the Array View page of the 3100 Data

Collection Software

Note:

The electropherogram displayed in the Array

View page is the raw, multicomponented data for a selected capillary.

• As analyzed sample files in the following default location:

D:\AppliedBio\3100\DataExtractor\ExtractedRuns

6. If necessary, re-analyze the data with the GeneScan Analysis

Software Version 3.7.1 or later.

Note:

For details, refer to the Overview of the Analysis

Parameters and Size Caller User Bulletin (P/N 4335617).

Editing Default

Module

Parameters in

Dye Set F and

Dye Set G5

If this is your first run, edit the Default Module parameters in

Dye Set F and Dye Set G5.

Note:

This is a one-time procedure.s

To edit the Default Module parameters:

1. Click the Module Editor button on the toolbar to open the

Module Editor dialog box.

2. From the GeneScan tab, select the appropriate run module to use as a template.

Select either GeneScan36_POP4DyeSetFModule for Dye

Set F, or GeneScan36vb_POP4DyeSetG5Module for Dye

Set G5.

7-22

DRAFT

AmpF




To edit the Default Module parameters: (continued)

3. Edit the injection parameter values as follows:

• Change the injection voltage (kV) from 1 to 3.

• Change the injection time (seconds) from 22 to 10.

IMPORTANT!

Only whole numbers are accepted.

IMPORTANT!

are not saved.

Be sure that all values are red. Values in black

Figure 7-4 shows the Default Module parameters (same in

both Dye Set F and Dye Set G5).

Figure 7-4 Default Module parameters

4. Click Save As and enter the name of new module as follows:

GeneScan36_POP4DyeSetFModule for Dye Set F, or

GeneScan36vb_POP4DyeSetG5Module for Dye Set G5

5. Click Save to create a new run module.

Enter a unique descriptive name and click OK.

Note:

You cannot save default run modules.

6. When you are finished, click the Close button to exit the

Module Editor.

7-23 AmpF


DRAFT


Chapter 7 ABI P

RISM


Examples of DNA Profiles

Figures 7-5

through 7-12

are examples of DNA profiles obtained on the 3100 Genetic Analyzer.

Figures 7-5 and 7-6

below show

AmpFlSTR

®

Control DNA 9947A (1 ng) amplified with the

AmpFlSTR Identifiler PCR Amplification Kit.

D3S1358

D19S433

D8S1179

Figure 7-5 Data analyzed using GeneScan Analysis Software

Version 3.7.1

D21S11 D7S820 CSF1PO

D16S539 D2S1338 TH01 vWA

D13S317

TPOX D18S51

Amelogenin D5S818 FGA

Figure 7-6 The same sample from Figure 7-5

, above, analyzed using Genotyper

®

Software v 3.7

7-24

DRAFT

AmpF



Examples of DNA Profiles

Capillary 1

Capillary 4

Capillary 5

Capillary 8

Capillary 9

Capillary 12

Capillary 13

Capillary 16

Figure 7-7 Eight (8) capillaries of a 16-capillary array displaying single nucleotide resolution at the 9.3 and 10 alleles (highlighted) of the TH01 locus from the AmpF

lSTR

®

Identifiler

®

Allelic Ladder.

The 9.3 and 10 alleles were resolved and individually detected in all 16 capillaries.

AmpF


DRAFT


7-25

Chapter 7 ABI P

RISM


Capillary 1

Capillary 5

Capillary 9

Capillary 13

Figure 7-8 A comparison of signal intensity between four (4) capillaries across a capillary array using the AmpF

lSTR Control

DNA 9947A (1 ng) amplified with the AmpF

lSTR Identifiler PCR

Amplification Kit.

Sample 1

Sample 2

Sample 3

Figure 7-9 Three (3) DNA samples (2 ng) amplified with the

AmpF

lSTR SGM Plus PCR Amplification Kit

7-26

DRAFT

AmpF



Examples of DNA Profiles

1.0 ng

0.5 ng

0.25 ng

0.125 ng

Figure 7-10 Dilutions for a DNA sample amplified with the

AmpF

lSTR Identifiler PCR Amplification Kit, 1.0 ng, 0.5 ng,

0.25 ng, and 0.125 ng input DNA. The Y-axis scale is magnified for lower input DNA amounts.

2.0 ng

0.5 ng

0.25 ng

0.125 ng

Figure 7-11 Dilutions of a DNA sample amplified with the

AmpF

lSTR SGM Plus PCR Amplification Kit, 2.0 ng, 0.5 ng,

0.25 ng, and 0.125 ng input DNA. The Y-axis scale is magnified for lower input DNA amounts.

AmpF


DRAFT


7-27

Chapter 7 ABI P

RISM


Figure 7-12 The first and last panels display the profiles of each

DNA sample amplified individually (the male sample is in the top panel and the female sample is in the bottom panel) with 2 ng DNA with the AmpF

lSTR Profiler Plus PCR Amplification Kit. The other

panels display the mixture of these DNA samples mixed at approximate ratios of 9:1, 3:1, and 1:1. The panel inset displays the expanded view of the DNA sample mixed at an approximate ratio of 9:1 at D8S1179 (green) and D5S818 (yellow).

7-28

DRAFT

AmpF



1:1

0:1

1:0

9:1

3:1

Materials Required

Materials Required

The following tables list the items required to run AmpFlSTR PCR

Amplification Kit PCR products on the 3100 Genetic Analyzer.

Dedicated

Equipment and

Supplies

Follow the guidelines for dedicated equipment and supplies to ensure that exogenous DNA and PCR products are confined to a designated area:

• Designate an Amplified DNA Work Area for amplified DNA and for dedicated equipment and supplies used to handle amplified

DNA.

• Do not remove amplified DNA, equipment, or supplies from the

Amplified DNA Work Area.

• Samples that are not amplified should never come into contact with supplies and equipment in the Amplified DNA Work Area.

Accessories

Accessories

3100 Capillary Array, 36 cm

MicroAmp

®

Optical 96-Well

Reaction Plate

96-well plate septa

Reservoir septa

Array-fill syringe, 250-

μL glass syringe

Polymer-reserve syringe,

5.0-mL glass syringe

Supplier

Applied Biosystems

Applied Biosystems

Part Number

4315931

N801-0560

Applied Biosystems

Applied Biosystems

Applied Biosystems

Applied Biosystems

4315933

4315932

4304470

628-3731

AmpF


DRAFT


7-29

Chapter 7 ABI P

RISM


Chemicals

Chemicals

3100 POP-4

™

polymer

Supplier

Applied Biosystems

Matrix Standard Set DS-32 for

3100 (containing the dyes

5-FAM

™

, JOE

™

, NED

™

, and

ROX

™

)

Matrix Standard Set DS-33 for

3100 (containing the dyes

6-FAM

™

, VIC

®

, NED

™

, PET

™

, and LIZ

®

)

Hi-Di

™

Formamide

GeneScan

™

-500 ROX

™

Size

Standard

GeneScan

®

-500 LIZ

®

Size

Standard

Applied Biosystems

Applied Biosystems

Applied Biosystems

Applied Biosystems

Applied Biosystems

10X Genetic Analyzer Buffer Applied Biosystems

AmpF lSTR

®

PCR Amplification Kit, one of the following:

AmpF lSTR

®

COfiler

®

PCR

Amplification Kit

AmpF lSTR

®

Identifiler

®

PCR

Amplification Kit

AmpF lSTR

®

Profiler

™

PCR

Amplification Kit

Applied Biosystems

Applied Biosystems

Applied Biosystems

AmpF lSTR

®

Profiler Plus

™

PCR

Amplification Kit

AmpF lSTR

®

Profiler Plus

™

ID


AmpF lSTR

®

SGM Plus

®

PCR

Amplification Kit

Applied Biosystems

Applied Biosystems

Applied Biosystems

Part Number

4316355

4323018

4323016

4311320

401734

4322682

401884

4305246

4322288

403038

4303326

4330284

4307133

7-30

DRAFT

AmpF



Materials Required

Software

The following software programs are required to analyze AmpFlSTR

PCR Amplification Kit PCR products on the 3100 Genetic Analyzer:

• ABI P

RISM

®

GeneScan

®

Analysis Software Version 3.7.1 or later for the Microsoft

®

Windows NT

®

operating system

• ABI P

RISM

®

3100 Data Collection Software Version 1.1 or later

For genotyping, the following software program is required:

• ABI P

RISM

Microsoft

®

Genotyper

®

®

Windows NT

Software v 3.7

or later for the

®

operating system

AmpF


DRAFT


7-31

Chapter 7 ABI P

RISM


User

Documentation

When processing AmpFlSTR PCR Amplification Kit PCR products on the 3100 Genetic Analyzer, it may be helpful to refer to the

Applied Biosystems instrument, software, and kit documentation listed below.

Document

ABI P

RISM

®


ABI P

RISM

®


RISM

®

3100-Avant Genetic Analyzer User Reference Guide

ABI P

RISM

®

3100 Genetic Analyzer Data Collection

Software Version 1.1 Upgrade User Bulletin

ABI P

RISM

®

GeneScan

®

Analysis Software Version 3.7 for the Windows NT

®

Platform User Guide

ABI P

RISM

®

Genotyper

®

3.7 NT Software User’s Manual

ABI P

RISM

®

Genotyper

®

3.7 NT Software Applications

Tutorials

Overview of the Analysis Parameters and Size Caller

User Bulletin

AmpF

lSTR

®

COfiler

®

PCR Amplification Kit User

Bulletin

AmpF

lSTR

®

Identifiler

™

PCR Amplification Kit User’s

Manual

AmpF

lSTR

®

Profiler

™


Manual

AmpF

lSTR

®

Profiler Plus

™


Manual

AmpF

lSTR

®

Profiler Plus

™

ID PCR Amplification Kit

User Bulletin

AmpF

lSTR

®

SGM Plus

®


Manual

Part Number

4334785

4335393

4333533

4308923

4309947

4309961

4335617

4305469

4323291

402945

4303501

4330429

4309589

7-32

DRAFT

AmpF



Experiments and Results

8

8

In This Chapter

This chapter describes various experiments performed and results obtained using the AmpFlSTR

®

SEfiler

™

PCR Amplification Kit.

Experiments Using AmpF l

STR SEfiler PCR Amplification Kit . .8-2

Developmental Validation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-3

Accuracy, Precision, and Reproducibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-5

Extra Peaks in the Electropherogram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-22

Characterization of Loci . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-32

Species Specificity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-34

Sensitivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-36

Stability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-38

Mixture Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-40

Data Interpretation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-45

Population Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-46

Mutation Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-61

Probability of Identity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-62

Probability of Paternity Exclusion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-63

AmpF


8-1

DRAFT

March 22, 2012 1:12 pm, 8_ExperimentsResults.fm

Chapter 8 Experiments and Results

Experiments Using AmpF

lSTR SEfiler PCR

Amplification Kit

Importance of

Validation

Validation of a DNA typing procedure for human identification applications is an evaluation of the procedure’s efficiency, reliability, and performance characteristics. By challenging the procedure with samples commonly encountered in forensic and parentage laboratories, the validation process uncovers attributes and limitations critical for sound data interpretation in casework

(Sparkes, Kimpton, Gilbard, et al., 1996; Sparkes, Kimpton, Watson,

et al., 1996; Wallin et al., 1998).

Experiments

Experiments to evaluate the performance of AmpFlSTR SEfiler PCR

Amplification Kit were performed at Applied Biosystems. Some of these experiments were performed according to the DNA Advisory

Board (DAB) Quality Assurance Standards, effective October 1,

1998 (DNA Advisory Board, 1998). The DNA Advisory Board issued quality assurance standards for forensic DNA testing laboratories in the United States.

These DAB standards describe the quality assurance requirements that a laboratory should follow to ensure the quality and integrity of the data and competency of the laboratory. DAB defines a laboratory as a facility in which forensic DNA testing is performed.

Based on these standards, Applied Biosystems has conducted experiments that comply with Standards 8.1.1 and 8.1.2 and its associated subsections. This DNA methodology is not novel. (Moretti

et al., 2001; Frank et al., 2001; Wallin et al., 2002; and Holt et al., 2001).

This chapter discusses many of the experiments performed by

Applied Biosystems and examples of results obtained. Conditions that produced maximum PCR product yield were chosen and a window in which reproducible performance characteristics were met.

These experiments, while not exhaustive, are appropriate for a manufacturer, in our opinion. Each laboratory using the AmpFlSTR

SEfiler PCR Amplification Kit should perform appropriate validation studies. Forensic validation of the AmpFlSTR

®

SGM Plus

®

Kit has been published (Cotton et al., 2000; Wallin et al., 2002). The

AmpFlSTR SEfiler PCR Amplification Kit contains all the

AmpFl STR SGM Plus Kit loci and SE33. Refer to the AmpFlSTR

®

SGM Plus

®

PCR Amplification Kit User’s Manual (P/N 4309589) for more details.

8-2 AmpF


DRAFT


Developmental Validation

Developmental Validation

DAB Standard

8.1.1

Developmental

Validation

“Developmental validation that is conducted shall be appropriately

documented.” (DNA Advisory Board, 1998)

The DNA Advisory Board has determined critical reagent concentrations and reaction conditions (e.g., magnesium chloride, annealing temperature) to produce reliable, locus-specific amplification and appropriate sensitivity.

PCR

Components

One of the critical reagents, concentration of the SE33 primers

(forward and reverse) of the AmpFlSTR SEfiler Primer Set were examined. The concentration for the SE33 primers was established to be in the window that meets the reproducible performance characteristics of specificity and sensitivity. Various magnesium chloride concentrations were also tested on the ABI P

RISM

310

Genetic Analyzer. To determine the optimum concentration, a 2 ng amplification of genomic DNA varying the magnesium chloride concentration was analyzed. The results are shown in the figure below.

1.0 mM

1.15 mM

1.25 mM

Standard

Concentration

1.35 mM

1.50 mM

Figure 8-1 A 2 ng amplification of genomic DNA varying the magnesium chloride concentration, analyzed on the

ABI P

RISM


AmpF


8-3

DRAFT



Thermal Cycler

Parameters

Thermal cycling parameters were established for amplification of the

AmpFlSTR SEfiler Kit. Thermal cycling times and temperatures of

GeneAmp PCR systems were verified. Varying annealing temperature windows were tested to verify that a ±2.0 °C window produced a specific PCR product with the desired sensitivity of at least 2 ng of AmpFlSTR Control DNA 007.

The effects of annealing temperatures on the amplification of

AmpFlSTR SEfiler kit loci were examined using AmpFlSTR

Control DNA 007.

The annealing temperatures tested were 55, 57, 59, 61, and 63 °C

(see

Figure 8-2 ) in the GeneAmp PCR System 9700. The PCR

products were analyzed using the ABI P

RISM


Neither preferential nor differential amplification was observed in the denaturation temperature experiments. Of the tested annealing temperatures, 55, 57, 59, and 61 °C produced robust profiles. At

63 °C, the yield of the majority of loci was significantly reduced.

Routine thermal cycler calibration is recommended when following the amplification protocol. Preferential amplification for all loci, including SE33 locus, was not observed at any of the tested annealing temperatures.

55 °C

57 °C

59 °C

Standard

Protocol

61 °C

63 °C

Figure 8-2 Amplification of 2 ng of genomic DNA while varying the annealing temperature, analyzed on the ABI P

RISM

310

Genetic Analyzer

8-4 AmpF


DRAFT


Accuracy, Precision, and Reproducibility

Accuracy, Precision, and Reproducibility

DAB Standard

8.1.2 Accuracy

“Novel forensic DNA methodologies shall undergo developmental validation to ensure the accuracy, precision and reproducibility of

the procedure.” (DAB, 1998)

Laser-induced fluorescence detection of length polymorphism at short tandem repeat loci is not a novel methodology (Holt et al.,

2001; and Wallin et al., 2002). However, accuracy and reproducibility of AmpFlSTR SEfiler kit profiles have been determined from various sample types.

Figure 8-3 illustrates the size differences that are typically observed

between sample alleles and allelic ladder alleles on the ABI P

RISM

3100 Genetic Analyzer with POP-4™ polymer. The x-axis in

Figure

8-3 represents the nominal base pair sizes for the AmpFlSTR SEfiler

Allelic Ladder, and the dashed lines parallel to the x-axis represent the ±0.5-bp windows. The y-axis is the deviation of each sample allele size from the corresponding allelic ladder allele size. All sample alleles are within 0.5 bp of a corresponding allele in an allelic ladder.

Figure 8-3 Size deviation of 89 samples and two allelic ladders on a single ABI P

RISM

3100 Genetic Analyzer run

AmpF


8-5

DRAFT



Precision and

Size Windows

Sizing precision allows for determining accurate and reliable genotypes. Sizing precision was measured on the ABI P

RISM

310

Genetic Analyzer. As indicated in the Automated Genotyping section, the recommended method for genotyping is to employ a

±0.5-bp “window” around the size obtained for each allele in the

AmpFlSTR SEfiler Allelic Ladder. A ±0.5-bp window allows for the detection and correct assignment of alleles. Any sample allele that sizes outside a window could be either of the following:

• An “off-ladder” allele, i.e., an allele of a size that is not represented in the AmpFlSTR SEfiler Allelic Ladder

• An allele that does correspond to an allelic ladder allele, but whose size is just outside a window because of measurement error

The measurement error inherent in any sizing method can be defined by the degree of precision in sizing an allele multiple times. Precision is measured by calculating the standard deviation in the size values obtained for an allele that is run several injections in a capillary instrument or in several lanes of one gel.

Table 8-1 on page 8-7

indicates typical precision results obtained from the seven injections of the AmpFlSTR SEfiler Allelic Ladder analyzed on the ABI P

RISM

310 Genetic Analyzer (47-cm capillary and POP-4 polymer). The internal lane size standard used was

GeneScan ® -500 LIZ ® Size Standard. These results were obtained within a set of injections on a single capillary.

As indicated above, sample alleles may occasionally size outside of the ±0.5-bp window for a respective allelic ladder allele because of measurement error. The frequency of such an occurrence is lowest in detection systems having the smallest standard deviations in sizing.


illustrates the tight clustering of allele sizes obtained on the ABI P

RISM

310 Genetic Analyzer, where the standard deviation in sizing is typically less than 0.15 bp. The instance of a sample allele sizing outside of the ±0.5-bp window because of measurement error is relatively rare when the standard deviation in sizing is approximately 0.15 bp or less (Smith, 1995).

For sample alleles that do not size within a ±0.5-bp window, the PCR product must be rerun to distinguish between a true off-ladder allele versus measurement error of a sample allele that corresponds with an allele in the allelic ladder. Repeat analysis, when necessary, provides an added level of confidence to the final allele assignment.

Genotyper® software automatically flags sample alleles that do not size within the prescribed window around an allelic ladder allele.

8-6 AmpF


DRAFT



It is important to note that while the precision within a gel or set of capillary injections is very good, the determined allele sizes vary between platforms. Cross-platform sizing differences arise from a number of parameters, including type and concentration of polymer mixture, run temperature, and electrophoresis conditions. Variations in sizing can also be found between runs on the same instrument and between runs on different instruments because of these parameters.

We strongly recommend that the allele sizes obtained be compared to the sizes obtained for known alleles in the AmpFlSTR SEfiler Allelic

Ladder from the same run and then converted to genotypes (as described in the Automated Genotyping section). Refer to

Table 8-1

for the results of injections of the AmpFlSTR SEfiler Allelic Ladder.

For more information on precision and genotyping, see Lazaruk

et al., 1998 and Mansfield et al.,1998.

Table 8-1 Precision results of seven injections of the AmpF

l STR

SEfiler Allelic Ladder:

ABI P

RISM


Allele

Amelogenin

X

Y

Mean

104.01

109.68

S.D.

0.09

0.09

AmpF


8-7

DRAFT




l STR

SEfiler Allelic Ladder: (continued)

ABI P

RISM


Allele

D2S1338

23

24

25

26

27

28

19

20

21

22

15

16

17

18

Mean

323.29

327.45

331.59

335.66

339.69

343.47

289.52

293.65

297.76

301.97

306.33

310.59

314.90

319.11

S.D.

0.14

0.15

0.12

0.10

0.13

0.09

0.09

0.10

0.12

0.11

0.06

0.06

0.07

0.07

8-8 AmpF


DRAFT




l STR


ABI P

RISM


Allele

D3S1358

16

17

18

19

12

13

14

15

Mean

110.77

114.92

118.85

122.79

126.95

131.16

135.21

139.22

S.D.

0.09

0.04

0.08

0.06

0.09

0.06

0.05

0.07

AmpF


8-9

DRAFT




l STR


ABI P

RISM


Allele

D8S1179

12

13

14

15

10

11

8

9

16

17

18

19

Mean

124.16

128.19

132.28

136.38

140.62

145.19

149.60

153.95

158.21

162.35

166.43

170.52

S.D.

0.07

0.05

0.09

0.07

0.08

0.06

0.08

0.08

0.07

0.10

0.10

0.09

8-10 AmpF


DRAFT




l STR


ABI P

RISM


Allele

D16S539

11

12

13

14

15

9

10

5

8

Mean

228.68

240.63

244.68

248.67

252.71

256.70

260.70

264.78

268.86

S.D.

0.08

0.06

0.08

0.05

0.06

0.05

0.08

0.08

0.11

AmpF


8-11

DRAFT




l STR


ABI P

RISM


Allele

D18S51

17

18

19

20

14

14.2

15

16

21

22

23

24

11

12

13

13.2

7

9

10

10.2

Mean

293.05

295.07

297.18

301.41

305.79

310.15

314.45

318.70

264.49

272.62

276.68

278.63

280.70

284.75

288.88

290.94

322.98

327.08

331.24

335.41

S.D.

0.11

0.11

0.14

0.12

0.08

0.12

0.11

0.11

0.11

0.12

0.15

0.12

0.09

0.08

0.09

0.06

0.09

0.07

0.07

0.09

8-12 AmpF


DRAFT




l STR


ABI P

RISM


Allele

D18S51 (continued)

25

26

27

D19S433

14.2

15

15.2

16

16.2

17

17.2

12.2

13

13.2

14

9

10

11

12

Mean

339.50

343.30

347.03

123.48

125.44

127.45

129.43

131.44

133.42

135.47

101.88

105.80

109.68

113.57

115.55

117.51

119.52

121.45

S.D.

0.15

0.12

0.09

0.06

0.06

0.04

0.05

0.06

0.06

0.03

0.04

0.06

0.05

0.07

0.06

0.07

0.05

0.06

AmpF


8-13

DRAFT




l STR


ABI P

RISM


Allele

D21S11

31.2

32

32.2

33

29.2

30

30.2

31

33.2

34

34.2

35

27

28

28.2

29

24

24.2

25

26

Mean

209.15

211.12

213.06

215.05

216.98

219.02

220.97

222.99

187.71

189.71

191.63

195.53

199.42

203.29

205.23

207.19

224.91

226.97

228.85

230.94

S.D.

0.03

0.05

0.06

0.06

0.05

0.09

0.06

0.04

0.07

0.05

0.08

0.06

0.06

0.08

0.04

0.07

0.07

0.09

0.04

0.02

8-14 AmpF


DRAFT




l STR


ABI P

RISM


Allele

D21S11 (continued)

35.2

36

37

38

Mean

232.83

234.85

238.83

242.74

S.D.

0.06

0.05

0.09

0.07

AmpF


8-15

DRAFT




l STR


ABI P

RISM


FGA

Allele

28

29

30

30.2

25

26

26.2

27

31.2

32.2

33.2

42.2

21

22

23

24

17

18

19

20

Mean

244.10

248.15

250.17

252.21

256.22

260.30

264.41

266.20

211.89

215.91

219.91

223.95

227.96

232.00

236.03

240.06

270.32

274.43

278.48

316.56

S.D.

0.08

0.06

0.10

0.10

0.11

0.10

0.08

0.08

0.09

0.10

0.08

0.08

0.08

0.09

0.11

0.09

0.11

0.07

0.08

0.06

8-16 AmpF


DRAFT




l STR


ABI P

RISM


Allele

FGA (continued)

47.2

48.2

50.2

51.2

43.2

44.2

45.2

46.2

Mean

320.81

325.03

329.16

333.25

337.36

341.37

348.88

352.66

S.D.

0.12

0.10

0.08

0.09

0.12

0.13

0.13

0.14

AmpF


8-17

DRAFT




l STR


ABI P

RISM


Allele

SE33

19

20

20.2

21

15

16

17

18

21.1

21.2

22.2

23.2

11

12

13

14

4.2

6.3

8

9

Mean

238.34

242.19

246.05

249.92

253.79

257.65

259.69

261.59

198.23

206.68

211.55

215.34

222.97

226.81

230.64

234.48

262.48

263.57

267.44

271.32

S.D.

0.04

0.06

0.07

0.08

0.08

0.04

0.06

0.08

0.09

0.06

0.04

0.04

0.05

0.09

0.07

0.06

0.04

0.05

0.05

0.06

8-18 AmpF


DRAFT




l STR


ABI P

RISM


Allele

SE33 (continued)

32.2

33.2

34.2

35

35.2

36

37

28.2

29.2

30.2

31.2

24.2

25.2

26.2

27.2

Mean

307.09

311.22

315.34

317.37

319.40

321.44

325.41

275.25

279.11

282.98

286.91

290.86

294.85

298.79

302.90

S.D.

0.05

0.05

0.10

0.08

0.08

0.08

0.10

0.07

0.05

0.05

0.09

0.08

0.04

0.06

0.08

AmpF


8-19

DRAFT




l STR


ABI P

RISM


Allele

TH01

8

9

9.3

10

6

7

4

5

11

13.3

Mean

162.64

166.70

170.74

174.78

178.80

182.75

185.78

186.72

190.66

201.39

S.D.

0.07

0.08

0.05

0.07

0.07

0.08

0.08

0.06

0.08

0.06

8-20 AmpF


DRAFT




l STR


ABI P

RISM

310 Genetic Analyzer vWA

Allele

19

20

21

22

23

24

15

16

17

18

11

12

13

14

Mean

186.35

190.29

194.22

198.05

201.88

206.13

153.92

158.10

162.32

166.55

170.45

174.44

178.46

182.42

S.D.

0.08

0.09

0.06

0.06

0.07

0.07

0.05

0.08

0.05

0.10

0.07

0.07

0.05

0.10

AmpF


8-21

DRAFT



Extra Peaks in the Electropherogram

Causes of Extra

Peaks

To further demonstrate reproducibility, samples have been typed using the AmpFlSTR SEfiler PCR Amplification Kit. These samples have been previously genotyped with concordant results of the same loci using other AmpFlSTR kits.

Peaks other than the target alleles may be detected on the electropherogram displays. Causes for the appearance of extra peaks include the stutter product (at the n–4 position), incomplete 3´ A nucleotide addition (at the n–1 position), artifacts and mixed DNA samples (see

“DAB Standard 8.1.2.2 Species Specificity” on page

8-34

).

Stutter Products

The PCR amplification of tetranucleotide STR loci typically produces a minor product peak four bases shorter (n–4) than the corresponding main allele peak. This is referred to as the stutter peak or product. Sequence analysis of stutter products at tetranucleotide

STR loci has revealed that the stutter product is missing a single tetranucleotide core repeat unit relative to the main allele (Walsh

et al., 1996).

The proportion of the stutter product relative to the main allele

(percent stutter) is measured by dividing the height of the stutter peak by the height of the main allele peak. Peak heights have been measured for amplified samples at the loci used in the AmpFlSTR

SEfiler kit. All data were generated on the ABI P

RISM

310 Genetic

Analyzer.

Some of the general conclusions from these measurements and observations are as follows:

• For each AmpFlSTR SEfiler kit locus, the percent stutter generally increases with allele length, as shown in

Figures 8-4

through 8-14

on

pages 8-23 through

8-28

.

• Data generated for SE33 locus are shown in Figure 8-12

.

• Refer to

Figures 8-4

through

8-14

on

pages 8-23

through 8-28

.

Smaller alleles display a lower level of stutter relative to the longer alleles within each locus.

8-22 AmpF


DRAFT


Extra Peaks in the Electropherogram

• For the alleles within a particular locus, the percent stutter is generally greater for the longer allele in a heterozygous sample.

This conclusion is related to the percent stutter increase with allele length.

• Each allele within a locus displays percent stutter that is consistent.

• The highest percent stutter observed for each allele is as follows:

D2S1338, 11.8%; D3S1358, 10.4%; D8S1179, 10.0%; D16S539,

10.4%; D18S51, 14.6%; D19S433, 11.7%; D21S11, 13.7%; FGA,

13.9%; SE33, 14.6%; TH01, 4.3%; and vWA, 11.8%.

• The highest observed percent stutter for each locus is included as the filtering step in Genotyper software. Peaks in the stutter position that are above the highest observed percent stutter will not be filtered. Peaks in the stutter position that have not been filtered and remain labeled can be further evaluated. For evaluation of mixed samples, see


.

• The percent stutter does not change significantly with the recommended quantity of input DNA, for on-scale data. The measurement of percent stutter may be unusually high for main peaks that are off-scale.

Figure 8-4 D2S1338 scatter plot

AmpF


8-23

DRAFT





8-24 AmpF


DRAFT





AmpF


8-25

DRAFT





8-26 AmpF


DRAFT



Figure 8-11 FGA scatter plot

Figure 8-12 SE33 stutter scatter plot

AmpF


8-27

DRAFT



Figure 8-13 TH01 scatter plot

Figure 8-14 vWA scatter plot

8-28 AmpF


DRAFT



Addition of 3´ A Nucleotide

AmpliTaq Gold

® enzyme, like many other DNA polymerases, can catalyze the addition of a single nucleotide (predominately adenosine) to the 3´ ends of double-stranded PCR products (Clark,

1988; Magnuson et al.,1996). This non-template addition results in a

PCR product that is one base pair longer than the actual target sequence, and the PCR product with the extra nucleotide is referred to as the “+A” form.

The efficiency of “A addition” is related to the particular sequence of the DNA at the 3´ end of the PCR product. The AmpFlSTR SEfiler kit includes two main design features that promote maximum A addition:

• The primer sequences have been optimized to encourage A addition.

• The final extension step is 60 °C for 45 min.

This final extension step gives the AmpliTaq Gold DNA Polymerase extra time to complete A addition to all double-stranded PCR product. STR systems that have not been optimized for maximum A addition may have “split peaks,” where each allele is represented by two peaks one base pair apart.

AmpF


8-29

DRAFT



Figure 8-15

shows split peaks that resulted from incomplete A nucleotide addition because of omission of the 45-minute extension step.

Figure 8-15 Split peaks; these data were generated on the

ABI P

RISM

310 Genetic Analyzer using another AmpF

l STR kit

The AmpliTaq Gold DNA Polymerase generally requires extra time to complete the A nucleotide addition at the 3´ end of the PCR products.

Lack of full A nucleotide addition may be observed in AmpFlSTR

SEfiler kit results when the amount of input DNA is greater than recommended protocols, because more time is needed for AmpliTaq

Gold DNA Polymerase to add the A nucleotide to all molecules as more PCR product is generated. Amplification of too much input

DNA may also result in off-scale data.

8-30 AmpF


DRAFT



Artifacts

Artifacts, or anomalies, have been seen in data produced on the

ABI P

RISM

® 310 Genetic Analyzer when using the AmpFlSTR

SEfiler kit. The shape of these artifacts is not consistent with the shape of labeled DNA fragments as seen on the ABI P

RISM

310

Genetic Analyzer. Artifacts may or may not be consistent.

Figure 8-16

demonstrates examples of baseline noise and artifacts in the blue, green, yellow, and red dye electropherograms while using the AmpFlSTR SEfiler kit. You should consider possible noise and artifacts when interpreting data from the AmpFlSTR SEfiler kit on the ABI P

RISM


Panel 1

Panel 2

Panel 3

Panel 4

Figure 8-16 Examples of baseline noise and artifacts

Genotyping may result in the detection of these artifacts as off-ladder alleles, or “OL Alleles?”.

Note:

The degree of magnification (y-axis) is used in this figure to illustrate these artifacts (data produced on the ABI P

RISM

310

Genetic Analyzer).

AmpF


8-31

DRAFT



Characterization of Loci

DAB Standard

8.1.2.1

Documentation

“Documentation exists and is available which defines and

characterizes the locus.” (DAB, 1998)

This section describes basic characteristics of the 11 loci that are amplified with the AmpFlSTR SEfiler kit. These loci have been previously characterized.

Nature of the

Polymorphisms

The primers for the Amelogenin locus flank a six-base pair deletion within intron 1 of the X homologue. Amplification results in 107-bp and 113-bp products from the X and Y chromosomes, respectively.

(Sizes are the actual base pair size according to sequencing results, including 3´ A nucleotide addition.) The remaining AmpFlSTR

SEfiler kit loci, except the SE33 locus, are all tetranucleotide short tandem repeat (STR) loci. The length differences among alleles of a particular locus result from differences in the number of 4-bp repeat units.

The SE33 locus is highly polymorphic. The SE33 locus not only possesses structural variation, it also exhibits length and sequence polymorphism (Möller, Schurenkamp. et al., 1995). Among the sequence polymorphisms Type I contains the known regular four bp repeat AAAG, while Type II has an additional hexanucleotide unit,

AAAAAG. These result in additional interalleles in the SE33 locus differing by 1–3 bp. (Urquhart. et al., 1993).

Some alleles in the AmpFlSTR SEfiler Allelic Ladder containing partial repeat units in population database and nonhuman primate

DNA samples have been subjected to DNA sequencing at Applied

Biosystems (Lazaruk, et al., 2001). In addition, other groups in the scientific community have sequenced alleles at some of these loci

(Nakahori et al., 1991; Puers et al., 1993; Möller et al., 1994; Barber

et al., 1995; Möller and Brinkmann, 1995; Barber et al., 1996;

Barber and Parkin, 1996; Brinkmann et al., 1998; Momhinweg et al.,

1998; Watson et al., 1998). Among the various sources of sequence data on the AmpFlSTR SEfiler kit loci, there is consensus on the repeat patterns and structure of the STRs.

8-32 AmpF


DRAFT


Characterization of Loci

Inheritance

The Centre d’Etude du Polymorphisme Humain (CEPH) has collected DNA from 39 families of Utah Mormon, French

Venezuelan, and Amish descent. These DNA sets have been extensively studied all over the world and are routinely used to characterize the mode of inheritance of various DNA loci. Each family set contains three generations, generally including four grandparents, two parents, and several offspring. Consequently, the

CEPH family DNA sets are ideal for studying inheritance patterns

(Begovich et al.,1992).

Four CEPH family DNA sets were examined. One and a half nanograms of DNA from each sample were amplified using the

AmpFlSTR SGM Plus Kit, followed by analysis using an

ABI P

RISM

®

377 DNA Sequencer. The families examined included

#1331 (11 offspring), #13291 (9 offspring), #13292 (9 offspring), and #13294 (8 offspring), representing 37 meiotic divisions. The results confirmed that the loci are inherited according to Mendelian rules, as has been reported in the literature (Nakahori et al.,1991;

Edwards et al.,1992; Kimpton et al.,1992; Mills et al.,1992; Sharma and Litt, 1992; Li et al.,1993; Straub et al.,1993).

Mapping

The AmpFlSTR kit loci Amelogenin, D2S1338, D3S1358,

D8S1179, D16S539, D18S51, D19S433, D21S11, FGA, SE33,

TH01, and vWA have been mapped and the chromosomal locations have been published (Nakahori et al., 1991; Edwards et al.,1992;

Kimpton et al.,1992; Mills et al.,1992; Sharma and Litt,1992; Li et

al.,1993; Straub et al.,1993; Barber and Parkin,1996).

AmpF


8-33

DRAFT



Species Specificity

DAB Standard

8.1.2.2 Species

Specificity

“Species specificity, sensitivity, stability and mixture studies are

conducted.” (DAB, 1998)

The AmpFlSTR SEfiler kit provides the required degree of specificity for primates. Other species do not amplify for the loci tested, with the exception of the Amelogenin locus.

Nonhuman Studies

Nonhuman DNA may be present in forensic casework samples. The

AmpFlSTR SEfiler kit provides the required degree of specificity for the species tested (with the exception of the Amelogenin locus).The following experiments were conducted to investigate interpretation of

AmpFlSTR SEfiler kit results from nonhuman DNA sources.

Chimp

Horse

Pig

Dog

E. coli

Negative

Control

Figure 8-17 Representative electropherograms of a primate, nonprimates, a microorganism, and a negative control

All samples were analyzed on an ABI P

RISM


The peaks depicted in orange are the GeneScan-500 LIZ size standard.

The extracted DNA samples were amplified in AmpFlSTR SEfiler kit reactions and analyzed using the ABI P

RISM

310 Genetic

Analyzer.

8-34 AmpF


DRAFT


Species Specificity

• Primates: gorilla, chimpanzee, orangutan, and macaque (1.0 ng each)

• Non primates: mouse, dog, pig, cat, horse, chicken and cow

(2.5 ng each)

• Bacteria and yeast: Brochothrix, Escherichia, Neisseria,

Pseudomonas, Bacillus, Staphylococcus (approximately 5 ng each), and Saccharomyces (1 ng)

The primate DNA samples all amplified, producing fragments within the 100–400 base pair region (Lazaruk, et al., 2001; Wallin et

al.,1998).

The microorganisms, chicken, cow, cat, and mouse did not yield detectable product. Horse, pig, and dog produced a 103-bp fragment near the Amelogenin locus in VIC ® dye. This fragment is visible on both horse and pig in


.

AmpF


8-35

DRAFT



Sensitivity

DAB Standard

8.1.2.2 Sensitivity



Importance of

Quantitation

The amount of input DNA added to the AmpFlSTR SEfiler PCR

Amplification Kit should be between 1.0 and 2.5 ng. The DNA sample should be quantitated prior to amplification using a system such as the QuantiBlot

®

Human DNA Quantitation Kit

(P/N N808-0114). Refer to

Appendix D, “DNA Quantification.”

The final DNA concentration should be in the range of 0.05–0.125 ng/

μL so that 1.0–2.5 ng of DNA will be added to the PCR reaction in a volume of 20

μL. If the sample contains degraded DNA, amplification of additional DNA may be beneficial.

Effect of DNA

Quantity on

Results

If too much DNA is added to the PCR reaction, the increased amount of PCR product that is generated can result in the following:

• Fluorescence intensity that exceeds the linear dynamic range for detection by the instrument (“off-scale” data)

Off-scale data is a problem for two reasons:

– Quantitation (peak height and area) for off-scale peaks is not accurate. For example, an allele peak that is off-scale can cause the corresponding stutter peak to appear higher in relative intensity, thus increasing the calculated percent stutter.

– Multicomponent analysis of off-scale data is not accurate. This inaccuracy results in poor spectral separation (“pull-up”).

• Incomplete A nucleotide addition

The sample can be re-amplified using less DNA.

When the total number of allele copies added to the PCR is extremely low, unbalanced amplification of the two alleles of a heterozygous individual may occur (Walsh et al.,1992; Wallin et al.,1998) due to stochastic fluctuation in the ratio of the two different alleles

(Sensabaugh et al.,1991). The PCR cycle number and amplification conditions have been specified to produce low peak heights for a sample containing 20-pg human genomic DNA. Low peak heights should be interpreted with caution.

8-36 AmpF


DRAFT


Sensitivity

Individual laboratories may find it useful to determine an appropriate minimum peak height threshold based on their own results and instruments using low amounts of input DNA.

Figure 8-18 Effect of amplifying amounts of DNA ranging from

125 pg to 2 ng

Note that the y-axis scale is magnified for the lower amounts of

DNA, analyzed using the ABI P

RISM


AmpF


8-37

DRAFT



Stability

DAB Standard

8.1.2.2 Stability



Lack of

Amplification of

Some Loci

As with any multi-locus system, the possibility exists that not every locus will amplify. This is most often observed when the DNA sample contains PCR inhibitors or when the DNA sample has been severely degraded. Since each locus is an independent marker whose results are not based upon information provided by the other markers, results generally can still be obtained from the loci that do amplify.

Differential and

Preferential

Amplification

Differential amplification can be defined as the difference in the degree of amplification of each locus within a co-amplified system, such that one or more loci may amplify to a greater extent compared to the other loci. Preferential amplification is used in this manual to describe differences in the amplification efficiency of two alleles at a single locus.

Preferential amplification of alleles in systems that distinguish alleles based on length polymorphisms is most likely to be observed when the alleles differ significantly in base pair size. Since most

AmpFlSTR SEfiler kit loci have small size ranges, the potential for preferential amplification of alleles is low.

Degraded DNA

As the average size of degraded DNA approaches the size of the target sequence, the amount of PCR product generated is reduced.

This is due to the reduced number of intact templates in the size range necessary for amplification.

Degraded DNA was prepared to examine the potential for differential amplification of loci. High molecular weight DNA was incubated with the enzyme DNase I for varying amounts of time. The DNA was examined by agarose gel analysis to determine the average size of the

DNA fragments at each time point.

8-38 AmpF


DRAFT


Stability

Four nanograms of degraded DNA (or 1 ng undegraded DNA) were amplified using the AmpFlSTR SEfiler kit. As the DNA became increasingly degraded, the loci became undetectable according to size. Preferential amplification was not observed. The loci failed to robustly amplify in the order of decreasing size as the extent of degradation progressed.

Figure 8-19 Multiplex amplifications of a DNA sample in the absence of DNase I and the sample incubated for 30 sec, 4 min, and 8 min with DNase I, analyzed using the ABI P

RISM

310 Genetic

Analyzer

AmpF


8-39

DRAFT



Mixture Studies

DAB Standard

8.1.2.2 Mixture

Studies



Evidence samples may contain DNA from more than one individual.

The possibility of multiple contributors should be considered when interpreting the results. We recommend that individual laboratories assign a minimum peak height threshold based on validation experiments performed in each laboratory to avoid typing when stochastic effects are likely to interfere with accurate interpretation of mixtures.

Mixed Specimen

Studies

Evidence samples that contain body fluids and/or tissues originating from more than one individual are an integral component of forensic casework. Therefore, it is essential to ensure that the DNA typing system is able to detect DNA mixtures. In the case of STRs, stutter peaks may be informative in the interpretation of mixed samples.

Furthermore, alleles amplified with the AmpFlSTR SEfiler kit have similar peak height values for a heterozygous genotype within a locus. This balance can be used as an aid in detecting and interpreting mixtures.

Detection of Mixed Samples

Each of the following can aid in determining whether a sample is a mixture:

• The presence of greater than two alleles at a locus

• The presence of a peak at a stutter position that is significantly greater in percentage than what is typically observed in a single-source sample

• Significantly imbalanced alleles for a heterozygous genotype

The peak height ratio is defined as the height of the lower peak (in

RFU) divided by the height of the higher peak (in RFU), expressed as a percentage. Mean, median, minimum, and maximum peak height ratios observed for alleles in the AmpFlSTR SEfiler kit loci in unmixed population database samples are shown in

Table 8-2

.

8-40 AmpF


DRAFT


Mixture Studies

Table 8-2 Peak height ratios

Locus

D2S1338

D3S1358

D8S1179

D16S539

D18S51

D19S433

D21S11

FGA

SE33

TH01 vWA

Number of

Observations

(n)

Mean a

Median a

Minimum a

112

83

102

92

102

118

104

130

103

91

105

94

89

94

93

92

97

95

91

86

96

94

91

89

93

92

92

95

95

91

86

95

93

68.4

75.2

77.2

72.9

74.4

71.3

71.4

62.4

60.6

75.9

73.9

Maximum a

99.2

100

100

99.8

99

100

99.9

100

99.8

99.9

99.7

a

Peak height ratios were determined for those heterozygous samples with peak heights > 200 RFU

.

For all 12 loci, the mean peak height ratios indicate that the two alleles of a heterozygous individual are generally very well balanced.

If an unusually low peak height ratio is observed for one locus, and there are no other indications that the sample is a mixture, the sample may be reamplified and reanalyzed to determine if the imbalance is reproducible. Possible causes of imbalance at a locus are degraded

DNA, presence of inhibitors, extremely low amounts of input DNA, or the presence of an allele containing a rare sequence that does not amplify as efficiently as the other allele.

AmpF


8-41

DRAFT



Resolution of Genotypes in Mixed Samples

A sample containing DNA from two sources can be comprised (at a single locus) of any of the seven genotype combinations listed below.

• Heterozygote + heterozygote, no overlapping alleles (four peaks)

• Heterozygote + heterozygote, one overlapping allele (three peaks)

• Heterozygote + heterozygote, two overlapping alleles (two peaks)

• Heterozygote + homozygote, no overlapping alleles (three peaks)

• Heterozygote + homozygote, overlapping allele (two peaks)

• Homozygote + homozygote, no overlapping alleles (two peaks)

• Homozygote + homozygote, overlapping allele (one peak)

Specific genotype combinations and input DNA ratios of the samples contained in a mixture determine whether it is possible to resolve the genotypes of the major and minor component(s) at a single locus.

The ability to obtain and compare quantitative values for the different allele peak heights on Applied Biosystems instruments provides additional valuable data to aid in resolving mixed genotypes. This quantitative value is much less subjective than comparing relative intensities of bands on a stained gel.

Ultimately, the likelihood that any sample is a mixture must be determined by the analyst in the context of each particular case, including the information provided from known reference sample(s).

Limit of Detection of the Minor Component

Mixtures of two DNA samples were examined at various ratios (1:1 to 1:10). The total amount of genomic input DNA mixed at each ratio was 1 ng.

The samples were amplified in a GeneAmp

®

PCR System 9700 and were electrophoresed and detected using an ABI P

RISM

310 Genetic

Analyzer.

8-42 AmpF


DRAFT


Mixture Studies

Amelogenin

D2S1338

D3S1358

D8S1179

D16S539

D18S51

D19S433

D21S11

FGA

SE33

TH01 vWA

The results of the mixed DNA samples are shown in Figure 8-20 on page 8-44

, where sample A and sample B were mixed according to the ratios provided.

Table 8-3

shows profiles of samples in

Figure

8-20 on page 8-44

.

Table 8-3 Profiles of Samples

Profile

Allele

Sample A

X, Y

20, 23

15,16

12,13

9, 10

12, 15

14,15

28, 31

24, 26

17, 25.2

7, 9.3

14,16

Sample B

X

17, 25

15, 18

13

11, 12

17, 19

13

30, 30.2

23.2, 24

27.2, 29.2

7, 9

17, 19

AmpF


8-43

DRAFT


Panel 1

2

3

4

5

6

7


For these 1-ng total DNA mixture studies, the limit of detection is when the minor component is present at approximately one-tenth of the concentration of the major component and a threshold of 50 RFU.

The limit of detection for the minor component is influenced by the combination of genotypes in the mixture.

Sample A

10:1

3:1

1:1

1:3

1:10

Sample B

Figure 8-20 Results of the two DNA samples mixed together at defined ratios and amplified with the AmpF

lSTR SEfiler PCR

Amplification Kit

Sample A and Sample B are a female and male sample, respectively.

The ratios of Sample A to Sample B (A:B ratios) shown are 10:1, 3:1,

1:1, 1:3, and 1:10, respectively. The alleles attributable to the minor component, even when the major component shares an allele, are highlighted in panels 2, 3, 5, and 6. All alleles are highlighted in panel 4.

8-44 AmpF


DRAFT


Data Interpretation

Data Interpretation

Minimum Sample

Requirement

The AmpFlSTR SEfiler PCR Amplification Kit has been optimized to amplify and type approximately 1.0–2.5 ng of sample DNA reliably.

The PCR cycle number and amplification conditions have been specified to produce low peak heights for a sample containing 20 pg human genomic DNA. Thus, the overall sensitivity of the assay has been adjusted to avoid or minimize stochastic effects. Applied

Biosystems has successfully typed samples containing less than

0.5 ng DNA.

Note:

Individual laboratories may find it useful to determine an appropriate minimum peak height threshold based on their own results/instruments using low amounts of input DNA.

AmpF


8-45

DRAFT



Population Data

8.1.2.3

Population Data

“Population distribution data are documented and available.” (DAB,

1998)

Overview

To interpret the significance of a match between genetically typed samples, it is necessary to know the population distribution of alleles at each locus in question. If the genotype of the relevant evidence sample is different from the genotype of the suspects’s reference sample, then the suspect is “excluded” as the donor of the biological evidence tested. An exclusion is independent of the frequency of the two genotypes in the population.

If the suspect and evidence samples have the same genotype, then the suspect is “included” as a possible source of the evidence sample.

The probability that another, unrelated, individual would also match the evidence sample is estimated by the frequency of that genotype in the relevant population(s).

Population

Samples Used in

These Studies

The AmpFlSTR SEfiler PCR Amplification Kit was used to generate the population data provided in this section. Samples were collected from individuals throughout the United States with no geographical preference.

African-American

104 samples were provided.

U.S. Caucasian

69 samples were provided.

8-46 AmpF


DRAFT


Population Data

AmpF

l STR

SEfiler Kit Allele

Frequencies

Table 8-4

shows the AmpFlSTR SEfiler kit allele frequencies in two populations, listed as percentages.

Table 8-4 AmpF

lSTR SEfiler kit allele frequencies

Allele

African American

(n = 104)

U.S. Caucasian

(n = 69)

D3S1358

15

15.2

16

17

12

13

14

18

19

*

*

12.98

25.96

*

33.65

20.19

7.21

*

*

*

11.59

28.99

*

19.57

21.74

18.12

*

AmpF


8-47

DRAFT



Table 8-4 AmpF

lSTR SEfiler kit allele frequencies (continued)

Allele


(n = 104)

U.S. Caucasian

(n = 69) vWA

19

20

21

22

23

24

15

16

17

18

11

12

13

14

7.21

3.37

0.96

*

*

*

24.52

23.56

21.63

11.54

1.92

*

0.96

4.33

11.59

1.45

*

*

*

*

15.94

12.32

26.81

22.46

*

*

*

9.42

8-48 AmpF


DRAFT


Population Data

Table 8-4 AmpF


Allele


(n = 104)

U.S. Caucasian

(n = 69)

D16S539

11

12

13

14

15

9

10

5

8

*

1.92

19.23

14.90

29.33

16.35

14.90

3.37

*

*

1.45

13.77

6.52

29.71

28.99

17.39

2.17

*

AmpF


8-49

DRAFT



Table 8-4 AmpF


Allele


(n = 104)

U.S. Caucasian

(n = 69)

D2S1338

23

24

25

26

27

28

19

20

21

22

15

16

17

18

10.58

7.69

4.81

2.88

*

*

*

6.25

10.10

8.65

13.46

11.06

9.62

14.90

10.14

15.22

7.97

2.17

*

*

0.72

6.52

20.29

8.70

15.22

7.97

2.17

2.90

8-50 AmpF


DRAFT


Population Data

Table 8-4 AmpF


Allele


(n = 104)

U.S. Caucasian

(n = 69)

D8S1179

12

13

14

15

10

11

8

9

16

17

18

19

19.71

22.60

30.29

14.42

*

0.48

2.88

4.81

3.85

0.96

*

*

12.32

31.88

19.57

11.59

2.90

1.45

7.25

9.42

2.17

1.45

*

*

AmpF


8-51

DRAFT



Table 8-4 AmpF


SE33

Allele


(n = 104)

U.S. Caucasian

(n = 69)

*

14.2

15

15.2

16

12.2

13

13.2

14

16.2

17

17.2

18

19

9.2

11

11.2

12

4.2

6.3

8

9

0.96

4.81

0.00

6.25

0.96

1.92

0.48

2.88

0.48

8.17

*

11.54

8.17

0.48

0.48

0.48

0.48

*

*

*

*

*

3.62

*

5.07

*

2.90

*

3.62

*

10.14

*

7.25

7.97

*

*

*

2.17

*

*

*

*

8-52 AmpF


DRAFT


Population Data

Table 8-4 AmpF


Allele


(n = 104)

U.S. Caucasian

(n = 69)

SE33 (continued)

27.2

28.2

29.2

30.2

23.2

24.2

25.2

26.2

31.2

32.2

33.2

34.2

35

21.2

22

22.2

23

20

20.2

21

21.1

11.54

4.33

4.33

2.88

0.96

0.48

3.37

5.77

1.44

*

*

*

*

0.48

0.48

0.96

0.48

8.65

0.96

4.33

*

7.97

9.42

4.35

6.52

3.62

*

5.07

4.35

2.17

0.72

*

*

*

0.72

*

4.35

*

2.90

*

5.07

*

AmpF


8-53

DRAFT



Table 8-4 AmpF


Allele


(n = 104)

U.S. Caucasian

(n = 69)

SE33 (continued)

D19S433

35.2

36

37

16

16.2

17

17.2

14

14.2

15

15.2

12

12.2

13

13.2

9

10

11

11.2

0.96

2.88

*

0.48

21.15

4.81

7.69

3.85

15.87

2.40

25.96

7.21

0.48

1.44

4.33

0.48

*

*

*

*

*

*

5.07

1.45

0.72

*

39.13

*

15.94

3.62

3.62

*

27.54

1.45

*

*

1.45

*

8-54 AmpF


DRAFT


Population Data

Table 8-4 AmpF


Allele


(n = 104)

U.S. Caucasian

(n = 69)

TH01

8

9

9.3

10

6

7

4

5

11

13.3

*

0.96

12.98

37.98

19.71

15.87

11.54

0.96

*

*

*

*

23.19

22.46

9.42

10.87

33.33

0.72

*

*

AmpF


8-55

DRAFT



Table 8-4 AmpF


Allele


(n = 104)

U.S. Caucasian

(n = 69)

FGA

26

26.2

27

28

23

23.2

24

25

29

30

30.2

31.2

32.2

19.2

20

21

22

17

18

18.2

19

5.29

*

5.29

1.44

16.35

*

15.87

11.54

0.48

0.48

*

*

*

0.48

5.29

12.02

16.83

*

0.96

0.96

6.25

4.35

*

0.72

*

13.77

1.45

18.12

7.25

*

*

*

*

*

*

12.32

17.39

15.22

*

3.62

0.72

5.07

8-56 AmpF


DRAFT


Population Data

Table 8-4 AmpF


Allele


(n = 104)

U.S. Caucasian

(n = 69)

FGA (continued)

45.2

46.2

47.2

48.2

33.2

42.2

43.2

44.2

50.2

51.2

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

0.48

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

AmpF


8-57

DRAFT



Table 8-4 AmpF


Allele


(n = 104)

U.S. Caucasian

(n = 69)

D21S11

32.2

33

33.2

34

30.2

31

31.2

32

34.2

35

35.2

36

27

28

29

30

24

24.2

25

26

5.29

*

2.40

*

1.92

11.06

3.37

0.96

0.48

4.81

*

2.88

4.81

25.48

14.42

22.12

*

*

*

*

7.97

*

3.62

*

2.17

7.25

7.97

3.62

*

*

*

*

2.17

15.94

26.09

23.19

*

*

*

*

8-58 AmpF


DRAFT


Population Data

Table 8-4 AmpF


Allele


(n = 104)

U.S. Caucasian

(n = 69)

D21S11 (continued)

37

38

*

*

*

*

AmpF


8-59

DRAFT



Table 8-4 AmpF


Allele


(n = 104)

U.S. Caucasian

(n = 69)

D18S51

19

20

21

22

15

16

17

18

23

24

25

26

27

11

12

13

14

7

9

10

10.2

21.15

16.35

15.87

11.54

10.58

2.88

*

0.48

*

*

*

*

*

*

8.17

4.33

8.65

*

*

*

*

2.90

*

1.45

*

15.94

13.77

9.42

7.25

*

*

*

*

*

1.45

17.39

18.12

11.59

*

*

0.72

*

8-60 AmpF


DRAFT


Mutation Rate

Mutation Rate

Estimating

Germline

Mutations

Estimation of spontaneous or induced germline mutation at genetic loci may be achieved through comparison of the genotypes of offspring to those of their parents. From such comparisons, the number of observed mutations are counted directly.

In previous studies, genotypes of the10 STR loci amplified by the

AmpFl STR SGM Plus PCR Amplification Kit were determined for a total of 146 parent-offspring allelic transfers (meioses) at the

Forensic Science Service, Birmingham, England. One length-based

STR mutation was observed at the D18S11 locus; mutation was not detected at any of the other nine STR loci. The D18S11 mutation was represented by an increase of one 4-bp repeat unit, a 17 allele was inherited as an 18 (single-step mutation). The maternal/paternal source of this mutation could not be distinguished.

Additional

Mutation Studies

Additional studies (Edwards et al., 1991; Edwards et al., 1992;

Weber and Wong, 1993; Hammond et al., 1994; Brinkmann et al.,

1995; Chakraborty et al., 1996; Chakraborty et al., 1997; Brinkmann

et al., 1998; Momhinweg et al., 1998; Szibor et al., 1998) of direct mutation rate counts produced:

• Larger sample sizes for some of the AmpFlSTR SEfiler kit loci.

• Methods for modifications of these mutation rates (to infer mutation rates indirectly for those loci where these rates are not large enough to be measured directly and/or to account for those events undetectable as Mendelian errors).

AmpF


8-61

DRAFT



Probability of Identity

Table of

Probability of

Identity

Table 8-5 shows the Probability of Identity (P

I

) values of the

AmpFlSTR SEfiler kit loci individually and combined.

Table 8-5 Probability of Identity values for the AmpF

l STR SEfiler

kit STR loci

Locus

D2S1338


0.025

U.S. Caucasian

0.038

D3S1358

D8S1179

0.114

0.079

0.099

0.072

D16S539

D18S51

0.074

0.038

0.085

0.056

D19S433

D21S11

0.045

0.051

0.126

0.057

FGA

SE33

0.034

0.019

0.044

0.02

TH01 vWA

Combined

0.103

0.067

6.47 x 10

-15

0.119

0.077

7.46 x 10

-14

The P

I

value is the probability that two individuals selected at random will have an identical AmpFlSTR SEfiler kit genotype (Sensabaugh,

1982). The P

I

values for the populations described in this section are then approximately 1/1.54 x 10 14 (African-American), and 1/1.34 x

10 13 (U.S. Caucasian).

8-62 AmpF


DRAFT


Probability of Paternity Exclusion

Probability of Paternity Exclusion

Table of

Probability of

Paternity

Exclusion

Table 8-6 shows the Probability of Paternity Exclusion (P

E

) values of the AmpFlSTR SEfiler kit STR loci individually and combined.

Table 8-6 Probability of paternity exclusion for the AmpF

lSTR

SEfiler kit STR loci

Locus

D2S1338


0.745

U.S. Caucasian

0.621

D3S1358

D8S1179

0.734

0.477

0.65

0.763

D16S539

D18S51

0.67

0.725

0.42

0.912

D19S433

D21S11

0.632

0.745

0.516

0.734

FGA

SE33

0.784

0.745

0.676

0.792

TH01 vWA

0.578

0.613

0.734

0.705

Combined

0.999997

0.999998

The P

E

value is the probability, averaged over all possible mother-child pairs, that a random alleged father will be excluded from paternity after DNA typing of the AmpFlSTR SEfiler kit STR loci (Chakraborty and Stivers, 1996).

AmpF


8-63

DRAFT



8-64 AmpF


DRAFT


Genotyping Using

Windows NT OS

9

9

In This Chapter

This chapter describes the use of ABI P

RISM

®

Genotyper

®

Software v3.7 in conjunction with the AmpFlSTR genotype samples.

®

SEfiler™ Kit Template and the Microsoft

®

Windows NT

®

operating system to automatically

Using Genotyper Software for Automated Genotyping . . . . . . . . .9-2

Understanding the AmpF l

STR SEfiler Kit Template . . . . . . . . . .9-10

Determining Genotypes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-18

AmpF


9-1

DRAFT

March 22, 2012 1:12 pm, 9_Autogenotyping_NT.fm

Chapter 9 Genotyping Using Windows NT OS

Using Genotyper Software for Automated

Genotyping

About the

Software

Genotyper ® software is used to convert allele sizes obtained from

ABI P

RISM

® GeneScan ® Analysis Software into allele designations automatically, and to build tables containing the genotype information. Genotypes are assigned by comparing the sizes obtained for the unknown sample alleles with the sizes obtained for the alleles in the allelic ladder.

A Genotyper software template file that contains macros specifically written for use with the AmpFlSTR

®

SEfiler

™

PCR Amplification

Kit is provided with this manual. Use this template with the

AmpFlSTR SEfiler kit data. Install the template onto your computer following the instructions in the “READ_ME” file.

Note:

You must have Genotyper Software v3.7 or higher and

Windows NT 4.0 with Service Pack 4 or 5 operating system to run the AmpFlSTR SEfiler Kit Template. Refer to the ABI P

RISM

®

Genotyper ®

3.7 NT Software User’s Manual (P/N #4309947C) and

ABI P

RISM

®

Genotyper

®

3.7 NT Software Applications Tutorials (P/N

#4309961C) for more detailed information about the Genotyper software. The Human Identification Tutorial and HID template file included with the Genotyper Software v3.7 package are for tutorial purposes only.

Before Running

Genotyper

Software

GeneScan Analysis Software sample data (particularly the allelic ladder) must meet a few specific requirements before you can use the macros in the AmpFlSTR SEfiler Kit Template. These requirements are described in this section.

Sample Info Column

All samples must have a unique sample description in the Sample

Info column of the GeneScan software sample sheet so that the macros in the AmpFlSTR SEfiler Kit Template can build a table.

Samples with an empty Sample Info column will not be incorporated into the table of genotypes. Also, lanes or injections that contain the

AmpFlSTR SEfiler Allelic Ladder must have the word “ladder” in the Sample Info column. The first lane or injection of ladder is the one used by the Kazam macro in the AmpFlSTR SEfiler Kit

Template to determine the sizes in the allele categories that will be used for genotyping.

9-2 AmpF


DRAFT


Using Genotyper Software for Automated Genotyping

It is possible to skip the first lane or injection of allelic ladder and use the second lane or injection of allelic ladder for genotyping instead.

After importing the sample files, but before running the Kazam macro, remove the word “ladder” from the Sample Info column in all four sample dye colors for the first lane or injection of allelic ladder in the Dye/lanes window. Make sure that the word “ladder” is entered for Sample Info in the second lane or injection of allelic ladder. See

step 4 on page 9-4 for a description of how to access the Sample Info

column in the Dye/lanes window.

GeneScan Analysis Software Peak Recognition

All allele peaks in the allelic ladder for each locus must be

“recognized” (labeled) in the GeneScan Analysis Software (i.e., each allele peak must have an entry in the GeneScan table). Thus, all allele peaks in each allelic ladder must have a peak height value in relative fluorescence units (RFU) greater than the Peak Amplitude Threshold

(PAT) specified in the GeneScan software Analysis Parameters. Also, all allele peaks in each allelic ladder must be resolved. For example, the FGA 26, 26.2, and 27 alleles must be resolved so that each peak has an entry in the GeneScan software table.

Sample allele peak heights must also be greater than the GeneScan

Software PAT in order to be recognized (labeled) by Genotyper software. Note that the PAT value specified in the GeneScan software

Analysis Parameters is not necessarily the same as the RFU value that may be used by the forensic analyst as the “interpretational threshold.” The “Low Signal” column of the appropriate Genotyper

software table (see page 9-8 ) can be used to identify peaks that are

greater than the GeneScan software PAT, but less than a specified minimum threshold (default 150 RFU in the table macro).

AmpF

l STR

SEfiler Kit

Template

The AmpFlSTR SEfiler Kit Template contains macros that perform the following steps automatically:

• Finds the lane or injection containing the allelic ladder

• Creates allele size categories that are centered on the sizes obtained for the allelic ladder alleles

• Assigns the appropriate allele label to sample alleles that size within the allele size categories

• Removes labels from stutter peaks by applying a filter

• Builds a table containing genotypes for all samples

AmpF


9-3

DRAFT



Using the

AmpF

l STR

SEfiler Kit

Template File

Use the following procedure to assign genotypes to AmpFlSTR

SEfiler kit alleles automatically.

To use the AmpF

lSTR SEfiler Kit Template:

1. Double-click the SEfiler icon to launch the Genotyper software application and open the template file simultaneously.

Note:

The AmpFlSTR SEfiler Kit Template is a read-only file, which means that a new file must be saved as a different name to ensure that the original template file is not overwritten.

2. Set preferences to import raw data, and Blue, Green, Yellow,

Red, and Orange data.

3. To import the GeneScan sample files: a. Select File > Import GeneScan File(s).

b. Select the project file and click Import.

4. If each sample does not already have Sample Info completed in the sample sheet: a. Select Views > Show Dye/lanes.

b. Click the first sample row to select it.

c. Click the Sample Info box at the top of the window and type the sample designation or description.

d. Repeat steps b and c to enter a sample description for every dye/lane in the list. Enter the same sample description for all dye colors of a single sample.

5. From the Macro list at the bottom left of the Main window, select Check GS500.

6. Select Macro > Run Macro.

In the plot window that opens, scroll through each sample to verify that each GeneScan-500 peak (from 75–450 bp) was assigned the correct size in the GeneScan Analysis Software.

7. From the Macro list at the bottom left of the Main window, select Kazam.

9-4 AmpF


DRAFT



To use the AmpF

lSTR SEfiler Kit Template: (continued)

8. Select Macro > Run Macro.

This macro may take a few minutes to run. When it is finished, a plot window opens with the blue allelic ladder

(D3S1358, vWA, D16S539, and D2S133) and sample allele peaks labeled.

9. Examine data and edit peaks.

10. Print the electropherograms in the plot window by selecting

File > Print.

11. a. In the Main Window, click the green G button at the top left.

b. Select Views > Show Plot Window. c. Repeat steps 8 and 9.

12. a. In the Main Window, click the yellow Y button at the top left.

b. Select Views > Show Plot Window.

c. Repeat steps 8 and 9.

13. a. In the Main Window, click the red R button at the top left.



AmpF


9-5

DRAFT



Examining Data

Check that the peaks in the allelic ladder are labeled correctly. Scroll through the samples below the allelic ladder to examine the peak labels in each electropherogram.

Peak Labeling

• Allele categories (which appear as dark gray bars in the Plot window) are defined to be ±0.5 bp wide. Peaks that size within

±0.5 bp of an allele category has a label indicating the allele designation.

Note:

The categories for TH01 alleles 9.3 and 10 are ± 0.4 bp wide.

• Peaks that do not size within an allele category will have a label indicating “OL Allele?” (off-ladder allele).

• The Kazam macro includes a step that removes labels from stutter peaks by applying a percentage filter. Labels are removed from peaks that are followed by a (specified percent difference) higher, labeled peak within 3.25 to 4.75 bp.

The specified filter percentages for these loci are 809% for TH01,

809% for D3S1358, 809% for vWA, 809% for FGA, 733% for

D8S1179, 669% for D16S539, 669% for D21S11, 567% for

D2S1338, 488% for D19S433, 525% for D18S51, and 488% for

SE33.

Note:

The label “OVLR” refers to the overlap region between rare

TH01 and rare FGA alleles. The reported rare alleles that may be observed in the OVLR region are as follows: TH01 13.3 (204 bp),

TH01 14 (205 bp), FGA 12.2 (197 bp), and FGA 13 (199 bp). The peak labels for any alleles that are detected in this overlap region size range will include the OVLR designation (including the TH01 13.3 allele in the AmpFl STR SGM Plus Allelic Ladder.

• A sample allele peak must have been recognized by GeneScan software before it can be recognized by Genotyper software. Thus, sample allele peaks that are below the PAT that was specified in the GeneScan software Analysis Parameters cannot be labeled by

Genotyper software.

Also, because no information is imported for peaks that are not recognized by GeneScan software, such peaks will not align exactly by size relative to the x-axis size scale in the Genotyper software plot window.

9-6 AmpF


DRAFT



Peak Editing

Clicking a labeled peak removes the label. Clicking the same peak again defaults to the placement of bp size of that peak. A dialog box with a field to enter the requested text may be accessed by selecting the Analysis > Set Click Options. Type the allele designation and/or desired text, then click OK.

Plot Window Viewing Options

To zoom in and out on regions of the plot window:

1. In the Plot window, click and drag in a region of an electropherogram to draw a box around the desired size range (the vertical size of the box is not important).

2. Type Ctrl+R (hold down the Ctrl key and type the letter R) to zoom in.

3. Type Ctrl+H to zoom out completely.

To view electropherograms from more than one dye color in the

Plot window:

1. Select Views > Show Dye/Lanes Window.

2. Click the desired Dye/lane rows.

Note:

Hold down the Shift key on the keyboard to select multiple adjacent Dye/lane rows. Hold down the Ctrl key to select Dye/lane rows that are not adjacent.

3. Select Views > Show Plot Window.

AmpF


9-7

DRAFT



Making Tables

Three macros for making tables are included in the AmpFlSTR

SEfiler Kit Template. They are:

• Make Allele Table

• 310: Make Table

• 377: Make Table

The Make Allele Table macro contains only Sample Info and genotype data. The other table, 310: Make Table contains additional information.

All four of the tables have two features in common:

• A locus that has no labeled peaks has zeros in the cells of the table for that locus.

• Loci that have homozygous alleles have the allele designation indicated twice in the table.

Make Allele Table

This table has Sample Info in the first column, and allele designations for each locus in columns 2–23. The first two labeled peaks within each locus appear in the table.

310: Make Table

This table can be used if the data was generated on the

ABI P

RISM

310 Genetic Analyzer. This table has Sample Info in the first column, Sample Comment in the second column, locus name in the third column, and allele designations in columns 4–7. Four columns are provided for allele designations to accommodate mixed samples. The first four labeled peaks within each locus appear in the table. The remaining five table columns are as follows:

• Overflow: If more than two peaks are labeled at one locus, the text

“> two labels” appears in this column.

• Low Signal: If the height of any peak at a locus is greater than the

PAT specified in the GeneScan Analysis Parameters but less than

150 RFU, the text “< 150 RFU” appears in this column.

• Saturation: If the raw data signal for any peak at a locus is greater than 8191 RFU, the text “310: off-scale” appears in this column.

9-8 AmpF


DRAFT



• Edited Label: The text “Edited” appears in this column for any loci where the peak labels were edited manually. For example, clicking an unlabeled peak in the Plot window to add a label constitutes an edit.

• Edited Row: The text “Edited” appears in this column for any rows in the table that contain table cells that have been edited after initial creation of the table.

377: Make Table


ABI P

RISM

® 377 instrument. This table is the same as 310: Make

Table, except the Saturation warning, “377: off-scale likely,” will appear for raw data signals greater than 5000 RFU.

IMPORTANT!

Before making a table, examine all electropherograms and edit their peaks as described in the previous section.

To create and use tables:

1. From the Macro list at the bottom of the Genotyper software

Main Window, click one of the three table macros.


3. Select Views > Show Table Window to view the table in full screen mode.

4. Open and view the plot:

Note:

For all tables except the Make Allele Table, clicking in a cell of the table causes the corresponding sample electropherogram to appear in the plot window:

• Click any cell in the table to display the locus region of the corresponding electropherogram in the Plot window for that sample.

• Zoom out (

Ctrl+H

) to view all loci for a particular dye color for the corresponding sample.

5. To edit the cells of the table: a. Click a cell of the table that contains an allele designation.

b. Select Edit > Edit Cell. c. Type the desired information in the box and click OK.

AmpF


9-9

DRAFT



To create and use tables: (continued)

6. Print the table by selecting File > Print.

7. This step is optional.

Select Table > Export to File to save the table as a file that can be opened in Microsoft Excel.

8. Select File > Save to save the template file with data.

Understanding the AmpF

lSTR SEfiler Kit Template

Troubleshooting

Automated

Genotyping

To Troubleshoot Automated Genotyping:

Observation Probable Cause Recommended Action

Warning message:

“Could not complete ‘Run

Macro’ command because no dye/lanes are selected.”

Warning message:


Macro’ command because the labeled peak could not be found.”

The word

“ladder” is not in

Sample Info for the lane or injection of allelic ladder.

Type the word ladder in the

Sample Info column for each dye color (Blue, Green, Yellow, and Red) for the AmpF l STR

SEfiler Allelic Ladder sample.

One or more peaks in the allelic ladder are below the Peak

Amplitude

Threshold that was specified in the GeneScan software Analysis

Parameters.

Use another allelic ladder in the project, or

1. In the GeneScan Analysis

Software, lower the Peak

Amplitude Threshold values for Blue, Green, Yellow, and

Red dye colors in the

Analysis Parameters.

2. Reanalyze the sample file(s) containing the allelic ladder.

3. Import all sample files into a new Genotyper software project, and run the Kazam macro again.

9-10 AmpF


DRAFT


Understanding the AmpF

l

STR SEfiler Kit Template

About This Kit

Template

This section describes the organization and functionality of the

AmpFlSTR SEfiler Kit Template. Read this section for a greater understanding of the macros and steps that are used in the

AmpFlSTR SEfiler Kit Template.

Categories

In the Genotyper software, each allele is defined by a category. Each category contains information about the allele size, size range, and dye color. To view the list of categories in the AmpFlSTR SEfiler

Template, select View > Show Categories. The categories for each locus are listed together under the locus name. The locus is called a group.

In the Categories window, each locus actually has two sets of categories. For example, the D3S1358 locus has one list of categories under the group “D3S1358” and another list of categories under the group “D3S1358.os.” The categories in the D3S1358 group are allele categories and are used for allele assignment.

Offset Categories

The offset values are determined automatically by the Calculate

[locus] Offsets macros. These macros use the offset categories

(categories with an “.os” suffix) to find the allele peaks in the allelic ladder and to determine the correct offset values for each allele category.

Finding and Recognizing the Leftmost (first) Allele Peak in Each

Allelic Ladder

• Identification of the leftmost peak is accomplished through the specifications of the first “.os” category listed within each group of offset categories. This first “.os” category (12.os in the case of

D3S1358) is specified to find all peaks in a range of ±7 bp around the reference size for the indicated allele.

• Each Calculate [locus] Offsets macro applies a percentage filter to all peaks in the ±7-bp range in the allelic ladder, avoiding the first stutter peak in each allelic ladder and thus identifies the first allele peak as the leftmost peak.

AmpF


9-11

DRAFT



Calculating the Offset Values

Categories with the “.os” suffix contain offset categories.

The base pair size indicated in each category is a “reference size.”

One main function of the macros in the AmpFlSTR SEfiler Template is to offset the reference sizes relative to the sizes obtained for the alleles in the allelic ladder. These offset steps are performed by the

Calculate [locus] Offsets macros, located in the Macro list of the

Genotyper software Main window. After the macros are run, the calculated offset values are indicated in parentheses near the end of each category line in the Categories window.

An example of how to interpret the offset values is given here for

D3S1358 allele 14. The reference size for this allele is 122 bp. On a particular ABI P

RISM

310 injection, the size obtained for D3S1358 allele 14 was 119.06 bp. The offset value is calculated as

119.06 – 122 = –2.94.

In this example, the actual category size used for allele assignment is

119.06 (equals 122–2.94), which is the size of the D3S1358 allele 14 in this particular injection of the allelic ladder. In other words, the category sizes used for genotyping are equivalent to the allele sizes obtained in the lane or injection of allelic ladder.

Applying the Appropriate Offset Value to Each Allele in Succession

Once the leftmost allele peak in each allelic ladder is identified, the offset value determined for this allele is applied to the relevant allele(s) in the allele categories.

For example, assume that the offset value determined by the 12.os category in the D3S1358.os group is –3.01 for a particular lane or injection of allelic ladder. This offset value is then applied to the allele 12 category in the D3S1358 group, thus setting the correct offset value for allele 12.

In order for the software to find the next allele peak in the D3S1358 allelic ladder (allele 13), the offset value for the 12.os allele is also applied to the 13.os category. The result of this operation is that the

13.os category size will be 4 bp longer than the 12.os category. In other words, allele 13 is expected to be found at a size that is 4 bp longer than allele 12.

9-12 AmpF


DRAFT



l


To maximize the ease of peak recognition, the size width for most offset categories is ±1 bp, as compared to the allele categories, which have a width of ±0.5 bp. Once allele 13 is recognized in the D3S1358 allelic ladder, the correct offset value is calculated and assigned to the appropriate categories.

This process of peak recognition, offset calculation, and offset assignment is carried out for each of the alleles in each of the allelic ladders.

Off-Ladder

Alleles and Virtual

Alleles

In the previous example, the 12.os offset value (-3.01) is also applied to two other categories in the D3S1358 group: “OL Allele?” and allele 11.

The OL Allele? category is specified to span the range of known

D3S1358 alleles to catch off-ladder alleles that do not size within one of the allele categories.

Allele 11 in this case is a “virtual” allele category, meaning that this allele is not present in the allelic ladder. The virtual category exists to assign an allele designation to allele 11, which is a known allele not included in the allelic ladder.

Because allele 11 is specified to have the same offset value as allele 12, the allele category sizes for these two alleles differ by exactly 4 bp, the difference in their reference sizes. Specifying a size for allele 11 that is 4 bp shorter than allele 12 is generally expected to be a reasonable estimate, since alleles 11 and 12 differ by a single repeat unit (4 bp).

The D3S1358 group also contains virtual allele categories for other alleles, such as 15.2 and 20. The offset value for allele 15.2 is the same as for allele 15. In this case, since reference sizes for these two alleles differ by 2 bp, the category size used for allele 15.2 will be

2 bp longer than for allele 15. Likewise, the offset for allele 20 is the same as for allele 19, so the allele category size for allele 20 will be

4 bp longer than for allele 19.

Many of the loci in the Categories window contain virtual allele categories. For example, the FGA locus contains a virtual category for many 2-bp length variants.

AmpF


9-13

DRAFT



Kazam Macro

The Kazam macro is the top level macro that contains all of the instructions and steps necessary for determination of genotypes relative to the allelic ladder. Kazam references the Calculate [locus]

Offsets macros for each locus. This macro contains further instructions to label peaks at each locus and to filter (remove labels from) the stutter peaks. The various steps in Kazam can be viewed in the Genotyper software by clicking the Kazam line in the Macro list, and then selecting View > Show Step Window.

Filtering Stutter Peaks

To illustrate the steps involved in filtering the stutter peaks, consider again the example of the D3S1358 locus:

To filter stutter peaks:

1. In the Step Window for the Kazam macro, scroll down to the line that reads “Select category: D3S1358.”

2. Five rows below, select the line that reads, “Remove labels from peaks followed by an 809% higher, labeled peak within

3.25 to 4.75 bp.”

3. Select Macro > Edit Step to open the Filter Labels window.

In the Filter Labels window, there are four options (check boxes) for filtering. In this example, the filtering option for

D3S1358 is denoted in the last check box. This filtering option includes another check box that reads “(higher by at least 809%).”

For each labeled peak (e.g. peak A) in the locus size range, this filtering option examines the very next (i.e. greater in bp size) labeled peak (peak B). The label will be removed from peak A if peak B meets both of the specified criteria:

• Peak B is higher by at least 809%

• Peak B is within 3.25 to 4.75 bp

The percentage value in this filtering option is calculated as follows:

[(peak B – peak A) / peak A] x 100 = percentage value

9-14 AmpF


DRAFT



l


To filter stutter peaks: (continued)

3. (continued)

For example, if peak A = 175 RFU and peak B = 2500 RFU, then the percentage value is calculated as follows:

[(2500 – 175) / 175] x 100 = 1329%

In this example, the label will be removed from peak A, provided that the filter option specifies a threshold of 809%, and that peak B is within 3.25 to 4.75 bp of peak A.

Conventionally, percent stutter is calculated:

(peak A / peak B) x 100 = percent stutter

The percentage value that is used in the Genotyper software filtering option (F) can be derived from the conventional percent stutter expression (S):

F = (10,000 / S) – 100

For example, if the desired stutter percent threshold for

D3S1358 is 11%, then the percentage value that should be used in the Genotyper software filtering option is:

F = (10,000 / 11) – 100 = 809%

4. To use a filter value different than 809% for D3S1358, enter another value, then click Replace.

The peak filtering included in the Kazam macro is intended only as a tool and guideline. Final conclusions should be based on careful examination of the STR profiles.

AmpF


9-15

DRAFT



Kazam

(20% Filter)

The standard Kazam macro is written so that a different filter threshold can be used for each locus (the steps for each locus are written separately in the macro). The Kazam macro thus provides maximum flexibility and the opportunity to customize the filter that is used for each locus.

A different version of the Kazam macro called “Kazam (20% filter)” is also provided in the Macro list. This macro is simpler than the

Kazam macro in that a 20% stutter filtering step is specified for all loci.

To view the various steps in the Kazam (20% filter) macro:

1. Click the Kazam (20% filter) line in the Macro list.

2. Select Views > Show Step Window.

The first filter step for this macro (which applies to the sample alleles) reads, “Remove labels from peaks whose height is less than 20% of the highest peak in a category’s range.”

Note:

This particular option does not include any condition regarding the bp size of the filtered peak relative to a higher peak.

Indeed, this second filtering option removes labels from all peaks that are less than a specified percentage of the highest peak observed anywhere in the locus range.

To edit the filter value:

1. Click this step in the Step window.

Refer to

step 2

of the procedure, “To view the various steps

in the Kazam (20% filter) macro,” on page 9-16

.

2. Select Macro > Edit Step.

Note:

This macro uses the second filter option in the Filter

Labels window.

3. If desired, change the value from 20% to some other value, then click Replace.

9-16 AmpF


DRAFT



l


The Kazam (20% filter) macro is provided as an option for laboratories that would like to use one general filter value for all loci.

This macro can also be used when a high level of filtering specificity is not required, as in the typing of single source samples, e.g., database samples.

Modifying the

Template

The original AmpFlSTR SEfiler Template File can be modified so that the changes made to the macros or settings are used as the default:

To modify the template:

1. Close all Genotyper windows, but do not quit the application.

2. Right-click the AmpFlSTR SEfiler Kit Template icon.

3. In the template, select Properties.

4. Deselect the check box for Read-only at the bottom of the window, then close the Properties window.

5. Double-click the AmpFlSTR SEfiler Kit Template icon.

6. Make any desired changes.

7. Save the template file by selecting File > Save.



10. Select the check box for Read-only, then close the

Properties window to save your modifications.

AmpF


9-17

DRAFT



Determining Genotypes

AmpF

l STR

SEfiler Allelic

Ladder

The AmpFlSTR ® SEfiler™ Allelic Ladder contains the most common alleles for each locus. Genotypes are assigned by comparing the sizes obtained for the unknown samples with the sizes obtained for the alleles in the allelic ladder.

In addition to the alleles included in the AmpFl STR SGM Plus Kit, alleles for SE33 are also included.

The macro size ranges include the actual number of nucleotides contained in the smallest and largest allelic ladder alleles for each locus. The size range also includes 3´. The AmpFlSTR SEfiler PCR

Amplification Kit is designed so that a majority of the PCR products contain the non-templated 3´ A nucleotide. The alleles have been named in accordance with the recommendations of the DNA

Commission of the International Society for Forensic Haemogenetics

(ISFH) (DNA Recommendations, 1994; Bar et al., 1997).

The number of complete four base pair repeat units observed is designated by an integer. Variant alleles that contain a partial repeat are designated by a decimal followed by the number of bases in the partial repeat. For example, an FGA 26.2 allele contains 26 complete repeat units and a partial repeat unit of two base pairs.

Additional variation has been seen at some loci where alleles exist that differ from integer allele lengths by one or three base pairs. For example, D21S11 allele 33.1 contains 33 complete repeat units and one nonconsensus base pair. Likewise, a D21S11 29.3 allele contains

29 complete repeat units and a partial 3-bp unit (Moller et al., 1994;

Gill et al., 1997).

9-18 AmpF


DRAFT


Determining Genotypes

A Genotyper software electropherogram of the AmpFlSTR SEfiler

Allelic Ladder listing the designation for each allele is shown in

Figure 9-1 . This electropherogram indicates the designation for each

allele. Results were obtained on an ABI P

RISM


Figure 9-1 Genotyper

®

software plot of the AmpF

l STR SEfiler

Allelic Ladder

AmpF


9-19

DRAFT



Genotyping

Using the

AmpF

l STR

SEfiler Allelic

Ladder

When you interpret AmpFlSTR SEfiler kit results, be aware that the system assigns genotypes to sample alleles by comparing their sizes to those obtained for the known alleles in the AmpFlSTR SEfiler

Allelic Ladder. Genotypes, not sizes, are used for comparison of data between runs, instruments, and laboratories.

We strongly recommend that laboratories use an AmpFlSTR SEfiler

Allelic Ladder from each project to convert the allele sizes to genotypes because:

• The size values obtained for the same sample can differ between instrument platforms because of differences in the type and concentration of the gel/polymer matrices and in electrophoretic conditions.

• Sizes may differ between protocols for the same instrument platform because of differences in gel or polymer concentration, run temperature, gel or capillary thickness, and well-to-read length.

• Slight procedural and reagent variations between gels or between single and multiple capillaries result in greater size variation than that found between samples on the same gel or between samples injected in the same capillary in a single run.

Size Standard

Use the GeneScan-500 LIZ

®

Size Standard with the AmpFlSTR

SEfiler kit. Common alleles for all AmpFlSTR SEfiler kit loci are less than 400 base pairs. The recommended sizing method, Local

Southern, uses two internal lane size standard peaks larger than each allele and two smaller than each allele to be sized. When size standard peaks are defined in routine analyses, inclusion of the 400 base pair and 450 base pair peaks in the GeneScan-500 LIZ Size

Standard is recommended.

The internal lane size standard run with every sample (AmpFlSTR

SEfiler kit PCR products and AmpFlSTR SEfiler Allelic Ladder) is used to normalize lane-to-lane or injection-to-injection migration differences, thereby providing excellent sizing precision within a gel or within a set of capillary injections. Size windows based on the allelic ladder are used to assign allele designations to the samples.

The procedure for running the allelic ladder and determining genotypes is described on the following page.

9-20 AmpF


DRAFT



Analyzing AmpF

lSTR SEfiler Allelic Ladder

To size the AmpFlSTR SEfiler Allelic Ladder alleles, analyze the lanes/injections containing allelic ladder using the same parameters used for samples.

To compare the results of lanes or injections of AmpF

lSTR SEfiler

Allelic Ladder:

1. Compare the base pair sizes of one lane or injection of allelic ladder to those obtained for the other lanes or injections of allelic ladder. All corresponding peaks (peaks at the same position in the allelic ladder) should be within ±0.5 bp of each other.

2. If one or more corresponding peaks are not within ±0.5 bp of each other, check the GeneScan-500 LIZ Size Standard peaks in all allelic ladder lanes or injections to confirm that all GeneScan-500 LIZ Size Standard peaks have been assigned the correct size and/or that all peaks are clearly resolved.

AmpF


9-21

DRAFT



To manually genotype samples:

1. Select one lane or injection of allelic ladder to use for genotyping.

Note:

Our studies have shown that it does not matter which lane or injection of allelic ladder is selected if the alleles in the allelic ladder samples are within ±0.5 bp of each other.

2. Compare the base pair size obtained for each sample allele peak to the sizes obtained for the allelic ladder peaks.

3. Assign genotypes to those sample allele peaks falling within

±0.5 bp of the corresponding allelic ladder peak. The allele designation for each allelic ladder peak is given in


The AmpFlSTR SEfiler Allelic Ladder contains most alleles for the

Amelogenin, D2S1338, D3S1358, D8S1179, D16S539, D18S51,

D19S433, D21S11, FGA, TH01, and vWA loci. However, alleles not found in the AmpFlSTR SEfiler Allelic Ladder do exist. These off-ladder alleles may contain full and/or partial repeat units. An off-ladder allele should flag itself by not falling inside the ±0.5 bp window of any known allelic ladder allele.

Note:

If a sample allele peak is found to be

≥0.5 bp from the corresponding allelic ladder peak, the sample must be rerun to verify the result.

9-22 AmpF


DRAFT


Genotyping Using the

Macintosh OS

10

10

In This Chapter

This chapter describes the use of ABI P

RISM

®

Genotyper

®

Software v2.5.2 in conjunction with the AmpFlSTR

®

SEfiler

™ Kit Template and the Macintosh

®

OS to automatically genotype samples.

Using Genotyper Software for Automated Genotyping . . . . . . . .10-2

Understanding the AmpF l

STR SEfiler Kit Template . . . . . . . . .10-10

Determining Genotypes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-18

AmpF


10-1

DRAFT

March 22, 2012 1:12 pm, 10_Autogenotyping_Mac.fm

Chapter 10 Genotyping Using the Macintosh OS

Using Genotyper Software for Automated

Genotyping

About the

Software

Genotyper ® software is used to convert allele sizes obtained from

ABI P

RISM

® GeneScan ® Analysis Software into allele designations automatically, and to build tables containing the genotype information. Genotypes are assigned by comparing the sizes obtained for the unknown sample alleles with the sizes obtained for the alleles in the allelic ladder.

A Genotyper software template file that contains macros specifically written for use with the AmpFlSTR SEfiler PCR Amplification Kit is provided with this manual. Use this template with AmpFlSTR

SEfiler kit data. Install the template onto your computer following the instructions in the “READ_ME” file.

Note:

You must have Genotyper Software v2.5.2 or higher to run the

AmpFlSTR SEfiler Kit Template. The minimum system requirement for this version of Genotyper software is a Power Macintosh computer with Macintosh OS 8.x or 9.1. Refer to the ABI P

RISM

®

Genotyper ®

2.5 Software User’s Manual (P/N 904648) and

ABI P

RISM

®

Genotyper

®

2.0 Software Applications Tutorials (P/N

904649) for more detailed information about the Genotyper software.

The Human Identification Tutorial and HID template file included with the Genotyper Software v2.5.2 package are for tutorial purposes only.

Before Running

Genotyper

Software

GeneScan Analysis Software sample data (particularly the allelic ladder) must meet a few specific requirements before you can use the macros in the AmpFlSTR SEfiler Kit Template.

Sample Info Column

All samples must have a unique sample description in the Sample

Info column of the GeneScan software sample sheet so that the macros in the AmpFlSTR SEfiler Kit Template can build a table.

Samples with an empty Sample Info column will not be incorporated into the table of genotypes. Also, lanes or injections that contain the

AmpFlSTR SEfiler Allelic Ladder must have the word “ladder” in the Sample Info column. The first lane or injection of ladder is the one used by the Kazam macro in the AmpFlSTR SEfiler Kit

Template to determine the sizes in the allele categories that will be used for genotyping.

10-2 AmpF


DRAFT



It is possible to skip the first lane or injection of allelic ladder and use the second lane or injection of allelic ladder for genotyping instead.

After importing the sample files, but before running the Kazam macro, remove the word “ladder” from the Sample Info column in all four sample dye colors for the first lane or injection of allelic ladder in the Dye/lanes window. Make sure that the word “ladder” is entered for Sample Info in the second lane or injection of allelic ladder. See

step 4 on page 10-4 for a description of how to access the Sample

Info column in the Dye/lanes window.

GeneScan Analysis Software Peak Recognition

All allele peaks in the allelic ladder for each locus must be

“recognized” (labeled) in the GeneScan Analysis Software (i.e., each allele peak must have an entry in the GeneScan table). Thus, all allele peaks in each allelic ladder must have a peak height value in relative fluorescence units (RFU) greater than the Peak Amplitude Threshold

(PAT) specified in the GeneScan software Analysis Parameters. Also, all allele peaks in each allelic ladder must be resolved. For example, the FGA 26, 26.2, and 27 alleles must be resolved so that each peak has an entry in the GeneScan software table.

Sample allele peak heights must also be greater than the GeneScan

Software PAT in order to be recognized (labeled) by Genotyper software. Note that the PAT value specified in the GeneScan software

Analysis Parameters is not necessarily the same as the RFU value that may be used by the forensic analyst as the “interpretational threshold.” The “Low Signal” column of the appropriate Genotyper

software table (see page 10-8 ) can be used to identify peaks that are

greater than the GeneScan software PAT, but less than a specified minimum threshold (default 150 RFU in the table macro).

AmpF

l STR

SEfiler Kit

Template

The AmpFlSTR SEfiler Kit Template contains macros that perform the following steps automatically:

• Finds the lane or injection containing the allelic ladder

• Creates allele size categories that are centered on the sizes obtained for the allelic ladder alleles

• Assigns the appropriate allele label to sample alleles that size within the allele size categories

• Removes labels from stutter peaks by applying a filter

• Builds a table containing genotypes for all samples

AmpF


10-3

DRAFT



Using the

AmpF

l STR

SEfiler Kit

Template File

Use the following procedure to assign genotypes to AmpFlSTR

SEfiler kit alleles automatically.

To use the AmpF

lSTR SEfiler Kit Template:

1. Double-click the SEfiler icon to launch the Genotyper software application and open the template file simultaneously.

Note:

The AmpFlSTR SEfiler Kit Template is a Stationery pad, which means that a new document is created when the template file is opened. The original template file is not overwritten.

2. Set preferences to import raw data, and Blue, Green, Yellow,

Red, and Orange dyes.

3. To import the GeneScan sample files: a. Select File > Import GeneScan File(s).

b. Select the project file and click Import.

4. If each sample does not already have Sample Info completed in the sample sheet: a. Select Views > Show Dye/lanes.

b. Click the first sample row to select it.

c. Click in the Sample Info box at the top of the window, and type the sample designation or description.

d. Repeat steps b and c to enter a sample description for every dye/lane in the list. Enter the same sample description for all dye colors of a single sample.

5. From the Macro list at the bottom left of the Main window, select Check GS500.

6. Select Macro > Run Macro.

In the plot window that opens, scroll through each sample to verify that each GeneScan-500 peak (from 75–450 bp) was assigned the correct size in the GeneScan Analysis Software.

7. From the Macro list at the bottom left of the Main window, select Kazam.

10-4 AmpF


DRAFT



To use the AmpF

lSTR SEfiler Kit Template: (continued)


This macro may take a few minutes to run. When it is finished, a plot window opens with the blue allelic ladder

(D3S1358, vWA, D16S539, D2S1338) and sample allele peaks labeled.

9. Examine data and edit peaks.

10. Print the electropherograms in the plot window by selecting

File > Print.

11. a. In the Main Window, click the green G button at the top left.

b. Select Views > Show Plot Window. c. Repeat steps 8 and 9.

12. a. In the Main Window, click the yellow Y button at the top left.



13. a. In the Main Window, click the red R button at the top left.



AmpF


10-5

DRAFT



Examining Data

Check that the peaks in the allelic ladder are labeled correctly. Scroll through the samples below the allelic ladder to examine the peak labels in each electropherogram.

Peak Labeling

• Allele categories (which appear as dark gray bars in the Plot window) are defined to be ±0.5 bp wide. Peaks that size within

±0.5 bp of an allele category will have a label indicating the allele designation.

Note:

The categories for TH01 alleles 9.3 and 10 are ± 0.4 bp wide.

• Peaks that do not size within an allele category will have a label indicating “OL Allele?” (off-ladder allele).

• The Kazam macro includes a step that removes labels from stutter peaks by applying a percentage filter. Labels are removed from peaks that are followed by a (specified percent difference) higher, labeled peak within 3.25 to 4.75 bp.

The specified filter percentages for these loci are 809% for TH01,

809% for D3S1358, 809% for vWA, 809% for FGA, 733% for

D8S1179, 669% for D16S539, 669% for D21S11, 567% for

D2S1338, 488% for D19S433, 525% for D18S51, and 488% for

SE33.

Note:

The label “OVLR” refers to the overlap region between rare

TH01 and rare FGA alleles. The reported rare alleles that may be observed in the OVLR region are as follows: TH01 13.3 (204 bp),

TH01 14 (205 bp), FGA 12.2 (197 bp), and FGA 13 (199 bp). The peak labels for any alleles that are detected in this overlap region size range will include the OVLR designation (including the TH01 13.3 allele in the AmpFl STR SGM Plus Allelic Ladder.

• A sample allele peak must have been recognized by GeneScan software before it can be recognized by Genotyper software. Thus, sample allele peaks that are below the PAT that was specified in the GeneScan software Analysis Parameters cannot be labeled by

Genotyper software.

Also, because no information is imported for peaks that are not recognized by GeneScan software, such peaks will not align exactly by size relative to the x-axis size scale in the Genotyper software plot window.

10-6 AmpF


DRAFT



Peak Editing

Clicking a labeled peak removes the label. Clicking the same peak again defaults to the placement of bp size of that peak. To access a dialog box and enter the requested text, select Analysis > Set Click

Options. Type the allele designation and/or desired text in the field, then click OK.

Plot Window Viewing Options

To zoom in and out on regions of the plot window:

1. In the Plot window, click and drag in a region of an electropherogram to draw a box around the desired size range (the vertical size of the box is not important).

2. Type R (hold down the command key and type the letter

R) to zoom in.

3. Type H to zoom out completely.

To view electropherograms from more than one dye color in the

Plot window:

1. Select Views > Show Dye/Lanes Window.

2. Click the desired Dye/lane rows.

Note:

Hold down the Shift key on the keyboard to select multiple adjacent Dye/lane rows. Hold down the Command

( ) key to select Dye/lane rows that are not adjacent.

3. Select Views > Show Plot Window.

AmpF


10-7

DRAFT



Making Tables

Two macros for making tables are included in the AmpFlSTR SEfiler

Kit Template. They are:

• Make Allele Table

• 310: Make Table

The Make Allele Table macro contains Sample Info and genotype data fields. The other table, 310: Make Table contains additional information.

All four of the tables have two features in common:

• A locus that has no labeled peaks contains zeros in the cells of the table for that locus.

• Loci that have homozygous alleles contain the allele designation indicated twice in the table.

Make Allele Table

This table has Sample Info in the first column, and allele designations for each locus in columns 2–23. The first two labeled peaks within each locus appear in the table.

310: Make Table


ABI P

RISM

310 Genetic Analyzer. This table has Sample Info in the first column, Sample Comment in the second column, locus name in the third column, and allele designations in columns 4–7. Four columns are provided for allele designations to accommodate mixed samples. The first four labeled peaks within each locus appear in the table. The remaining five table columns are as follows:

• Overflow: If more than two peaks are labeled at one locus, the text

“> two labels” appears in this column.

• Low Signal: If the height of any peak at a locus is greater than the

PAT specified in the GeneScan Analysis Parameters but less than

150 RFU, the text “< 150 RFU” appears in this column.

• Saturation: If the raw data signal for any peak at a locus is greater than 8191 RFU, the text “310: off-scale” appears in this column.

10-8 AmpF


DRAFT



• Edited Label: The text “Edited” appears in this column for any loci where the peak labels were edited manually. For example, clicking an unlabeled peak in the Plot window to add a label constitutes an edit.

• Edited Row: The text “Edited” appears in this column for any rows in the table that contain table cells that have been edited after initial creation of the table.

IMPORTANT!

Before making a table, all electropherograms should be examined and their peaks edited as described in the previous section.

To create and use tables:

1. In the Macro list at the bottom of the Genotyper software

Main Window, click one of the two table macros.


3. Select Views > Show Table Window to view the table in full screen mode.

4. Open and view the plot:

Note:

For all tables except the Make Allele Table, clicking in a cell of the table causes the corresponding sample electropherogram to appear in the plot window: a. Click any cell in the table to display this locus region of the corresponding electropherogram for that sample in the

Plot window.

b. Zoom out ( H) to view all loci for a particular dye color for the corresponding sample.

5. To edit the cells of the table: a. Click a cell of the table that contains an allele designation.

b. Select Edit > Edit Cell. c. Type the desired information in the box and click OK.

6. To print the table, select File > Print.

AmpF


10-9

DRAFT



To create and use tables: (continued)

7. This step is optional.

Select Table > Export to File to save the table as a

Microsoft Excel-readable document.

8. Select File > Save to save the template file with data.

Understanding the AmpF

lSTR SEfiler Kit Template

Troubleshooting

Automated

Genotyping

To Troubleshoot Automated Genotyping:

Observation Probable Cause Recommended Action

Warning message:


Macro’ command because no dye/lanes are selected.”

Warning message:


Macro’ command because the labeled peak could not be found.”

The word

“ladder” is not in

Sample Info for the lane or injection of allelic ladder.

Type the word ladder in the

Sample Info column.

You must enter the word

“ladder” for each dye color

(Blue, Green, Yellow, and Red) in the Sample Info column for the

AmpF l STR SEfiler Allelic Ladder sample.

One or more peaks in the allelic ladder are below the Peak

Amplitude

Threshold that was specified in the GeneScan software Analysis

Parameters.

Use another allelic ladder in the project, or:

1. In the GeneScan Analysis

Software, lower the Peak

Amplitude Threshold values for blue, green, yellow, and red dye colors in the Analysis

Parameters.

2. Reanalyze the sample file(s) containing the allelic ladder.

3. Import all sample files into a new Genotyper software project, and run the Kazam macro again.

10-10 AmpF


DRAFT



l


About This Kit

Template

This section describes the organization and functionality of the

AmpFlSTR SEfiler Kit Template. Read this section for a greater understanding of the macros and steps used in the AmpFlSTR

SEfiler Kit Template.

Categories

In the Genotyper software, each allele is defined by a category. Each category contains information about the allele size, size range, and dye color. To view the list of categories in the AmpFlSTR SEfiler

Template, select View > Show Categories. The categories for each locus are listed together under the locus name. The locus is called a group.

In the Categories window, each locus actually has two sets of categories. For example, the D3S1358 locus has one list of categories under the group “D3S1358” and another list of categories under the group “D3S1358.os.” The categories in the D3S1358 group are allele categories used for allele assignment.

Offset Categories

The offset values are determined automatically by the Calculate

[locus] Offsets macros. These macros use the offset categories

(categories with an “.os” suffix) to find the allele peaks in the allelic ladder and to determine the correct offset values for each allele category.

Finding and Recognizing the Leftmost (first) Allele Peak in Each

Allelic Ladder

• Identification of the leftmost peak is accomplished through the specifications of the first “.os” category listed within each group of offset categories. This first “.os” category (12.os in the case of

D3S1358) is specified to find all peaks in a range of ±7 bp around the reference size for the indicated allele.

• Each Calculate [locus] Offsets macro applies a percentage filter to all peaks in the ±7-bp range in the allelic ladder, avoiding the first stutter peak in each allelic ladder and thus identifying the first allele peak as the leftmost peak.

AmpF


10-11

DRAFT



Calculating the Offset Values

Categories with the “.os” suffix contain offset categories.

The base pair size indicated in each category is a “reference size.”

One main function of the macros in the AmpFlSTR SEfiler Template is to offset the reference sizes relative to the sizes obtained for the alleles in the allelic ladder. These offset steps are performed by the

Calculate [locus] Offsets macros, located in the Macro list of the

Genotyper software Main window. After the macros are run, the calculated offset values are indicated in parentheses near the end of each category line in the Categories window.

An example of how to interpret the offset values is given here for

D3S1358 allele 14. The reference size for this allele is 122 bp. On a particular ABI P

RISM

310 injection, the size obtained for D3S1358 allele 14 was 119.06 bp. The offset value is calculated as

119.06 – 122 = –2.94. In this example, the actual category size used for allele assignment is 119.06 (equals 122–2.94), which is the size of the D3S1358 allele 14 in this particular injection of the allelic ladder. The category sizes used for genotyping are equivalent to the allele sizes obtained in the lane or injection of allelic ladder.

Applying the Appropriate Offset Value to Each Allele in Succession

Once the leftmost allele peak in each allelic ladder is identified, the offset value determined for this allele is applied to the relevant allele(s) in the allele categories.

For example, assume that the offset value determined by the 12.os category in the D3S1358.os group is –3.01 for a particular lane or injection of allelic ladder. This offset value is then applied to the allele 12 category in the D3S1358 group, thus setting the correct offset value for allele 12.

In order for the software to find the next allele peak in the D3S1358 allelic ladder (allele 13), the offset value for the 12.os allele is also applied to the 13.os category. The result of this operation is that the

13.os category size will be 4 bp longer than the 12.os category. In other words, allele 13 is expected to be found at a size that is 4 bp longer than allele 12.

To maximize the ease of peak recognition, the size width for most offset categories is ±1 bp, as compared to the allele categories, which have a width of ±0.5 bp. Once allele 13 is recognized in the D3S1358 allelic ladder, the correct offset value is calculated and assigned to the appropriate categories.

10-12 AmpF


DRAFT



l


This process of peak recognition, offset calculation, and offset assignment is carried out for each of the alleles in each of the allelic ladders.

Off-Ladder

Alleles and Virtual

Alleles

In the previous example, the 12.os offset value (-3.01) is also applied to two other categories in the D3S1358 group: “OL Allele?” and allele 11.

The OL Allele? category specified to span the range of known

D3S1358 alleles, is intended to catch off-ladder alleles that do not size within one of the allele categories.

Allele 11 in this case is a “virtual” allele category, meaning that this allele is not present in the allelic ladder. The virtual category exists to assign an allele designation to allele 11, which is a known allele not included in the allelic ladder.

Because allele 11 is specified to have the same offset value as allele 12, the allele category sizes for these two alleles differ by exactly 4 bp, the difference in their reference sizes. Specifying a size for allele 11 that is 4 bp shorter than allele 12 is generally expected to be a reasonable estimate, since alleles 11 and 12 differ by a single repeat unit (4 bp).

The D3S1358 group also contains virtual allele categories for other alleles, such as 15.2 and 20. The offset value for allele 15.2 is the same as the value of allele 15. In this case, since reference sizes for these two alleles differ by 2 bp, the category size used for allele 15.2 will be 2 bp longer than for allele 15. Likewise, the offset for allele

20 is the same as the value for allele 19, so the allele category size for allele 20 will be 4 bp longer than for allele 19.

Many of the loci in the Categories window contain virtual allele categories. For example, the FGA locus contains a virtual category for many 2-bp length variants.

Kazam Macro

The Kazam macro is the top level macro that contains all of the instructions and steps necessary for determination of genotypes relative to the allelic ladder. Kazam references the Calculate [locus]

Offsets macros for each locus; this macro contains further instructions to label peaks at each locus and to filter (remove labels from) the stutter peaks. The various steps in Kazam can be viewed in the Genotyper software by clicking the Kazam line in the Macro list, and then selecting View > Show Step Window.

AmpF


10-13

DRAFT



Filtering Stutter Peaks

To illustrate the steps involved in filtering the stutter peaks, consider again the example of the D3S1358 locus:

To filter stutter peaks:

1. In the Step Window for the Kazam macro, scroll down to the line that reads “Select category: D3S1358.”

2. Five rows below, select the line that reads, “Remove labels from peaks followed by an 835% higher, labeled peak within

3.25 to 4.75 bp.”

3. Select Macro > Edit Step to open the Filter Labels window.

In the Filter Labels window, there are four options (check boxes) for filtering. In this example, the filtering option for

D3S1358 is denoted in the last check box. This filtering option includes another check box that reads “(higher by at least 835%).”

For each labeled peak (e.g. peak A) in the locus size range, this filtering option examines the very next (i.e. greater in bp size) labeled peak (peak B). The label will be removed from peak A if peak B meets both of the specified criteria:

• Peak B is higher by at least 835%

• Peak B is within 3.25 to 4.75 bp

The percentage value in this filtering option is calculated as follows:

[(peak B – peak A) / peak A] x 100 = percentage value

For example, if peak A = 175 RFU and peak B = 2500 RFU, then the percentage value is calculated as follows:

[(2500 – 175) / 175] x 100 = 1329%

10-14 AmpF


DRAFT



l


To filter stutter peaks: (continued)

3. (continued)

In this example, the label will be removed from peak A, provided that the filter option specifies a threshold of 809%, and that peak B is within 3.25 to 4.75 bp of peak A.

Conventionally, percent stutter is calculated:

(peak A / peak B) x 100 = percent stutter

The percentage value that is used in the Genotyper software filtering option (F) can be derived from the conventional percent stutter expression (S) as follows:

F = (10,000 / S) – 100

For example, if the desired stutter percent threshold for

D3S1358 is 11%, then the percentage value that should be used in the Genotyper software filtering option is:

F = (10,000 / 11) – 100 = 809%

4. To use a filter value different from 809% for D3S1358, enter another value, then click Replace.

The peak filtering included in the Kazam macro is intended only as a tool and guideline. Final conclusions should be based on careful examination of the STR profiles.

Kazam

(20% Filter)

The standard Kazam macro is written so that a different filter threshold can be used for each locus (the steps for each locus are written separately in the macro). The Kazam macro thus provides maximum flexibility and the opportunity to customize the filter used for each locus.

AmpF


10-15

DRAFT



A different version of the Kazam macro called “Kazam (20% filter)” is also provided in the Macro list. This macro is simpler than the

Kazam macro in that a 20% stutter filtering step is specified for all loci.

To view the various steps in the Kazam (20% filter) macro:

1. Click the Kazam (20% filter) line in the Macro list

2. Select Views > Show Step Window.

The first filter step for this macro (which applies to the sample alleles) reads, “Remove labels from peaks whose height is less than 20% of the highest peak in a category’s range.”

Note that this particular option does not include any condition regarding the bp size of the filtered peak relative to a higher peak.

Indeed, this second filtering option will remove labels from all peaks that are less than a specified percentage of the highest peak observed anywhere in the locus range.

To edit the filter value:

1. Click the first filter step in the Step window.

Refer to

step 2

in the previous procedure, “To view the various steps in the Kazam (20% filter) macro.”

2. Select Macro > Edit Step.

Note:

This macro uses the second filter option in the Filter

Labels window.

3. If desired, change the value from 20% to some other value, then click Replace.

The Kazam (20% filter) macro is provided as an option for laboratories that would like to use one general filter value for all loci.

This macro can also be used when a high level of filtering specificity is not required, as in the typing of single source samples, e.g., database samples.

10-16 AmpF


DRAFT



l


Modifying the

Template

The original AmpFlSTR SEfiler Template File can be modified so that the changes made to the macros or settings are used as the default:

To modify the template:

1. Close all Genotyper windows, but do not quit the application.



4. Deselect the check box for Read-only at the bottom of the window, then close the Properties window.

5. Double-click the AmpFlSTR SEfiler Kit Template icon.

6. Make any desired changes.

7. Save the template file by selecting File > Save.



10. Select the check box for Read-only, then close the

Properties window.

AmpF


10-17

DRAFT



Determining Genotypes

AmpF

l STR

SEfiler Allelic

Ladder

The AmpFlSTR® SEfiler™ Allelic Ladder contains the most common alleles for each locus. Genotypes are assigned by comparing the sizes obtained for the unknown samples with the sizes obtained for the alleles in the allelic ladder.

In addition to the alleles included in the AmpFl STR SGM Plus Kit, alleles for SE33 have also been included.

The macro size ranges include the actual number of nucleotides contained in the smallest and largest allelic ladder alleles for each locus, as well as those alleles reported in STRBase

(www.cstl.nist.gov/div831/strbase) as of September 2000. The size range also includes 3´. The AmpFlSTR SEfiler PCR Amplification

Kit is designed so that a majority of the PCR products contain the non-templated 3´ A nucleotide. The alleles have been named in accordance with the recommendations of the DNA Commission of the International Society for Forensic Haemogenetics (ISFH) (DNA

Recommendations, 1994; Bar et al., 1997).

The number of complete four base pair repeat units observed is designated by an integer. Variant alleles that contain a partial repeat are designated by a decimal followed by the number of bases in the partial repeat. For example, an FGA 26.2 allele contains 26 complete repeat units and a partial repeat unit of two base pairs.

Additional variation has been seen at some loci where alleles exist that differ from integer allele lengths by one or three base pairs. For example, D21S11 allele 33.1 contains 33 complete repeat units and one nonconsensus base pair. Likewise, a D21S11 29.3 allele contains

29 complete repeat units and a partial 3-bp unit (Moller et al., 1994;

Gill et al., 1997).

10-18 AmpF


DRAFT



A Genotyper software electropherogram of the AmpFlSTR SEfiler

Allelic Ladder listing the designation for each allele is shown in

Figure 10-1

. These results were obtained on an ABI P

RISM

310

Genetic Analyzer. The electropherogram indicates the designation for each allele.

Figure 10-1 Genotyper

®

software plot of the AmpF

lSTR SEfiler

Allelic Ladder

AmpF


10-19

DRAFT



Genotyping

Using the

AmpF

l STR

SEfiler Allelic

Ladder

When you interpret AmpFlSTR SEfiler kit results, be aware that the system assigns genotypes to sample alleles by comparing their sizes to those obtained for the known alleles in the AmpFlSTR SEfiler

Allelic Ladder. Genotypes, not sizes, are used for comparison of data between runs, instruments, and laboratories.

We strongly recommend that laboratories use an AmpFlSTR SEfiler

Allelic Ladder from each project to convert the allele sizes to genotypes.

• The size values obtained for the same sample can differ between instrument platforms because of differences in the type and concentration of the gel/polymer matrices and in electrophoretic conditions.

• Sizes may differ between protocols for the same instrument platform because of differences in gel or polymer concentration, run temperature, gel or capillary thickness, and well-to-read length.

• Slight procedural and reagent variations between gels or between single and multiple capillaries result in greater size variation than that found between samples on the same gel or between samples injected in the same capillary in a single run.

Size Standard

Use the GeneScan-500 LIZ

®

Size Standard with the AmpFlSTR

SEfiler kit. Common alleles for all AmpFlSTR SEfiler kit loci are less than 400 base pairs. The recommended sizing method, Local

Southern, uses two internal lane size standard peaks larger than each allele and two smaller than each allele to be sized. When size standard peaks are defined in routine analyses, inclusion of the 400 base pair and 450 base pair peaks in the GeneScan-500 LIZ Size

Standard is recommended.

The internal lane size standard run with every sample (AmpFlSTR

SEfiler kit PCR products and AmpFlSTR SEfiler Allelic Ladder) is used to normalize lane-to-lane or injection-to-injection migration differences, thereby providing excellent sizing precision within a gel or within a set of capillary injections. Size windows based on the allelic ladder are used to assign allele designations to the samples.

The procedure for running the allelic ladder and determining genotypes is described on the following page.

10-20 AmpF


DRAFT



Analyzing AmpF

lSTR SEfiler Allelic Ladder

To size the AmpFlSTR SEfiler Allelic Ladder alleles, analyze the lanes/injections containing allelic ladder with the same parameters used for samples.

To compare the results of lanes or injections of AmpF

lSTR SEfiler

Allelic Ladder:

1. Compare the base pair sizes of one lane or injection of allelic ladder to those obtained for the other lanes or injections of allelic ladder. All corresponding peaks (peaks at the same position in the allelic ladder) should be within ±0.5 bp of each other.

2. If one or more corresponding peaks are not within ±0.5 bp of each other, check the GeneScan-500 LIZ Size Standard peaks in all allelic ladder lanes or injections to confirm that all GeneScan-500 LIZ Size Standard peaks have been assigned the correct size and/or that all peaks are clearly resolved.

To manually genotype samples:

1. Select one lane or injection of allelic ladder to use for genotyping.

Note:

Our studies have shown that it does not matter which lane or injection of allelic ladder is selected if the alleles in the allelic ladder samples are within ±0.5 bp of each other.

2. Compare the base pair size obtained for each sample allele peak to the sizes obtained for the allelic ladder peaks.

3. Assign genotypes to those sample allele peaks falling within

±0.5 bp of the corresponding allelic ladder peak. The allele

designation for each allelic ladder peak is given in Figure

10-1 on page 10-19

.

AmpF


10-21

DRAFT



The AmpFlSTR SEfiler Allelic Ladder contains most alleles for the

Amelogenin, D2S1338, D3S1358, D8S1179, D16S539, D18S51,

D19S433, D21S11, FGA, SE33, TH01, and vWA loci. However, alleles not found in the AmpFlSTR SEfiler Allelic Ladder do exist.

These off-ladder alleles may contain full and/or partial repeat units.

An off-ladder allele should flag itself by not falling inside the ±0.5 bp window of any known allelic ladder allele.

Note:

If a sample allele peak is found to be Š0.5 bp from the corresponding allelic ladder peak, the sample must be rerun to verify the result.

10-22 AmpF


DRAFT


Troubleshooting

A

A

In This Appendix

Follow the recommended actions for the observations described in this appendix to understand and eliminate problems you experience during analysis.

Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2

AmpF


A-1

DRAFT

March 22, 2012 2:04 pm, A_Troubleshooting.fm

Appendix A Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting

Table A-1 Troubleshooting causes and recommended actions

Observation Possible Causes Recommended Actions

Faint or no signal from both the AmpF lSTR ®

Control DNA 007 and the DNA test samples at all loci

Incorrect volume or absence of either AmpF lSTR ® PCR Reaction

Mix, AmpF lSTR SEfiler ™ Primer

Set, or AmpliTaq Gold ® DNA

Polymerase

No activation of AmpliTaq Gold

DNA Polymerase

Repeat amplification.

Repeat amplification, making sure to hold reactions initially at 95 °C for 11 min.

Vortex PCR Master Mix thoroughly.

PCR Master Mix not vortexed thoroughly before aliquoting

AmpF l STR SEfiler Primer Set exposed to too much light

GeneAmp ® malfunction

PCR System

Store Primer Set protected from light.

Refer to the thermal cycler user’s manual and check instrument calibration.

Incorrect thermal cycler parameters Check the protocol for correct thermal cycler parameters.

Tubes not seated tightly in the thermal cycler during amplification

Push reaction tubes firmly into contact with block after first cycle.

Repeat test.

GeneAmp PCR System 9600 heated cover misaligned

Wrong PCR reaction tube

Align GeneAmp 9600 heated cover properly so that white stripes align after twisting the top portion clockwise.

Use Applied Biosystems MicroAmp

Reaction Tubes with Caps for the

GeneAmp 9600 and 9700.

MicroAmp ® Base used with tray/retainer set and tubes in

GeneAmp 9600 and 9700

Remove MicroAmp Base from tray/retainer set and repeat test.

A-2 AmpF


DRAFT


Troubleshooting

Table A-1 Troubleshooting causes and recommended actions (continued)

Recommended Actions Observation Possible Causes

Faint or no signal from both the AmpF lSTR ®

Control DNA 007 and the DNA test samples at all loci. (continued)

Insufficient PCR product electrokinetically injected

Degraded formamide

For ABI P

RISM®

310 runs:

Mix 1.5

μL of PCR product and

24.5

μL of Hi-Di™

Formamide/GeneScan

®

-500 LIZ

® solution.

CHEMICAL

HAZARD. Formamide causes eye, skin, and respiratory tract irritation.

It is a possible reproductive and birth defect hazard. Read the


Check the storage of formamide; do not thaw and refreeze multiple times. Try Hi-Di™ Formamide.

CHEMICAL

HAZARD. Formamide causes eye, skin, and respiratory tract irritation.

It is a possible reproductive and birth defect hazard. Read the


AmpF


A-3

DRAFT




Observation Possible Causes Recommended Actions

Positive signal from

AmpF lSTR Control

DNA 007 but no signal from DNA test samples

Quantity of test DNA sample is below assay sensitivity

Quantitate DNA and add 1.0–2.5 ng of DNA. Repeat test.

Test sample contains PCR inhibitor

(e.g., heme compounds, certain dyes)

Quantitate DNA and add minimum necessary volume. Repeat test.

Wash the sample in a

Centricon ® -100. Repeat test.

More than two alleles present at a locus

Test sample DNA is degraded If possible, evaluate the quality of

DNA sample by running an agarose gel. If DNA is degraded, re-amplify with an increased amount of DNA.

Dilution of test sample DNA in H

2

O or wrong buffer (e.g., wrong EDTA concentration)

Re-dilute DNA using TE Buffer (with

0.1-mM EDTA).

Presence of exogenous DNA

Too much DNA in reaction

Use appropriate techniques to avoid introducing foreign DNA during laboratory handling.

Use recommended amount of template DNA (1.0–2.5 ng).

See

Chapter 8, “Experiments and

Results,”

“Stutter Products.”

Mixed sample

Amplification of stutter product

(n-4 bp position)

Incomplete 3´ A base addition

(n-1 bp position)

Signal exceeds dynamic range of instrument (off-scale data)

Poor spectral separation (bad matrix)

See

Chapter 8, “Experiments and

Results,”

“Addition of 3´ A

Nucleotide.”

Be sure to include the final extension step of 60 °C for 45 min in the PCR.

Quantitate DNA and re-amplify sample, adding 1.0–2.5 ng of DNA.

Follow the steps for creating a matrix file.

Confirm that Filter Set G5 modules are installed and used for analysis.

A-4 AmpF


DRAFT


Troubleshooting


Observation

Some but not all loci visible on electropherogram

Possible Causes Recommended Actions

Test sample DNA is degraded If possible, evaluate the quality of

DNA sample by running an agarose gel. If DNA is degraded, re-amplify with an increased amount of DNA.

Test sample contains PCR inhibitor

(e.g., heme compounds, certain dyes)

Quantitate DNA and add minimum necessary volume. Repeat test.

Wash the sample in a

Centricon-100. Repeat test.

ABI P

RISM


Data was not automatically analyzed

Sample sheet not completed

Injection list not completed

Preferences not set correctly in

ABI P

RISM

® 310 Data Collection

Software

Extra peaks visible when sample is known to contain DNA from a single source

Incomplete denaturation before loading onto detection instrument

Current too high Decomposition of urea in the

POP-4 ™ polymer solution

Incorrect buffer concentration

Complete sample sheet as described.

Complete injection list as described.

Select Window > Preferences, then select Injection List Defaults and the Autoanalyze check box.

Heat samples to 95 °C for 3 min in deionized formamide solution. Snap cool on ice. Use Genetic Analyzer

0.5-mL Sample Tubes and a thermal cycler.

Add fresh POP-4 polymer solution to the syringe.

CHEMICAL

HAZARD. POP-4 polymer may cause eye, skin, and respiratory tract irritation. Read the MSDS, and follow the handling instructions.

Wear appropriate protective eyewear, clothing, and gloves. Use for research and development purposes only.

Replace buffer with 1X Genetic

Analyzer Buffer.

AmpF


A-5

DRAFT




Observation

No current

No signal

Low signal

Possible Causes Recommended Actions

No 1X Genetic Analyzer buffer Refill buffer vials with 1X Genetic

Analyzer buffer.

Pump block channel blockage Remove and clean block. Refer to the ABI P

RISM

®

310 Genetic

Analyzer User Guide.

Tighten valve fittings and syringe.

Loose valve fittings or syringe

Capillary not flush with electrode

Autosampler not calibrated correctly

Tape capillary securely to heat plate.


RISM

®

310 Genetic


Check calibration of autosampler.

Electrode bent

Capillary misaligned with electrode Align capillary and electrode.

No PCR product added Add 1.5-

μL PCR product to formamide/GeneScan-500 LIZ mixture.

Capillary bent out of sample tube Align capillary and electrode.

Recalibrate autosampler.

Calibrate autosampler in X, Y, and Z directions.

PCR product not at bottom of tube Spin sample tube in microcentrifuge.

Air bubble at bottom of sample tube

Spin tube in microcentrifuge to remove air bubbles.

Sealed sample tube septum

PCR product added to non-deionized formamide

PCR product not mixed well with formamide/GeneScan-500 LIZ mixture

Replace septum.

Always use deionized formamide for sample preparation. Verify conductivity is < 30-

μ siemens.

Mix PCR product with formamide/GeneScan-500 LIZ mixture by pipetting up and down several times.

A-6 AmpF


DRAFT


Troubleshooting


Observation Possible Causes

Loss of resolution after

100 bp

Excess salt in sample

Too much DNA in sample

Bad water

Incorrectly prepared and/or old solutions

Runs get progressively slower, i.e., size standard peaks come off at higher and higher scan numbers

Leaking syringe: polymer is not filling capillary before every injection

Runs get progressively faster, i.e., size standard peaks come off at lower and lower scan numbers

Water in syringe

High baseline Dirty capillary window

Recommended Actions

Do not concentrate PCR product by evaporation. Use Centricon-100 if necessary.

Treat and dilute the PCR product.

Use autoclaved or freshly prepared deionized water.

Replace buffer and polymer with fresh solutions.

Clean syringe thoroughly.

Replace syringe.

Prime syringe with small volume of polymer and discard. Fill syringe with polymer.

Capillary moved out of position in laser window

Cracked capillary

Clean capillary window with 95% ethanol.

CHEMICAL

HAZARD. Ethanol is a flammable liquid and vapor. Exposure may cause eye, skin, and upper respiratory tract irritation. Prolonged or repeated contact may dry the skin. Exposure may cause central nervous system depression and liver damage. Keep away from heat, sparks, and flame. Read the MSDS, and follow the handling instructions.

Wear appropriate protective eyewear, clothing, and gloves.

Position capillary in front of laser window.

Replace the capillary

AmpF


A-7

DRAFT



A-8 AmpF


DRAFT


Laboratory Setup

B

B


This appendix provides some references for laboratories preparing to implement PCR technology. Careful planning and design of the laboratory, and training of all laboratory personnel are necessary to ensure that exogenous DNA and PCR products are confined to designated areas.

Lab Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2

AmpF


B-1

DRAFT

March 22, 2012 2:04 pm, B_LaboratorySetup.fm

Appendix B Laboratory Setup

Lab Design

Sensitivity of PCR

Many resources are available for the appropriate design of a PCR laboratory. If you are using the SEfiler kit for forensic DNA testing, refer to http://www.ojp.usdoj.gov/nij/scidocs.htm, “Forensic

Laboratories: Handbook for Facility Planning, Design, Construction and Moving.” If you are using the SEfiler kit for parentage DNA testing, refer to the “Standards for Parentage Testing Laboratories.”

The sensitivity of the AmpFlSTR ® SEfiler

™


(and other PCR-based tests) permits amplification of minute quantities of DNA, necessitating precautions to avoid contamination of samples yet to be amplified (Kwok and Higuchi, 1989).

While contamination of amplified DNA with unamplified DNA

(genomic DNA) does not pose a problem, ordinary precautions, such as changing pipet tips between samples, should be taken when handling and analyzing PCR product. These precautions should prevent cross-contamination between samples of amplified DNA.

Care should be taken while handling and processing samples to prevent chance contamination by human DNA. Gloves should be worn at all times and changed frequently. Sample tubes should be closed when not in use. Dispersal of aerosols should be limited through careful handling of sample tubes and reagents.

Applied Biosystems does not intend these references for laboratory design to constitute all precautions and care necessary using PCR technology.

Extra precautions and care should be taken during DNA extraction and PCR setup to prevent transfer of DNA from one sample to another. Use a new, filter-plugged pipet tip for each sample, open tubes carefully, and keep sample tubes closed when not in use.

Applied Biosystems does not intend these references for laboratory design to constitute all precautions and care necessary when using

PCR technology.

B-2 AmpF


DRAFT

March 22, 2012 2:04 pm, B_LaboratorySetup.fm

DNA Extraction Protocols

C

C


Appendix C describes some extraction methods for various DNA samples.

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2

Storage of Samples for DNA Extraction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3

AmpF


C-1

DRAFT

March 22, 2012 2:04 pm, C_DNAExtraction.fm

Appendix C DNA Extraction Protocols

Introduction

Overview of DNA

Sample Types

Both manual and automated extraction procedures can be divided into organic and nonorganic procedures. Depending on the material received, the scientist should determine which procedure is appropriate for each piece of evidence.

DNA for PCR amplification and analysis using the AmpFlSTR

®

SEfiler

™

PCR Amplification Kit may be extracted from fresh or frozen whole blood, peripheral blood lymphocytes, blood stains, sperm cells, paraffin blocks, teeth, hair, tissue, bone, and other biological samples.

DNA Extraction

Methods

Numerous procedures are currently used for DNA extraction.

Extraction procedures include Chelex

®

, phenol-chloroform and

FTA™ paper. In DNA extraction method, all samples must be handled carefully to prevent sample-to-sample contamination or contamination by extraneous DNA. Also, when possible, we recommend that the samples be processed at a separate time from reference samples.

Phenol-Chloroform Method

The phenol-chloroform method removes proteins and other cellular components from nucleic acids, resulting in relatively purified DNA preparations. This method results in double-stranded DNA suitable for AmpFlSTR SEfiler kit amplifications. DNA extracted by the phenol-chloroform method is also suitable for RFLP analysis provided it is not significantly degraded. This method is also recommended when extracting DNA from relatively large samples

(i.e., when the amount of DNA in a sample is expected to be greater than 100 ng).

Chelex Method

The Chelex method of DNA extraction is more rapid than the phenol-chloroform method. It involves fewer steps, resulting in fewer opportunities for sample-to-sample contamination. This method produces single-stranded DNA suitable for AmpFlSTR SEfiler kit amplification. DNA extracted with Chelex cannot be used for RFLP analysis.

C-2 AmpF


DRAFT


Storage of Samples for DNA Extraction

FTA Paper Extraction

The FTA paper extraction begins immediately when blood is spotted on FTA paper. The cells are lysed and the DNA is immobilized within the matrix of the paper. The DNA is purified by performing a series of washes, after which the DNA is ready for PCR amplification.

Material Safety

Data Sheets

For information and ordering instructions for Material Safety Data

Sheets (MSDSs), refer to

“About MSDSs” on page xvi .

Storage of Samples for DNA Extraction

Proper Storage

Storage of various DNA specimens is an essential step to ensuring that the DNA profiles obtained are accurate and meaningful. Proper chain of custody is vital to maintaining the integrity of each particular specimen.

AmpF


C-3

DRAFT


Appendix C DNA Extraction Protocols

C-4 AmpF


DRAFT


DNA Quantification

D

D


This appendix discusses the importance of quantifying DNA samples prior to amplification. The QuantiBlot samples.

® Human DNA Quantitation

Kit described in this appendix can be used for the quantification of

Importance of Quantification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-2

Using the QuantiBlot Kit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-3

Commonly Asked Questions about the QuantiBlot Kit . . . . . . . . D-5

AmpF


D-1

DRAFT

March 22, 2012 1:12 pm, D_DNAQuantitation.fm

Appendix D DNA Quantification

Importance of Quantification

DNA Quality

The DNA quality (degree of degradation), purity, and total quantity in a sample influences the efficiency of a PCR amplification. Lack of amplification is usually due to highly degraded DNA, the presence of

PCR inhibitors, insufficient DNA quantity, or any combination of these factors.

Quantification and PCR

Amplification

The QuantiBlot Human DNA Quantitation Kit (P/N N808-0114) is an ideal method for accurate quantification of human DNA (Walsh et

al., 1992). If the QuantiBlot kit determines that sufficient DNA is present in the extracted sample (greater than approximately

0.05-ng/

μL concentration), then lack of amplification is most likely due to PCR inhibitors or severe degradation of the DNA.

Quantification of samples shows if there is a sufficient amount of

DNA present for amplification. You can minimize PCR inhibition by adding the smallest volume of DNA extract necessary for successful amplification (volume containing approximately 1–2.5 ng). Using the minimal volume of extracted DNA for PCR maximizes the number of different genetic marker tests or repeat analyses that can be performed. Likewise, informed decision(s) can be made regarding typing of samples present in extremely limiting quantities.

DNA quantification is particularly important for amplifications using the AmpFlSTR ® SEfiler

™ kit, where optimal results are obtained using a range of 1–2.5 ng of input DNA. Adding greater than 2.5 ng of DNA can result in too much PCR product, such that the dynamic range of the instrument used to detect and analyze the PCR product is exceeded.

D-2 AmpF


DRAFT


Using the QuantiBlot Kit

Using the QuantiBlot Kit

How the Kit

Works

The method of DNA quantification using the QuantiBlot Human

DNA Quantitation Kit is based on probe hybridization to the human alpha satellite locus, D17Z1. A biotinylated probe specific for the

D17Z1 sequence is hybridized to sample DNA that has been immobilized via slot blot onto a nylon membrane.

The subsequent binding of horseradish peroxidase/streptavidin enzyme conjugate (HRP-SA) to the bound probe allows for either colorimetric or chemiluminescent detection. In the case of colorimetric detection, the oxidation of

3,3´,5,5´-tetramethylbenzidine (TMB) catalyzed by HRP-SA results in the formation of a blue precipitate directly on the nylon membrane.

For chemiluminescent detection, the oxidation of a luminol-based reagent catalyzed by HRP-SA results in the emission of photons that are detected on standard autoradiography film. This process is called enhanced chemiluminescence (ECL).

In both cases, the quantity of sample DNA is determined by comparing the sample signal intensity to human DNA standards that have been calibrated against two DNA controls of known quantity.

The colorimetric method allows for detection and quantification down to 150 pg. The chemiluminescent method can detect 150 pg with a 15-minute exposure to film and can detect as little as 20 pg with longer film exposures (3 hours to overnight). Results obtained from various biological samples using the QuantiBlot Kit are shown in

Figure D-1 on page D-4

.

Note:

For specific procedures, refer to the QuantiBlot Human DNA

Quantitation Kit product insert.

AmpF


D-3

DRAFT



Specificity for

Primate DNA

One significant advantage offered by the QuantiBlot kit is that the probe is highly specific for human/primate DNA. When tested,

300-ng quantities of several non-primate DNA samples (E. coli, yeast, dog, cat, mouse, rat, pig, cow, chicken, fish, and turkey) were found to give either no signals or signals that were less than or equal to that obtained for 0.15 ng of human DNA. This high degree of specificity for human/primate DNA allows for the accurate quantification of target human DNA in samples that also contain significant amounts of microbial or other non-primate DNA.

10 ng

5

2.5

1.2

0.6

0.3

0.15

10 ng

5

2.5

1.2

0.6

0.3

0.15

Figure D-1 QuantiBlot Human DNA Quantitation Kit results (ECL detection)

Single-Stranded and

Degraded DNA

Another advantage of the QuantiBlot kit method is that single-stranded and/or non-purified DNA samples can be quantified.

DNA samples extracted using the Chelex method can be quantified, as can those extracted by other methods, including phenol-chloroform, salting out, and binding to silica particles.

Degraded DNA gives the same results as fully intact DNA over a wide range of average DNA sizes. However, DNA quantity can be underestimated when the DNA is extremely degraded. For example, experimental results indicated that the signal obtained for DNA degraded to an average size of 500–2000 bp was about half of the expected intensity.

Extremely degraded DNA usually amplifies less efficiently than intact DNA, so a greater quantity of degraded DNA may be required to give the same results as intact DNA.

D-4 AmpF


DRAFT


Commonly Asked Questions about the QuantiBlot Kit

Commonly Asked Questions about the

QuantiBlot Kit

How Much DNA

How much of the DNA extract should be added to the amplification reaction if a sample gives no signal for the

QuantiBlot assay?

As an example, assume that 5

μL of the DNA extract is spotted, and the lowest DNA standard tested is 150 pg. So, the DNA concentration in the sample must be less than 150 pg/5

μL or

30 pg/

μL. The quantity of DNA in 10 μL of extract, which is the maximum that can be added to an AmpFlSTR SEfiler kit amplification, would therefore be less than 0.3 ng.

The possible approaches that can be taken for such a sample include the following:

• Attempt amplification using 10

μL of the extract.

• Concentrate the sample to a smaller volume using a

Centricon

®

-100 before amplification.

Multiple Film

Exposures

Is it possible to perform multiple film exposures with the ECL detection method?

Yes. In fact, a wise strategy is to perform a 15-minute film exposure first, which gives sensitivity down to at least 150 pg. Then place the film on the membrane for 3 hours or as long as overnight. The longer exposure will give sensitivity down to about 20 pg.

The photon emission kinetics of ECL are such that many exposures can be taken in a relatively short period of time. The light output is the greatest in the first hour, gradually decreasing over the next several hours with a half-life of about 60 minutes. The results of one experiment, for example, indicated that six exposures could be taken in the first 2.5 hours of photon emission, with each exposure detecting 80–150 pg of DNA. A seventh exposure with the film on the membrane overnight was easily able to detect the 80 pg DNA sample.

Sometimes it is beneficial to perform a very short exposure (about

5 minutes) to facilitate quantification of samples having intense signals in the range of 5–10 ng DNA.

AmpF


D-5

DRAFT



Repeating the

Assay

Can the probe be stripped off the membrane so that the

QuantiBlot assay can be repeated if a mistake is made during the hybridization/detection steps?

Yes, for the ECL method. This procedure can be used with the TMB method only if no blue precipitate was deposited on the membrane.

To repeat the assay:

1. Heat 150 mL of the Wash Solution (1.5X SSPE, 0.5% SDS) to approximately 90 °C in a glass bowl.

2. Take the Wash Solution off the heat source and place the nylon QuantiBlot membrane (containing the spotted samples) into the solution.

3. Rotate on an orbital shaker at room temperature for 20 min.

4. Remove the membrane from the Wash Solution.

IMPORTANT!

at any time.

Do not let the QuantiBlot membrane dry out

5. Begin the QuantiBlot kit protocol starting at the hybridization step (refer to the QuantiBlot Human DNA

Quantitation Kit product insert).

Performing

Hybridization and

Detection at a

Later Time

Is it possible to spot the samples onto the membrane and then perform the hybridization and detection steps at a later time? Yes.

To stop and resume hybridization and detection:

1.

Immediately after spotting the samples onto the membrane, place the membrane in 100 mL of 5X SSPE (without SDS).

2.

Store at 2–6 °C protected from light.

3.

Resume the protocol beginning with the pre-hybridization step (Section 4.1 in the QuantiBlot Human DNA

Quantitation Kit product insert).

For best sensitivity, resume the protocol within 24 hr.

D-6 AmpF


DRAFT


ABI P

RISM

GeneScan Analysis

Software for the Windows NT OS

E

E


This appendix is a review of the analysis parameters and size caller for the Microsoft

®

Windows NT

®

GeneScan

®

Analysis Software.

platform using the ABI P

RISM

®

Overview of Analysis Parameters and Size Caller . . . . . . . . . . . . E-2

GeneScan Analysis Software Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-3

Analysis Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-4

Analysis Parameters Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-5

Data Processing: Smooth Options Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-6

Peak Detection: Min. Peak Half Width Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . E-8

Polynomial Degree and Peak Window Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-9

Parameters for Peak Detection of Slope Threshold . . . . . . . . . . E-17

Baseline Window Size Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-20

Size Caller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-30

AmpF


E-1

DRAFT

March 22, 2012 1:12 pm, E_GeneScan_AnalySW.fm

Appendix E ABI P

RISM

GeneScan Analysis Software for the Windows NT OS

Overview of Analysis Parameters and Size Caller

Purpose

This appendix supplements the ABI P

RISM

® GeneScan ® Analysis

Software Version 3.7 for the Windows NT ®

Platform User Guide

(P/N 4308923). It explains the analysis parameters and size caller available in the Windows NT version of the software.

The GeneScan Analysis Software v3.7.1 Updater CD (P/N 4336026) includes new analysis parameter default values. For additional information and installation instructions, refer to the GeneScan v3.7.1 About file.

Intended

Audience

This appendix is intended for users familiar with the GeneScan analysis software for the Macintosh

® operating system who are now using the software on the Windows NT operating system.

E-2 AmpF


DRAFT


GeneScan Analysis Software Process

GeneScan Analysis Software Process

Overview

The ABI P

RISM

® GeneScan Analysis Software is available in versions for both the Windows NT operating system and the

Macintosh operating system. The Windows NT version of the software uses different algorithms and has additional analysis parameters that give users more control with data analysis.

Flowchart

The following flowchart shows how GeneScan analysis software analyzes data.

Note:

For multicapillary instruments, multicomponenting is performed by the data collection software.

Raw data

Limit analysis range

Multicomponent

No Sizecalling needed?

Yes

Match size standard

Baseline

Detect peaks

Smooth analyzed electropherogram

Quality check

Make sizing curve

Size peaks

Analyzed data

Figure E-2 Simplified GeneScan analysis software flowchart

AmpF


E-3

DRAFT


Appendix E ABI P

RISM


Analysis Parameters

Table of

Parameters

Table E-2 The table below lists the analysis parameters.

Parameter Status Parameter Discussed in...

Unchanged from

Macintosh versions

• Analysis Range

• Size Call Range

• Size Calling

Method

• Peak Amplitude

Thresholds

• Smooth Options

• Min. Peak Half

Width

ABI P

RISM

®

GeneScan Analysis

Software Version 3.7

User Guide

Changed from

Macintosh versions

Added for the

Windows NT version

• Smooth Options

• Min. Peak Half

Width

• Polynomial Degree

• Peak Window Size

• Slope Threshold for Peak Start

• Slope Threshold for Peak End

• Window Size

Removed options from the Windows

NT version

Baseline

Multicomponent

This user bulletin and the ABI P

RISM

®

GeneScan Analysis

Software Version

3.7 NT and 3.1

Macintosh User

Guides

This appendix and the

ABI P

RISM

®

GeneScan Analysis

Software Version 3.7

User Guide

ABI P

RISM

®

GeneScan Analysis

Software Version 3.1

User’s Manual

E-4 AmpF


DRAFT


Analysis Parameters Dialog Box

Analysis Parameters Dialog Box

About the

Analysis

Parameters

Dialog Box

Use the Analysis Parameters dialog box to set analysis parameter values for data processing.

The default analysis parameter values are analysis guidelines.

However, we encourage you to use this appendix as a guide for modifying these values as appropriate for each laboratory.

Example

Figure E-3 shows the Analysis Parameters dialog box with default

values for GeneScan analysis software v3.7.1 on the Windows NT operating system.

Figure E-3 Analysis Parameters dialog box displaying default values

AmpF


E-5

DRAFT


Appendix E ABI P

RISM


Data Processing: Smooth Options Parameter

About the

Parameter

The Smooth Options parameter sets the degree of smoothing applied to the display of the analyzed electropherogram. Smoothing may aid in data interpretation.

How the

Parameter Works

The Smooth Options parameter is applied after peak detection and affects only the display of analyzed electropherograms. The peak heights and areas are calculated and displayed in the tabular data display based on the “none” smoothing option. Selecting light or heavy smoothing will not affect the calculation of these values.

Smoothing

Example

Figure E-4

is an electropherogram showing the peaks from the same sample file after analysis using no smoothing (black); light smoothing (green); and heavy smoothing (red). All tabular data, including peak height and area, remain unchanged.

No smoothing (black)

Light smoothing (green)

Heavy smoothing (red)

Figure E-4 Effects of smoothing on peaks from the same sample file

E-6 AmpF


DRAFT


Data Processing: Smooth Options Parameter

Figure E-5 is an electropherogram showing the effects of smoothing

on the smaller peak and baseline when the y scale is changed from

Figure E-4 .

Figure E-5 Effects of smoothing on the smaller peak and baseline

AmpF


E-7

DRAFT


Appendix E ABI P

RISM


Peak Detection: Min. Peak Half Width Parameter

About This

Parameter

Use the Min. Peak Half Width parameter to specify the smallest full width at half maximum height for peak detection. This parameter can be used to ignore noise spikes.

How This

Parameter Works

The Min. Peak Half Width parameter defines what constitutes a peak.

The software ignores peak half widths smaller than the specified value.

The way in which this version of the software defines the minimum peak half width is different than in previous versions.

Old Versions Current Version

Half height

Half width

Half width of the peak measured from peak start

Full width

Full width of the peak measured at half its height

Figure E-6 Defining the Min. Peak Half Width

E-8 AmpF


DRAFT


Polynomial Degree and Peak Window Size

Polynomial Degree and Peak Window Size

About These

Parameters

Use the Polynomial Degree and the Peak Window Size settings to adjust the sensitivity of the peak detection. You can adjust these parameters to detect a single base pair difference while minimizing the detection of shoulder effects or noise.

Sensitivity increases with larger polynomial degree values and smaller window size values. Conversely, sensitivity decreases with smaller polynomial degree values and larger window size values.

How These

Parameters Work

The peak window size functions with the polynomial degree to set the sensitivity of peak detection.

The peak detector computes the first derivative of a polynomial curve fitted to the data within a window that is centered on each data point in the analysis range.

Using curves with larger polynomial degree values allows the curve to more closely approximate the signal and, therefore, the peak detector captures more peak structure in the electropherogram.

The peak window size sets the width (in data points) of the window to which the polynomial curve is fitted to data. Higher peak window size values smooth out the polynomial curve, which limits the structure being detected. Smaller window size values allow a curve to better fit the underlying data.

How to Use

These

Parameters

Use the table below to adjust the sensitivity of detection.

Table E-3 Sensitivity of Detection

To...

Polynomial

Degree Value

Window Size

Value

Increase Sensitivity Use...

Decrease Sensitivity Use...

Higher

Lower

Lower

Higher

AmpF


E-9

DRAFT


Appendix E ABI P

RISM


Guidelines for

Using These

Parameters

To detect well-isolated, baseline-resolved peaks, use polynomial degree values of 2 or 3. For finer control, use a degree value of 4 or greater.

As a guideline, set the peak window size (in data points) to be about

1 to 2 times the full width at half maximum height of the peaks that you want to detect.

Examining Peak

Definitions

To examine how GeneScan analysis software defines a peak, select

View > Show Peak Positions. The peak positions, including the beginning, apex, and end of each peak, are tick-marked in the electropherogram.

Effects of Varying the Polynomial

Degree

Figure E-7

is an electropherogram showing peaks detected with a window size of 15 data points and a polynomial curve of degree 2

(green); 3 (red); and 4 (black). The diamonds represent a detected peak using the respective polynomial curves.

Note that the smaller trailing peak is not detected using a degree of 2

(green). As the peak detection window is applied to each data point across the displayed region, a polynomial curve of degree 2 could not be fitted to the underlying data to detect its structure.

Polynomial curve of degree 4

(black)


(red)


(green)

Figure E-7 Peaks detected with the same window size and three different polynomial degrees

E-10 AmpF


DRAFT



Effects of

Increasing the

Window Size

Value

Figure E-8 is an electropherogram showing the same peaks that are

shown in

Figure E-7 . However, in this depiction both polynomial

curves have a degree of 3 and the window size value was increased from 15 (red) to 31(black) data points. The polynomial curve is the

same as that shown in Figure E-7

.

As the cubic polynomial is stretched to fit the data in the larger window size, the polynomial curve becomes smoother. Note that the structure of the smaller trailing peak is no longer detected as a distinct peak from the adjacent larger peak to the right.

Window size value of 31 (black)

Window size value of 15 (red)

Figure E-8 The effect of increasing window size value

AmpF


E-11

DRAFT


Appendix E ABI P

RISM


Optimizing Peak Detection Sensitivity: Example 1

Initial

Electropherogram

Figure E-9

is an electropherogram showing two resolved alleles of known fragment lengths (that differ by one nucleotide) detected as a single peak. The analysis was performed using a polynomial degree of 3 and a peak window size of 19 data points.

Figure E-9 Two resolved alleles detected as a single peak

Note:

For information on the tick marks displayed in the electropherogram, see

“Examining Peak Definitions” on page E-10

.

E-12 AmpF


DRAFT



Effects of

Decreasing the

Window Size

Value

Figure E-10 is an electropherogram showing that both alleles are

detected after re-analyzing with the polynomial degree set to 3 while decreasing the window size value to 15 (from 19) data points.

Figure E-10 Alleles detected as two peaks after decreasing the window size value

AmpF


E-13

DRAFT


Appendix E ABI P

RISM



Initial


Figure E-11 is an electropherogram showing an analysis performed

using a polynomial degree of 3 and a peak window size of 19 data points.

Figure E-11 Four resolved peaks detected as two peaks

E-14 AmpF


DRAFT



Effects of

Reducing the

Window Size

Value and

Increasing the

Polynomial

Degree Value

Figure E-12 is an electropherogram showing the data presented in

Figure E-11

re-analyzed with a window size value of 10 and polynomial degree value of 5.

Figure E-12 All four peaks detected after reducing window size value and increasing polynomial degree value

AmpF


E-15

DRAFT


Appendix E ABI P

RISM



Effects of

Extreme Settings

Figure E-13

is an electropherogram showing the result of an analysis using a peak window size value set to 10 and a polynomial degree set to 9. This extreme setting for peak detection led to several peaks being split and detected as two separate peaks.

Figure E-13 Analysis using extreme settings for peak detection

E-16 AmpF


DRAFT


Parameters for Peak Detection of Slope Threshold

Parameters for Peak Detection of Slope Threshold

About These

Parameters

Use the Slope Threshold for Peak Start and Slope Threshold for Peak

End parameters to adjust the start and end points of a peak. Use this parameter to position the start and end points of an asymmetrical peak, or a poorly resolved shouldering peak, to more accurately reflect the peak position and area.

How These

Parameters Work

In general, from left to right, the slope of a peak increases from the baseline to the apex. From the apex down to the baseline, the slope becomes decreasingly negative until it returns to zero at the baseline.

Apex

Increasingly positive slope

(+)

Baseline

0

Figure E-14 Sample of slope of a peak

Increasingly negative slope

(–)

0

If either of the slope values you have entered exceeds the slope of the peak being detected, the software overrides your value and reverts to zero.

Guidelines for

Using These

Parameters

As a guideline, use a value of zero for typical or symmetrical peaks.

Select values other than zero to better reflect the beginning and end points of asymmetrical peaks.

A value of zero will not affect the sizing accuracy or precision for an asymmetrical peak.

AmpF


E-17

DRAFT


Appendix E ABI P

RISM


Using These

Parameters

Use the table below to move the start or end point of a peak.

If you want to move the...

Then change the...

start point of a peak closer to its apex

Slope Threshold for Peak Start value from zero to a positive number

end point of a peak closer to its apex

Slope Threshold for Peak End value to an increasingly negative number

Note:

The size of a detected peak is the calculated apex between the start and end points of a peak and will not change based on your settings.

Slope Threshold Example

Initial


In the electropherogram in Figure E-15 , the initial analysis with a

value of 0 for both the Slope Threshold for Peak Start and the Slope

Threshold for Peak End value produced an asymmetrical peak with a noticeable tail on the right side.

Figure E-15 Asymmetrical peak

E-18 AmpF


DRAFT


Parameters for Peak Detection of Slope Threshold


After Adjustments

.

After re-analyzing with a value of -35.0 for the Slope Threshold for

Peak End, the end point that defines the peak moves closer to its apex, thereby removing the tailing feature. In the electropherogram shown in

Figure E-16 , note that the only change to tabular data was the area

(peak size and height are unchanged).

Figure E-16 Effect of changing the slope threshold for peak end

AmpF


E-19

DRAFT


Appendix E ABI P

RISM


Baseline Window Size Parameter

About This

Parameter

Use the Baseline Window Size parameter to control the baseline for a group of peaks.

How This

Parameter Works

The software determines a reference baseline value for each data point. In general, the software sets the reference baseline to be the lowest value that it detects in a specified window size (in data points) centered on each data point.

A small baseline window relative to the width of a cluster, or grouping of peaks spatially close to each other, can cause shorter peak heights.

Larger baseline windows relative to the peaks being detected can create an elevated baseline, resulting in peaks that are elevated or not baseline resolved.

Guidelines for

Using This

Parameter

As a guideline, choose a value that encompasses the width in data points of the peaks being detected while preserving a qualitatively smooth baseline. The trade-off for a smoother baseline that touches all peaks is a reduction in peak height.

Baselining

Example

Figure E-17

depicts an allelic ladder containing clusters of alleles.

The alleles have been labeled with green dye and the data displayed has been multicomponented, but not baselined. The electropherogram spans approximately 2800 data points.

The red, blue, and black traces depict various reference baselines

(zero in the analyzed electropherogram) that result from different baseline window size settings. These reference baselines are subtracted from the sample data during baselining. In

Figure E-17 :

• The red trace depicts the reference baseline that results from an extreme baseline window size value of 2801. At this setting, the reference baseline does not touch all peaks, resulting in elevated peak heights.

• The blue trace depicts the reference baseline that results from the default value of 51 data points.

E-20 AmpF


DRAFT


Baseline Window Size Parameter

• The black trace depicts the reference baseline that results from an extreme baseline window size value of 5 data points. At this setting, the peaks are tracked too closely by the reference baseline, resulting in significantly reduced peak height.

Figure E-17 Baselining of an electropherogram

AmpF


E-21

DRAFT


Appendix E ABI P

RISM


Baselining Example 1

Initial


Figure E-18

shows a portion of the electropherogram shown in

Figure E-17

, which depicts various window sizes. The electropherogram shows the default Baseline Window Size value of

51 that appears in Figure E-17 as the blue trace. Note that all peaks in

this cluster have been baselined.

Figure E-18 An allelic ladder with a cluster of peaks

E-22 AmpF


DRAFT



Effects of

Extreme Increase of the Baseline

Window Size

Figure E-19 is an electropherogram showing an extreme Baseline

Window Size value of 2801 that appears in Figure E-17 as the red

trace (2801 is approximately the width in data points of all the peaks shown). This increase resulted in an overall raised baseline and many elevated peaks within the cluster.

Figure E-19 Raised baseline caused by an increase in the baseline window size value

AmpF


E-23

DRAFT


Appendix E ABI P

RISM


Effects of

Extreme

Decrease of the

Baseline Window

Size

Figure E-20

is an electropherogram showing an extreme Baseline

Window Size value of 5 that appears in Figure E-17

as the black trace

(5 is much smaller than the width in data points for any of the peaks prior to baselining). This decrease resulted in a significant decrease in the peak heights.

Figure E-20 Significantly reduced peak heights caused by a reduction in the baseline window size value

E-24 AmpF


DRAFT




Initial


Figure E-21 is an electropherogram showing an analysis of a cluster

of peaks using the default Baseline Window Size value of 51 data points.

Figure E-21 Typical result using the default baseline window size value

AmpF


E-25

DRAFT


Appendix E ABI P

RISM


Effects of

Extreme

Decrease of the

Baseline Window

Size

Figure E-22

is an electropherogram showing the re-analysis of the electropherogram shown in

Figure E-21 with an extreme Baseline

Window Size value of 5. All peaks within the cluster have been baselined and have dramatically reduced peak heights.

Figure E-22 Reduction in the baseline window size value

E-26 AmpF


DRAFT




Raw Data

The data in the electropherogram in

Figure E-23 have been

multicomponented but not baselined. There are two pull-down peaks in the blue trace below the two major green peaks (see arrows).

Figure E-23 Raw data multicomponented but not baselined

AmpF


E-27

DRAFT


Appendix E ABI P

RISM


Raised Baseline

After analyzing with a baseline window size of 251 data points, the low points represented in the blue trace (within this 251 data point window) are set to zero. Setting the pull-down traces to zero results in a raised baseline between these points, as shown in the

electropherogram in Figure E-24 .

Figure E-24 A raised baseline

E-28 AmpF


DRAFT



Eliminating

Raised Baseline

After re-analyzing with a baseline window size of 51 data points (a window size range between the pull-down peaks), the raised baseline is eliminated. This results in a more accurate baseline.

Figure E-25 Re-analyzed baseline with window size of 51 data points

AmpF


E-29

DRAFT


Appendix E ABI P

RISM


Size Caller

About the Size

Caller

The size caller matches size-standard peaks with a quality check.

How the Size

Caller Works

The way in which the fragment sizes are calculated has not changed from previous versions of the software (e.g., local southern).

However, the way in which the Windows NT version of the software identifies the size standard is different from previous versions.

Method for Identifying the Size Standard

Macintosh Versions

User assigns fragment sizes to particular peaks based on scan number

Windows NT Version

Software matches the size standard fragments by ratio matching based on relative distance between neighboring peaks

Macintosh

Version

In GeneScan analysis software for the Macintosh operating system, the size standard peaks are identified based on their mobility and assignment within a run or a previous run.

E-30 AmpF


DRAFT


Size Caller

Base Pair 50 100

Anomalous peaks outside of a ±10 data point bin are ignored, but those within the bins can be incorrectly called resulting in an incorrect size curve. In that case, you must redefine a new size standard for that particular sample.

200 400

Defining the Size Standard

The boxes show a

±

30 data point range used to identify size standard peaks in subsequent runs.

Data Point 100 200 400 800

Data (100, 200, 400, and 800) shown with anomalous peak dotted.

Base Pair 50 100 200 400

Data Point 100 200 400 800

Assigning Peaks that fall into the correct range. The anomalous peak is ignored.

500

400

300

200

100

0

0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900

Data point

Constructing Size Standard

Curve for sample file using specified sizing method, e.g.,

Local Southern.

Figure E-26 Peak identification with GeneScan analysis software for the Macintosh operating system

AmpF


E-31

DRAFT


Appendix E ABI P

RISM


Windows NT

Version

GeneScan analysis software for the Windows NT operating system uses ratio matching to identify the size standard fragments.

Ratio matching does not rely on the manual assignment of size standard definitions (in base pairs) to their associated data points within a run or a previous run. Selecting a peak in the electropherogram to enter an associated value in the Size column now serves only as a guide. Simply listing the values to be used for sizing as an array of numbers without regard to the highlighted peak is sufficient.

Figure E-27 Electropherogram showing a selected peak and the associated value in the Size column

The size caller ignores anomalous peaks that do not match the expected ratio. The size caller constructs a best-fit curve using the data points of each size standard fragment detected. A comparison between the sizes calculated from the best-fit curve and the matched peaks from the size standard definition using the array of numbers is performed. Size calling will fail if significant differences are found or if no match can be made based on the expected ratios. (In

Figure

E-28

, that is x, 2x, and 4x.)

E-32 AmpF


DRAFT


Base pair

50 100 x 2x

200

Data point

100 200 400

Size Caller

Additionally, you may find that one of the size fragments has not been identified, even though it was listed as part of the definition. The size caller has been designed to allow the exclusion of one of the listed values to obtain a better match. To use an excluded fragment, try the steps outlined in

Figure E-29 .

Base pair 50 100 x 2x

200

4x

400

Defining the

Size Standard

from a list of sizes (50, 100,

200, and 400) used to calculate the expected ratios

(in red).

Scan # 100 200 400 800

4x

400

800

Base pair

50 100 x 2x

200 less than

4x

Data point

100 200 400

400

Data

(100, 200,

400, 800) shown with anomalous peak dotted.

800

500

400

300

200

100

0

0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900

Data point

Generating the

Size Standard

Curve when a good ratio match is found.

Figure E-28 Peak identification with GeneScan analysis software for the Windows NT operating system

AmpF


E-33

DRAFT


Appendix E ABI P

RISM


GeneScan

Macintosh version

All peaks present in size standard are detected.

GeneScan

Windows NT version

All peaks present in size standard are detected.

Information in the size standard definition is used to select the peaks of the size standard

(±10 data points from the position defined in the Size Standard file).

Fail

Pass

Size standard curve is constructed using the method selected by the user (e.g., local southern).

New standard for failed sample is defined, regardless of migration or quality.

Size standard curve used to size all peaks in sample.

Information in the size standard definition is used to select the peaks of the size standard

(ratio matching is used based on the list of sizes defined in the Size

Standard file).

Sample is not sized.

Best fit curve of the detected sized standard fragments is constructed.

For each peak in the size standard, the matched size of the peak is compared to the calculated size using the best fit curve previously constructed.

If the sizes differ significantly or the peaks cannot be found, the sizing fails.

Fail

Pass

Size standard curve is constructed using the method selected by the user (e.g., local southern).

Size standard curve used to size all peaks in sample.

The user should:

1. Make sure all fragments listed in the size standard definition are reflected in the analysis range.

2. Make sure the primer peak is not interfering with smaller fragments. If it is, exclude the primer peak from the analysis.

3. Make sure the higher fragments are resolved.

If they are not, reduce the analysis range and change the size standard definition to reflect the missing peaks.

4. Attempt to get a better ratio match by changing the size standard definition and analysis range to analyze a smaller range containing only peaks of interest, if plausible.

5. Attempt to guess values for any split peaks so that every peak displayed has a value.

Figure E-29 Peak sizing flowcharts

E-34 AmpF


DRAFT


References

F

F

Akane, A., Matsubara, K., Nakamura, H., Takahashi, S., and Kimura,

K. 1994. Identification of the heme compound copurified with deoxyribonucleic acid (DNA) from bloodstains, a major inhibitor of polymerase chain reaction (PCR) amplification. J. Forensic Sci.

39:362–372.

American Association of Blood Banks. 1999. Standards for

Parentage Testing Laboratories.

Amorin, A., Alves, C., Gusmao. L. 2000. Somatic and Germinal

Mutations in STRs. Progress in Forensic Genetics 8, Eds. G.F.

Sensabaugh, et al; Elsevier Science; pp. 37–39.

Andersen, J.F., Greenhalgh M.J., Butler, et al. 1996. Further validation of a multiplex STR system for use in routine forensic identity testing. Forensic Sci. Int. 78:47–64.

Bär, W., Brinkmann, B., Budowle, B., et al. 1997. DNA recommendations. Further report of the DNA Commission of the

ISFH regarding the use of short tandem repeat systems. Intl. J. Legal

Med. 110:175–176.

Barber, M.D., Piercy, R.C., Andersen, J.F., and Parkin, B.H. 1995.

Structural variation of novel alleles at the Hum vWA and Hum

FES/FPS short tandem repeat loci. Intl. J. Legal Med. 108:31–35.

Barber, M.D., McKeown, B.J., and Parkin, B.H. 1996. Structural variation in the alleles of a short tandem repeat system at the human alpha fibrinogen locus. Intl. J. Legal Med. 108:180–185.

Barber, M.D., and Parkin, B.H. 1996. Sequence analysis and allelic designation of the two short tandem repeat loci D18S51 and

D8S1179. Intl. J. Legal Med. 109:62–65.

Baron, H., Fung, S., Aydin, A., Bahring, S., Luft, F.C., Schuster, H.

1996. Oligonucleotide ligation assay (OLA) for the diagnosis of familial hypercholesterolemia. Nature Biotechnol. 14(10):1279-82.

Begovich, A.B., McClure, G.R., Suraj, V.C., et al. 1992.

Polymorphism, recombination, and linkage disequilibrium within the

HLA Class II region. J. Immunol. 148:249–258.

AmpF


DRAFT

March 22, 2012 2:04 pm, F_References.fm

F-1

Appendix F References

Brinkmann, B., Moller, A., and Wiegand, P. 1995. Structure of new mutations in 2 STR systems. Int. J. Legal Med. 107:201–203.

Brinkmann, B., Junge, A., Meyer, E., and Wiegand, P. 1998.

Population genetic diversity in relation to microsatellite heterogeneity. Hum. Mutat. 11:135–144.

Brinkmann, B., Klintschar, M., Neuhuber, F., Huhne, J., and Rolf, B.

1998. Mutation rate in human microsatellites: Influence of the structure and length of the tandem repeat. Am. J. Hum. Genet.

62:1408–1415.

Brown, A.H.D., Feldman, M.W., and Nevo, E. 1980. Multilocus structure of natural populations of Hordeum spontaneum. Genetics

96:523–536.

Budowle, B., Baechtel, F.S., Smerick, J.B., et al. 1995. D1S80 population data in African Americans, Caucasians, southeastern

Hispanics, southwestern Hispanics, and Orientals. J. Forensic Sci

40:38–44.

Budowle, B., Moretti, T.R., Neizgoda, S.J., and Brown, B. 1998a.

CODIS and PCR-Based Short Tandem Repeat Loci: Law

Enforcement Tools. Second European Symposium on Human

Identification. 73-88.

Budowle, B., Baechkel, F., Fejeren, R. 1998b. Polymarker,

HLA-DQAQ, and D1S80 allele frequency data in Chamorro and

Filipino populations from Guam. J. Forensic Sci. 43(6):1195-1198.

Budowle, B., DeFenbaugh, D.A., Keys, K.M. 2000. Genetic variation at nine short tandem repeat loci in Chammorros and Filipinos. Legal

Medicine. 2(1):26-30.

Buel, E., Wang, G., and Schwartz, M. 1995. PCR amplification of animal DNA with human X-Y amelogenin primers used in gender determination. J. Forensic Sci. 40:641–644.

Buel, E., Schwartz, M.B., and LaFountain, M.J. 1998. Capillary STR analysis: Comparison to gel-based systems. J. Forensic Sci.

43(1):164–170.

Buel, E., LaFountain, M., Schwartz, M., and Walkinshaw, M. 2001

Evaluation of capillary electrophoresis performance through resolution measurements. J. Forensic Sci. 46(2):341–345.

Butler, J. 2001. Forensic DNA Typing. Academic Press. San Diego,

CA.

F-2 AmpF


DRAFT


Chakraborty, R., Smouse, P.E., and Neel, J.V. 1988. Population amalgamation and genetic variation: observations on artificially agglomerated tribal populations of Central and South America.

Am. J. Hum. Genet. 43:709–725.

Chakraborty, R., Fornage, M., Guegue, R., and Boerwinkle, E. 1991.

Population genetics of hypervariable loci: analysis of PCR based

VNTR polymorphism within a population. In: Burke, T., Doif, G.,

Jeffreys, A.J., and Wolff, R., eds. DNA Fingerprinting: Approaches

and Applications. Birkhauser Verlag, Berlin, pp. 127–143.

Chakraborty, R., and Stivers, D.N. 1996. Paternity exclusion by DNA markers: effects of paternal mutations. J. Forensic Sci. 41:671–677.

Chakraborty, R., Stivers, D., and Zhong, Y. 1996. Estimation of mutation rates from parentage exclusion data: applications to STR and VNTR loci. Mutat. Res. 354:41–48.

Chakraborty, R., Kimmel, M., Stivers, D., Davison, L., and Deka, R.

1997. Relative mutation rates at di-, tri-, and tetranucleotide microsatellite loci. Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 94:1041–1046.

Clark, J.M. 1988. Novel non-templated nucleotide addition reactions catalyzed by prokaryotic and eukaryotic DNA polymerases. Nucleic

Acids Res. 16:9677–9686.

Comey, C.T., Koons, B.W., Presley, K.W., et al. 1994. DNA extraction strategies for amplified fragment length polymorphism analysis. J. Forensic Sci. 39:1254–1269.

Cone, R.W., and Fairfax, M.R. 1993. Protocol for ultraviolet irradiation of surfaces to reduce PCR contamination. PCR Methods

Appl. 3:S15–S17.

Cotton, E., Allsop, R., Guest, J., et al. 2000. Validation of the

AmpFlSTR ®

SGM Plus

™ system for use in forensic casework.

Forensic Sci. Int. 112(2–3):151–161.

D2S1338. Cooperative Human Linkage Center (CHLC) accession number 41445. GenBank accession number G08202.

D16S539. Cooperative Human Linkage Center (CHLC) accession number 715. GenBank accession number G07925.

D19S433 Cooperative Human Linkage Center (CHLC) accession number 135. GenBank accession number G08036.

AmpF


DRAFT


F-3


DeFranchis, R., Cross, N.C.P., Foulkes, N.S., and Cox, T.M. 1988. A potent inhibitor of Taq DNA polymerase copurifies with human genomic DNA. Nucleic Acids Res. 16:10355.

DNA Advisory Board, Federal Bureau of Investigation, U.S.

Department of Justice. 1998. Quality assurance standards for forensic DNA testing laboratories.

DNA Recommendations. 1994. Report concerning further recommendations of the DNA Commission of the ISFH regarding

PCR-based polymorphisms in STR (short tandem repeat) systems.

Intl. J. Legal Med. 107:159–160.

Edwards, A., Civitello, A., Hammond, H., and Caskey, C. 1991. DNA typing and genetic mapping with trimeric and tetrameric tandem repeats. Am. J. Hum. Genet. 49:746–756.

Edwards, A., Hammond, H.A., Lin, J., Caskey, C.T., and

Chakraborty, R. 1992. Genetic variation at five trimeric and tetrameric tandem repeat loci in four human population groups.

Genomics 12:241–253.

Frank, W., Llewellyn, B., Fish, P., et al. 2001. Validation of the

AmpFlSTR

®

Profiler Plus

™

PCR Amplification Kit for use in forensic casework. J. Forensic Sci. 46(3):642–646.

Frank, W.E. and Llewellyn, B.E. 1999. A time course study on STR profiles derived from human bone, muscle, and bone marrow. J.

Forensic Sci. 44(4):778–782.

Frégeau, C.J., and Fourney, R.M. 1993. DNA typing with fluorescently tagged short tandem repeats: a sensitive and accurate approach to human identification. Biotechniques 15:100–119.

Fregeau, C.J., Leclair, B., Bowen, K., Elliott, J., Borys, S., and

Fourney, R. 2000. The Swissair Flight 111 disaster: Short tandem repeat mutations observed. Progress in Forensic Genetics 8, Eds.

G.F. Sensabaugh, et al; Elsevier Science; pp. 40–42.

Fregeau, C.J., Germain, O., and Fourney, R.M. 2000. Fingerprint enhancement revisited and the effects of blood enhancement chemicals on subsequent Profiler Plus™ fluorescent short tandem repeat DNA analysis of fresh and aged bloody fingerprints. J.

Forensic Sci. 45(2):354–380.

Gill, P., Urquart, A., Millican, E., et al. 1996. A new method of STR interpretation using inferential logic—development of a criminal intelligence database. Int. J. Leg. Med. 109:14–22.

F-4 AmpF


DRAFT


Gill, P., d’Aloja, E., Andersen, J., et al. 1997. Report of the European

DNA Profiling Group (EDNAP): an investigation of the complex

STR loci D21S11 and HUMFIBRA (FGA).

Grossman, P.D., Bloch, W., Brinson, E., et al. 1994. High-density multiplex detection of nucleic acid sequences: oligonucleotide ligation assay and sequence-coded separation. Nucleic Acids Res.

22(21):4527-34.

Guo, S.W., and Thompson, E.A. 1992. Performing the exact test of

Hardy-Weinbergproprtion for multiple alleles. Biometrics

48:361–372.

Hartl, D.L., and Clark, A.G. 1989. Principles of population genetics,

2nd edition. Sunderland, MA: Sinauer Associates, Inc.

Hammond, H., Jin, L., Zhong, Y, Caskey, C., and Chakraborty, R.

1994. Evaluation of 13 short tandem repeat loci for use in personal identification applications. Am. J. Hum. Genet. 55:175–189.

Holt, C., Stauffer, C., Wallin, J., et al. 2000. Practical applications of genotypic surveys for forensic STR testing. Forensic Sci. Int.

112(2,3):91–109.

Holt, C., Bouncristiani, M., Wallin, J., Nguyen, T., Lazaruk, K., and

Walsh, P. 2002. TWGDAM validation of AmpFlSTR ® PCR

Amplification Kits for forensic DNA casework. J. Forensic Sci.

47(1):15–45.

Holt, C.L., Bouncristiani, Wallin, J.M., Nguyen, T., Lazaruk, K.D., and Walsh, P.S. 2002. TWGDAM validation of AmpFlSTR PCR amplification kits for forensic DNA casework. J. Forensic Sci.

47:66–96.

Karlin, S., Cameron, E.C., and Williams, P.T. 1981. Sibling and parent offspring correlation estimation with variable family size.

Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. (USA) 78:2664–2668.

Kimpton, C., Walton, A., and Gill, P. 1992. A further tetranucleotide repeat polymorphism in the vWF gene. Hum. Mol. Genet. 1:287.

Kimpton, C.P., Gill, P., Walton, A., et al. 1993. Automated DNA profiling employing multiplex amplification of short tandem repeat loci. PCR Methods Appl. 3:13–22.

Kimpton, C.P., Oldroyd, N.J., Watson, S.K., et al. 1996. Validation of highly discriminating multiplex short tandem repeat amplification systems for human identification. Electrophoresis 17:1283–1293.

AmpF


DRAFT


F-5


Kinsey, P., and Hormann, S. 2000. Modification of the stutter position label-filtering macro in the PE Biosystems Genotyper®

Version 2.5 software package: Resolution of stutter-filter back talk.

Forensic Sci. Commun. 2(3).

Kwok, S., and Higuchi, R. 1989. Avoiding false positives with PCR.

Nature 339:237–238.

Lazaruk, K., Walsh, P.S., Oaks, F., et al. 1998. Genotyping of forensic short tandem repeat (STR) systems based on sizing precision in a capillary electrophoresis instrument. Electrophoresis

19(1):86–93.

Lazaruk, K., Wallin, J., Holt, C., Nguyen, T., and Walsh, P.S. 2001.

Sequence variation in humans and other primates at six short tandem repeat loci used in forensic identity testing. Forensic Sci. Int.

119:1–10.

Lareu, M.-V., Barral, S., Salas, A., Rodriguez, M., Pestoni, C., and

Carracedo, A. 1998. Further exploration of new STRs of interest for forensic genetic analysis. In: Progress in Forensic Genetics 7:

Proceedings of the 17th International ISFH Congress, Oslo 2-6

September 1997. Olaisen, B., Brinkmann, B., and Lincoln, P.J., eds.

Amsterdam: Elsevier. 192–200.

Leclair, B., Fregeau, C.J., Bowen, K.L., Borys, S.B., Elliott, J., and

Fourney, R.M. 2000. Enhanced kinship analysis and STR-based

DNA typing for human identification in mass disasters. Progress in

Forensic Genetics 8, Eds. G.F. Sensabaugh, et al; Elsevier Science; pp. 46–48.

Li, H., Schmidt, L., Wei, M.-H., et al. 1993. Three tetranucleotide polymorphisms for loci: D3S1352; D3S1358; D3S1359. Hum. Mol.

Genet. 2:1327.

Liu, C.Y., Takayanagi, K., Asamura, H., Ota, M., Fukushima, H.,

2000. Study on ACTBP2 Mutations in Japanese. Progress in Forensic

Genetics 8, Eds. G.F. Sensabaugh, et al; Elsevier Science; pp. 46–48.

Luna, L.G., ed. 1968. Manual of Histologic Staining Methods of the

Armed Forces Institute of Pathology, McGraw-Hill Book Co., New

York.

Magnuson, V.L., Ally, D.S., Nylund, S.J., et al. 1996. Substrate nucleotide-determined non-templated addition of adenine by Taq

DNA polymerase: Implications for PCR-based genotyping and cloning. Biotechniques 21:700–709.

F-6 AmpF


DRAFT


Mancuso, D.J., Tuley, E.A., Westfield, L.A., Worrall, N.K.,

Shelton-Inloes, B.B., Sorace, J.M., Alevy, Y.G., and Sadler, J.E. 1989.

Structure of the gene for human von Willebrand factor. J. Biol. Chem.

264:19514–19527.

Mansfield, E.S., Robertson, J.M., Vainer, M., et al. 1998. Analysis of multiplexed short (STR) systems using capillary array electrophoresis. Electrophoresis 19(1):101–107.

Meyer, E., Wiegand, P., Rand, S., Kuhlmann, D., Brack, M., and

Brinkmann, B. 1995. Microsatellite polymorphisms reveal phylogenetic relationships in primates. J. Mol. Evol. 41(1):10–4.

Mills, K.A., Even, D., and Murray, J.C. 1992. Tetranucelotide repeat polymorphism at the human alpha fibrinogen locus (FGA). Hum.

Mol. Genet. 1:779.

Möller, A., Meyer, E., and Brinkmann, B. 1994. Different types of structural variation in STRs: HumFES/FPS, HumVWA, and

HumD21S11. Intl. J. Legal Med. 106:319–323.

Möller, A., and Brinkmann, B. 1995. PCR-VNTRs (PCR—Variable

Number of Tandem Repeats) in forensic science. Cell. Mol. Biol.

41:715–724.

Möller, A., Schurenkamp, M., and Brinkmann, B. 1995. Evaluation of an ACTBP2 ladder composed of 26 sequenced alleles. Int. J. Legal

Med. 108:75–78.

Momhinweg, E., Luckenbach, C., Fimmers, R., and Ritter, H. 1998.

D3S1358: sequence analysis and gene frequency in a German population. Forensic Sci. Int. 95:173–178.

Moretti, T., Baumstark, A., Defenbaugh, D., Keys, K., Smerick, J., and Budowle, B. 2001. Validation of short tandem repeats (STRs) for forensic usage: Performance testing of fluorescent multiplex STR systems and analysis of authentic and simulated forensic samples.

J. Forensic Sci. 46(3):647–660.

Nakahori, Y., Takenaka, O., and Nakagome, Y. 1991. A human X-Y homologous region encodes “amelogenin.” Genomics 9:264–269.

National Research Council. 1996. The evaluation of forensic DNA

evidence. National Academy Press, Washington, D.C.

Nei, M., and Roychoudhury, A.K. 1974. Sampling variances of heterozygosity and genetic distance. Genetics 76:379–390.

AmpF


DRAFT


F-7


Nei, M. 1978. Estimation of average heterozygosity and genetic distance from a small number of individuals. Genetics 89:583–590.

Oldroyd, N.J., Urquhart, A.J., Kimpton, C.P., Millican, E.S., Watson,

S.K., Downes, T., and Gill, P.D. 1995. A highly discriminating octoplex short tandem repeat polymerase chain reaction system suitable for human individual identification. Electrophoresis

16:334–337.

Oppitz, E. 1969. Eine neue farbemethode zum nachweis der spermein bei sittlichkeitsdelicten. Arch Kriminol 144:145–148.

Prince, A.M., and Andrus, L. 1992. PCR—How to kill unwanted

DNA. Biotechniques 12:358.

Puers, C., Hammond, H., Jin, L., Caskey, C., and Schumm, J. 1993.

Identification of repeat sequence heterogeneity at the polymorphic short tandem repeat locus HUMTH01 [AATG]

J. Hum. Genet. 53:953–958.

n

and reassignment of alleles in population analysis using a locus-specific allelic ladder. Am.

Sambrook, J., Fritsch, E.F., and Maniatis, T., eds. 1989. Molecular

Cloning: A Laboratory Manual, 2nd Edition, Volume 2. Cold Spring

Harbor Laboratory Press, New York, pp. E10–E14.

Sensabaugh, G.F. 1982. Biochemical markers of individuality. In:

Saferstein, R., ed. Forensic Science Handbook. Prentice-Hall, Inc.,

New York, pp. 338–415.

Sensabaugh G.F., von Beroldingen C. et al. 1991. The polymerase chain reaction: application to the analysis of biological evidence. In:

Farley, MA, Harrington, JJ, editors. Forensic DNA Technology.

Michigan: Lewis, 1991:63–82.

Shadravan, F. 2001. Sizing Precision and Reproducibility Studies of

AmpFlSTR ® Kits with ABI P

RISM

® 3100 Genetic Analyzer.

Proc. Am. Acad. Forensic Sci. 7:26.

Shadravan, F., Roby, R.K., Reeder, D.J. 2002. Characterization of

AmpFlSTR

®

Identifiler™ PCR Amplification Kit for use with

ABI P

RISM

®

3100 Genetic Analyzer. Proc. Am. Acad. Forensic Sci.

8:27.

Sharma, V., and Litt, M. 1992. Tetranucleotide repeat polymorphism at the D21S11 locus. Hum. Mol. Genet. 1:67.

Singer-Sam, J., and Tanguay, R. 1989. Use of Chelex to improve the

PCR signal from a small number of cells. Amplifications 3:11.

F-8 AmpF


DRAFT


Smith, R.N. 1995. Accurate size comparison of short tandem repeat alleles amplified by PCR. Biotechniques 18:122–128.

Sparkes, R., Kimpton, C., Gilbard, S., et al. 1996. The validation of a

7-locus multiplex STR test for use in forensic casework (II)

Artefacts, casework studies and success rates. Int. J. Legal Med.

109:195–204.

Sparkes, R., Kimpton, C., Watson, S., et al. 1996. The validation of a

7-locus multiplex STR test for use in forensic casework (I) Mixtures, ageing, degradation and species studies. Int. J. Legal Med.

109:186–194.

Straub, R.E., Speer, M.C., Luo, Y., Rojas, K., Overhauser, J., Ott, J., and Gilliam, T.C. 1993. A microsatellite genetic linkage map of human chromosome 18. Genomics 15:48–56.

Sullivan, K.M., Mannucci, A., Kimpton, C.P., and Gill, P. 1993. A rapid and quantitative DNA sex test: fluorescence-based PCR analysis of X-Y homologous gene amelogenin. Biotechniques

15:636–641.

Sweet, D., and Hildebrand, D. 1999. Saliva from cheese bite yields

DNA profile of burglar: A case report. Int. J. Legal Med.

112(3):201-203.

Szibor, R., Lautsch, S., Plate, I., Bender, K., and Krause, D. 1998.

Population genetic data of the STR HumD3S1358 in two regions of

Germany. Int. J. Legal Med. 111:160–161.

Tanaka, M., Yoshimoto, T., Nozawa, H., et al. 2000. Usefulness of a toothbrush as a source of evidential DNA for typing. J. Forensic Sci.

45(3):674–676.

Technical Working Group on DNA Analysis Methods. 1995.

Guidelines for a quality assurance program for DNA analysis. Crime

Lab. Digest 22:21–43.

Urquhart, A., Kimpton, C.P., and Gill, P. 1993. Sequence variability of the tetranucleotide repeat of the human beta-actin related pseudogene H-beta-Ac-psi-2 (ACTBP2) locus. Hum. Genet.

92:637–638.

Urquhart, A., Oldroyd, N.J., Kimpton, C.P., and Gill, P. 1995. Highly discriminating heptaplex short tandem repeat PCR system for forensic identification. Biotechniques 18:116–121.

AmpF


DRAFT


F-9


U.S. Department of Health and Human Services. 1993. Biosafety in

Microbiological and Biomedical Laboratories, 3rd edition, U.S.

Government Printing Office.

U.S. Department of Health and Human Services. OSHA Bloodborne

Pathogen Standard 29 CFR, part 1910. 1030.

Wallin, J., Buoncristiani, M., Lazaruk, K., Fildes, N., Holt, C., and

Walsh, P. 1998. TWGDAM validation of the AmpFlSTR Blue PCR

Amplification Kit for forensic casework analysis. J. Forensic Sci.

43(4):854–870.

Wallin, J., Holt, C., Lazaruk, K., Nguyen, T., and Walsh, P. 2002.

Constructing universal multiplex PCR systems for comparative genotyping. J Forensic Sci. 47(1):1–14.

Wallin, J.M., Holt, C.L., Lazaruk, K.D., Nguyen, T.H., and Walsh,

P.S. 2002. Constructing universal multiplex PCR systems for comparative genotyping. J Forensic Sci. 47:52-65.

Walsh, P.S., Metzger, D.A., and Higuchi, R. 1991. Chelex 100 as a medium for simple extraction of DNA for PCR-based typing from forensic material. Biotechniques 10:506–518.

Walsh, P.S., Erlich, H.A., and Higuchi, R. 1992. Preferential PCR amplification of alleles: mechanisms and solutions. PCR Methods

Appl. 1: 241–250.

Walsh, P.S., Varlaro, J., and Reynolds, R. 1992. A rapid chemiluminescent method for quantitation of human DNA. Nucleic

Acids Res. 20:5061–5065.

Walsh, P.S., Fildes, N.J., and Reynolds, R. 1996. Sequence analysis and characterization of stutter products at the tetranucleotide repeat locus vWA. Nucleic Acids Res. 24:2807–2812.

Watson, S., Kelsey, Z., Webb, R., Evans, J., and Gill, P. 1998. The development of a third generation STR multiplex system (TGM). In:

Olaisen, B., Brinkmann, B., and Lincoln, P.J., eds. Progress in

Forensic Genetics 7: Proceedings of the 17th International ISFH

Congress, Oslo 2-6 September 1997. Elsevier, Amsterdam, pp.

192–194.

Watson, S., Allsop. R., Foreman. L., Kelsey, Z., and Gill.P. 2001.

Sequenced allelic ladders and population genetics of a new STR multiplex system. Forensic Sci. Int. 115(3):207–217.

F-10 AmpF


DRAFT


Weber, J., and Wong, C. 1993. Mutation of human short tandem repeats. Hum Mol. Genet. 2:1123–1128.

Weir, B.S. 1996. Genetic Data Analysis II. Sunderland, MA: Sinauer

Associates, Inc.

Weir, B.S. 1992. Independence of VNTR alleles defined by fixed bins. Genetics 130:873–887.

Ziegle, J.S., Su, Y., Corcoran, K.P., et al. 1992. Application of automated DNA sizing technology for genotyping microsatellite loci.

Genomics 14:1026–1031.

AmpF


DRAFT


F-11


F-12 AmpF


DRAFT


Index

A

A nucleotide addition by AmpliTaq Gold to 3´ end of amplicon

8-29

ABI P

RISM

310 Genetic Analyzer protocol

3-3

,

4-31

,

5-32

data analysis

4-19

,

4-23

,

5-19

,

5-23

ending the run

4-28

,

5-29

preparing and loading samples

4-15

,

5-15

sample electrophoresis

4-17

,

5-16

setting up a run

3-6

,

4-3

,

5-3

setting up the instrument

3-4

using POP-4 polymer for analysis

4-2

,

4-28

,

5-2

,

5-29

ABI P

RISM

377 DNA Sequencer protocols

6-2

,

6-34

data analysis

6-25

dedicated equipment and supplies

6-31

loading samples

6-23

preparing gels

6-3

preparing samples

6-21

running the plate check and prerun modules

6-18


6-24


6-15

setting up the preprocess and analysis parameters

6-10

agarose gel, using to examine DNA

8-38

AmpFlSTR Allelic Ladders calculating precision data using the allelic ladders

8-6

known alleles in the allelic ladders

1-4

using to determine genotypes

9-20

,

9-22

,

10-20

,

10-22

AmpFlSTR SEfiler Kit Template

9-3

,

10-3

examining data

9-6

,

10-6

making tables

9-8

,

10-8

troubleshooting genotyping

9-10

,

10-10

understanding the template kit

9-10

,

10-10

using the kit

9-4

,

10-4

amplification, differential amplification of loci

8-38

AmpliTaq Gold DNA Polymerase catalyzing the addition of a 3´ A nucleotide

8-29

Applied Biosystems Technical

Communications

xi

automated genotyping about the software

9-2

,

10-2

AmpFlSTR SEfiler Kit Template

9-3

,

10-3

examining data

9-6

,

10-6

making tables

9-7

,

10-7

troubleshooting genotyping

9-10

,

10-10

understanding the template kit

9-10

,

10-10

using the kit

9-4

,

10-4

before running Genotyper

9-2

,

10-2

C

chemicals required for ABI P

RISM

3100 Genetic

Analyzer protocols

7-30

chromosome location locus designation

1-4

See Also allele; loci

contamination

B-2

conventions, typeface

x

AmpF


DRAFT

March 22, 2012 2:04 pm, SEfilerIX.fm

Index-1

D

D3S1358, locus designation

1-4

degraded DNA

8-38

differential degree of loci

8-38

DNA amplification using bloodstained FTA cards

2-10

effect of DNA quantity on results

2-7

,

2-10

,

8-36

extraction protocols storing samples

C-3

how degraded DNA affects which loci amplify

8-38

mixed samples causing extra peaks

8-40

,

8-44

detecting

8-40

detection limit

8-42

resolving

8-42

,

8-44

quantification

D-2

using agarose gel analysis to examine the

DNA

8-38

Documentation related

ix

FTA cards, using bloodstained cards for amplification

2-10

G

gels

ABI P

RISM

377 protocols

6-3

,

6-9

,

6-25

using an agarose gel to examine

DNA

8-38

GeneAmp PCR Instrument accessories for amplification protocol

2-4

GeneScan Analysis software viewing results

4-24

,

5-24

GeneScan-500 LIZ Internal Lane Size

Standard

4-15

,

4-24

,

5-15

,

5-24

,

8-6

,

9-20

,

10-20

GeneScan-500 ROX Internal Lane Size

Standard

6-21

figure, showing peaks

6-27

genotype

AmpFlSTR SGM Plus

1-4

calculating precision data using the allelic ladders

8-6

determining AmpFlSTR Allelic

Ladders

9-20

,

10-20

,

10-22

resolving in mixed samples

8-42

,

8-44

guidelines laboratory setup

B-1

validation studies

8-2

,

8-40

E

effect of DNA quantity on results

2-7

electropherogram causes for extra peaks

8-40

,

8-42

addition of 3´ A nucleotide

8-29

stutter peak

8-22

viewing results

4-24

,

5-24

,

5-26

E-mail address, Technical

Communications

xi

extraction protocols, storing samples

C-3

F

FGA locus designation

1-4

Five-Dye Analysis

1-2

flowchart, 3100

7-3

Index-2

L

laboratory setup

B-1

loci

AmpFlSTR SGM Plus

1-4

differential amplification

8-38

lack of amplification, effect of DNA quantity on results

8-36

Long Ranger gel, preparing for

ABI P

RISM

377

6-6

M

matrix file

4-6

,

5-6

DRAFT

AmpF



P

PCR amplification of tetranucleotide STR loci

(stutter peak)

8-22

inhibitor, minimizing

D-2

troubleshooting

A-1

PCR product precautions when handling

B-2

using too much

D-2

phenol-chloroform DNA extraction

C-2

population, known alleles in the AmpFlSTR

Allelic Ladders

1-4

preface

ix

process flowchart, 3100

7-3

protocols

ABI P

RISM


3-3

,

4-31

,

5-32

data analysis

4-19

,

4-23

,

5-19

,

5-23

ending the run

4-28

,

5-29

preparing and loading samples

4-15

,

5-15


4-17

,

5-16

setting up a run

3-6

,

4-3

,

5-3


3-4

using POP-4 polymer for analysis

4-2

,

4-28

,

5-2

,

5-29

ABI P

RISM

377 DNA Sequencer

6-2

,

6-34

data analysis

6-25

dedicated equipment and supplies, reagents required

6-31

Long Ranger solution, preparing gels

6-6

preparing gels

6-3

preparing samples

6-21

running the plate check and prerun modules

6-18


6-24


6-15

,

6-17

setting up the preprocess and analysis parameters

6-10

protocols (continued)

DNA extraction storing samples

C-3

reagents required

6-31

Q

QuantiBlot Human DNA Quantitation Kit commonly asked questions

D-5

using for quantification of human

DNA

D-2

using the kit

D-3

quantification

D-2

commonly asked questions

D-5

QuantiBlot analysis

D-3

R

reagents required for

ABI P

RISM

310 Genetic Analyzer protocols

4-30

,

5-31

ABI P

RISM


6-31

Related documentation

ix

S

samples

DNA from more than one individual

8-40

,

8-44

detecting

8-40

detection limit

8-40

,

8-42

resolving genotypes in mixed samples

8-42

,

8-44

storing for extraction of DNA

C-3

setting up laboratories. See laboratory setup

spectral calibration

7-8

stutter peak or product

8-22

supplies, ABI P

RISM


6-34

AmpF


DRAFT


Index-3

T

tables troubleshooting

A-1

Technical Communications, contacting

xi

training, obtaining information

xi

troubleshooting

A-1

automated genotyping

9-10

,

10-10

typeface conventions

x

V

validation of the AmpFlSTR SEfiler kit loci

8-2

,

8-3

kit reproducibility

8-5

minimum sample requirement

8-45

mixed specimen studies

8-45

mode of inheritance

8-33

optimizing PCR components

8-3

thermal cycler parameters

8-4

validation studies general considerations

8-2

,

8-40

viewing results

4-24

,

5-24

GeneScan Analysis software

4-24

,

5-24

information provided in electropherogram

4-24

,

5-24

,

5-26

vWA, locus designation

1-4

Index-4

DRAFT

AmpF

